FCC ID: SK6-XR520 Xirrus Wireless Array

 

XIRRUS Wireless Array Perlodthe length of the window used to determine whether the count of this type of event exceeded the threshold. Curentthe count of this type of event for the current period. Averagethe average count per period of this type of event. Maximumthe maximum count per period of this type of event. 158 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array

 

 

XIRRUS Wireless Array

* DSCP 40 is typically uaed for video traffic and ig set to Qed lewel 2.

* DSCP 48 is typically used for voice traffic and is set to QoS lewel S=mthe highest level

* All ether DSCP values are set to O05 level 0 {the lowest level Best Effort). Packet Filtering Qin5 classification Filter rules can be used to redefine the 05 priority level to overtide defaults. See Filter Management on page 347. This allows the QoS priority level to be aseigmed based on protecel, source, or destination. Voice Support The QoS priority implementation om the Array give voice packets the highest priority te suppert voice applications High Density 24G Enhancemen}Honeypot SSID Some situations pose problems for all wireless APs. For example, iPhones will remember every SSID and flood the airwaves with probes, even when the weer doesn't request or desire this behavior. In very high density deployments, these probes can consume 2 significant amount of the available wireless bandwidth. The Array offers a feature targeting this problem=2 honeypot SSID. Simply create an SSID named honeypet on the Array, Onee this SSID is created and enabled, it will respond to any station probe looking for an open (unencrypted) S51D that is not configured om the Array. Traffic for a statinn connected te the honeypot SSID may be handled im a varicus ways:

itmay be directed to WPE to display a splash page or offer the user the opportunity fo sign in to your service (see Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 255);

itmay be filtered:

oor it may be dead-ended by defining a specific dead-end VLAN on the honeypot SSID to trap stations. ae Configuring tha Wireless Array

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For operation within 5.15 ~ 5.25GHz / 5.47 ~5.725GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environment. The band from 5600-5650MHz will be disabled by the software during the manufacturing and cannot be changed by the end user. This device meets all the other requirements specified in Part 15E, Section 15.407 of the FCC Rules. FOR MOBILE DEVICE USAGE (>20cm/low power) Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator &

your body. FOR COUNTRY CODE SELECTION USAGE (WLAN DEVICES) Note: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. Industry Canada statement:

This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Caution :

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:

Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Le produit est conforme aux limites d'exposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si l'appareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. FOR MOBILE DEVICE USAGE (>20cm/low power) Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

 

 

Wireless Arrays XR and XN Series February 7, 2013 Release 6.4 Wireless Array XR and XN Series All rights reserved. This document may not be reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by any means without the written consent of Xirrus, Inc. Part Number: 800-0022-001

(Revision F) Trademarks is a registered trademark of Xirrus, Inc. All other trademarks and brand names are marks of their respective holders. Please see Legal Notices, Warnings, Compliance Statements, and Warranty and License Agreements in Appendix C: Notices on page 471. Xirrus, Inc. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 USA Tel:

1.805.262.1600 1.800.947.7871 Toll Free in the US 1.866.462.3980 Fax:

www.xirrus.com Wireless Array Table of Contents List of Figures.................................................................................... xiii Introduction ......................................................................................... 1 The Xirrus Family of Products ............................................................................... 1 Nomenclature .................................................................................................... 2 Why Choose the Xirrus Wireless Array? .............................................................. 3 Wireless Array Product Overview ........................................................................ 5 XR Wireless Array Product Family ................................................................ 6 XR500 Series Arrays .................................................................................. 6 XR-1000 and XR-2000 Series Arrays ....................................................... 6 XR-4000 Series Arrays ............................................................................... 8 XR-6000 Series Arrays ............................................................................... 9 XN Wireless Array Product Family ............................................................. 10 XN Family of Arrays ............................................................................... 10 Enterprise Class Security ............................................................................... 11 Deployment Flexibility .................................................................................. 11 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) .................................................... 12 Enterprise Class Management ...................................................................... 13 Key Features and Benefits ..................................................................................... 14 High Capacity and High Performance ........................................................ 14 Extended Coverage ......................................................................................... 15 Non-Overlapping Channels .......................................................................... 15 SDMA Optimization ...................................................................................... 15 Fast Roaming ................................................................................................... 15 Easy Deployment ............................................................................................ 15 Secure Wireless Access .................................................................................. 16 Applications Enablement .............................................................................. 16 Advanced Feature Sets .......................................................................................... 16 Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM) .................................. 16 Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM) .......................................... 17 Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM) ......................................... 18 About this Users Guide ........................................................................................ 19 Organization .................................................................................................... 19 i Wireless Array Notes and Cautions ........................................................................................ 21 Screen Images .................................................................................................. 21 Product Specifications ........................................................................................... 22 Installing the Wireless Array........................................................... 23 Installation Prerequisites ...................................................................................... 23 Optional Network Components ................................................................... 25 Client Requirements ....................................................................................... 25 Planning Your Installation .................................................................................... 26 General Deployment Considerations .......................................................... 26 Coverage and Capacity Planning ................................................................. 28 Placement .................................................................................................. 28 RF Patterns ................................................................................................ 29 Capacity and Cell Sizes ........................................................................... 30 Fine Tuning Cell Sizes ............................................................................. 31 Roaming Considerations ........................................................................ 32 Allocating Channels ................................................................................ 33 IEEE 802.11n Deployment Considerations ................................................. 35 MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) ........................................................ 36 Multiple Data Streams Spatial Multiplexing ................................... 38 Channel Bonding ..................................................................................... 39 Improved MAC Throughput ................................................................. 40 Short Guard Interval ............................................................................... 40 Obtaining Higher Data Rates ................................................................. 41 802.11n Capacity ...................................................................................... 42 Failover Planning ............................................................................................ 42 Switch Failover Protection ..................................................................... 44 Power Planning ............................................................................................... 45 Power over Gigabit Ethernet ................................................................. 45 Security Planning ............................................................................................ 46 Wireless Encryption ................................................................................ 46 Authentication ......................................................................................... 46 Port Requirements .......................................................................................... 48 Network Management Planning .................................................................. 52 WDS Planning ................................................................................................. 53 Common Deployment Options .................................................................... 56 Installation Workflow ........................................................................................... 57 ii Wireless Array Installing Your Wireless Array ............................................................................ 59 Choosing a Location ....................................................................................... 59 Wiring Considerations ............................................................................ 59 Mounting the Array ....................................................................................... 62 Dismounting the Array .................................................................................. 62 Powering Up the Wireless Array ......................................................................... 63 Array LED Operating Sequences ................................................................. 64 LED Boot Sequence ................................................................................. 64 LED Operation when Array is Running .............................................. 65 Establishing Communication with the Array .................................................... 66 Using the Serial Port ....................................................................................... 67 Using the Ethernet Ports ................................................................................ 67 Starting the WMI ............................................................................................. 69 Logging In ........................................................................................................ 69 Entering the License .............................................................................................. 69 Performing the Express Setup Procedure ........................................................... 71 Procedure for Performing an Express Setup .............................................. 72 Securing Low Level Access to the Array ..................................................... 78 The Web Management Interface ................................................... 83 An Overview .......................................................................................................... 84 Structure of the WMI ............................................................................................. 86 User Interface ......................................................................................................... 88 Utility Buttons .......................................................................................... 91 Logging In ............................................................................................................... 92 Applying Configuration Changes ....................................................................... 92 Character Restrictions .................................................................................... 93 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array ........................................... 95 Array Status Windows .......................................................................................... 96 Array Summary .............................................................................................. 96 Content of the Array Summary Window ............................................ 97 Array Information ........................................................................................ 101 Array Configuration ..................................................................................... 102 Admin History .............................................................................................. 103 Network Status Windows ................................................................................... 103 Network ......................................................................................................... 104 iii Wireless Array Network Map ................................................................................................ 105 Content of the Network Map Window .............................................. 106 Spanning Tree Status .................................................................................... 108 Routing Table ................................................................................................ 109 ARP Table ...................................................................................................... 109 DHCP Leases ................................................................................................. 110 Connection Tracking/NAT ......................................................................... 110 CDP Neighbors ............................................................................................. 111 Network Assurance ...................................................................................... 112 Undefined VLANs ........................................................................................ 113 RF Monitor Windows .......................................................................................... 114 IAPs ................................................................................................................. 115 Spectrum Analyzer ...................................................................................... 116 Intrusion Detection ...................................................................................... 119 Channel History ............................................................................................ 121 Radio Assurance ........................................................................................... 123 Station Status Windows ...................................................................................... 125 Stations ........................................................................................................... 126 Location Map ................................................................................................. 128 RSSI ................................................................................................................. 132 Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) ........................................................................ 133 Noise Floor ..................................................................................................... 135 Max by IAP .................................................................................................... 137 Station Assurance ......................................................................................... 138 Statistics Windows ............................................................................................... 140 IAP Statistics Summary ................................................................................ 140 Per-IAP Statistics ........................................................................................... 141 Network Statistics ......................................................................................... 143 VLAN Statistics ............................................................................................. 144 WDS Statistics ................................................................................................ 145 IDS Statistics .................................................................................................. 146 Filter Statistics ............................................................................................... 147 Station Statistics ............................................................................................ 148 Per-Station Statistics ..................................................................................... 149 Application Control Windows ........................................................................... 150 About Application Control ......................................................................... 150 Application Control ...................................................................................... 151 iv Wireless Array Stations (Application Control) .................................................................... 155 System Log Window ........................................................................................... 156 IDS Event Log Window ...................................................................................... 157 Configuring the Wireless Array.................................................... 159 Express Setup ........................................................................................................ 161 Network ................................................................................................................. 169 Network Interfaces ...................................................................................... 171 Network Interface Ports ........................................................................ 172 Network Bonds ............................................................................................. 175 DNS Settings .................................................................................................. 181 CDP Settings .................................................................................................. 183 Services .................................................................................................................. 184 Time Settings (NTP) ..................................................................................... 185 NetFlow .......................................................................................................... 187 Wi-Fi Tag ....................................................................................................... 188 System Log ..................................................................................................... 190 About Using the Splunk Application for Xirrus Arrays .................. 193 SNMP .............................................................................................................. 194 DHCP Server ................................................................................................. 197 VLANs ................................................................................................................... 199 Understanding Virtual Tunnels .......................................................... 199 VLAN Management ..................................................................................... 201 Tunnels .................................................................................................................. 204 About Xirrus Tunnels ........................................................................... 204 Tunnel Management .................................................................................... 205 SSID Assignments ......................................................................................... 206 Security .................................................................................................................. 208 Understanding Security ........................................................................ 209 Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI ............................ 212 Using the Arrays Default Certificate ................................................. 212 Using an External Certificate Authority ............................................. 213 Admin Management .................................................................................... 214 Admin Privileges .......................................................................................... 216 Admin RADIUS ............................................................................................ 218 About Creating Admin Accounts on the RADIUS Server ............. 218 Management Control ................................................................................... 221 v Wireless Array Access Control List ....................................................................................... 227 Global Settings .............................................................................................. 230 External Radius ............................................................................................. 234 About Creating User Accounts on the RADIUS Server .................. 234 Internal Radius .............................................................................................. 238 Rogue Control List ........................................................................................ 240 SSIDs ...................................................................................................................... 242 Understanding SSIDs ............................................................................ 243 Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array ........................ 244 High Density 2.4G EnhancementHoneypot SSID ......................... 248 SSID Management ........................................................................................ 249 SSID List (top of page) .......................................................................... 250 SSID Limits ............................................................................................. 254 Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings ....................................... 255 WPA Configuration Settings .............................................................. 259 RADIUS Configuration Settings ......................................................... 260 Active IAPs .................................................................................................... 261 Per-SSID Access Control List ...................................................................... 262 Groups ................................................................................................................... 264 Understanding Groups ......................................................................... 264 Using Groups ......................................................................................... 265 Group Management ..................................................................................... 266 Group Limits .......................................................................................... 268 IAPs ........................................................................................................................ 271 Understanding Fast Roaming .............................................................. 273 IAP Settings ................................................................................................... 274 Global Settings (IAP) ................................................................................... 280 Beacon Configuration ........................................................................... 282 Station Management ............................................................................. 283 Advanced Traffic Optimization .......................................................... 284 Global Settings .11an .................................................................................... 293 Global Settings .11bgn .................................................................................. 298 Global Settings .11n ...................................................................................... 304 Global Settings .11u ...................................................................................... 307 Understanding 802.11u ......................................................................... 307 Advanced RF Settings .................................................................................. 313 About Standby Mode ............................................................................ 314 vi Wireless Array RF Monitor .............................................................................................. 314 RF Resilience .......................................................................................... 315 RF Power & Sensitivity ......................................................................... 316 RF Spectrum Management ................................................................... 318 Station Assurance .................................................................................. 320 Hotspot 2.0 ..................................................................................................... 322 Understanding Hotspot 2.0 .................................................................. 322 NAI Realms .................................................................................................... 325 Understanding NAI Realm Authentication ....................................... 325 NAI EAP ......................................................................................................... 326 Intrusion Detection ....................................................................................... 328 DoS Attacks ............................................................................................ 329 Impersonation Attacks .......................................................................... 330 About Blocking Rogue APs .................................................................. 331 RF Intrusion Detection and Auto Block Mode .................................. 331 DoS Attack Detection Settings ............................................................. 332 Impersonation Detection Settings ....................................................... 333 LED Settings .................................................................................................. 334 DSCP Mappings ............................................................................................ 335 Roaming Assist .............................................................................................. 336 WDS ....................................................................................................................... 338 About Configuring WDS Links ........................................................... 338 Long Distance Links .............................................................................. 339 WDS Client Links .......................................................................................... 340 Filters ..................................................................................................................... 344 Filter Lists ...................................................................................................... 345 Filter Management ....................................................................................... 347 Clusters .................................................................................................................. 352 Cluster Definition ........................................................................................ 353 Cluster Management ................................................................................... 354 Cluster Operation ........................................................................................ 355 Using Tools on the Wireless Array............................................... 359 System Tools ......................................................................................................... 360 About Licensing and Upgrades ........................................................... 361 System ..................................................................................................... 362 Automatic Updates from Remote Image or Configuration File .... 363 vii Wireless Array Configuration ......................................................................................... 364 Diagnostics ............................................................................................. 366 Web Page Redirect ................................................................................. 368 Network Tools ........................................................................................ 369 Progress and Status Frames ................................................................. 371 CLI ......................................................................................................................... 371 Options .................................................................................................................. 373 Logout .................................................................................................................... 376 The Command Line Interface ...................................................... 377 Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection ................................................. 377 Getting Started with the CLI .............................................................................. 379 Inputting Commands ................................................................................... 379 Getting Help .................................................................................................. 379 Top Level Commands ......................................................................................... 381 Root Command Prompt ............................................................................... 381 configure Commands ................................................................................... 382 show Commands .......................................................................................... 385 statistics Commands ..................................................................................... 388 Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 390 acl .................................................................................................................... 390 admin .............................................................................................................. 391 cdp ................................................................................................................... 392 clear ................................................................................................................. 393 cluster ............................................................................................................. 394 contact-info .................................................................................................... 395 date-time ........................................................................................................ 396 dhcp-server .................................................................................................... 397 dns ................................................................................................................... 398 file .................................................................................................................... 399 filter ................................................................................................................. 402 Air Cleaner ............................................................................................. 403 group .............................................................................................................. 406 hostname ........................................................................................................ 406 interface .......................................................................................................... 407 load ................................................................................................................. 408 location ........................................................................................................... 408 viii Wireless Array management .................................................................................................. 409 more ................................................................................................................ 410 netflow ............................................................................................................ 411 no ..................................................................................................................... 412 quit .................................................................................................................. 414 radius-server .................................................................................................. 414 reboot .............................................................................................................. 415 reset ................................................................................................................. 415 restore ............................................................................................................. 416 run-tests .......................................................................................................... 417 security ........................................................................................................... 419 snmp ............................................................................................................... 420 ssid .................................................................................................................. 421 syslog .............................................................................................................. 422 uptime ............................................................................................................. 423 vlan .................................................................................................................. 424 wifi-tag ........................................................................................................... 425 Sample Configuration Tasks .............................................................................. 426 Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID .................................................. 427 Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP ......................................... 428 Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP ........................... 429 Enabling Global IAPs ................................................................................... 430 Disabling Global IAPs .................................................................................. 431 Enabling a Specific IAP ................................................................................ 432 Disabling a Specific IAP ............................................................................... 433 Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs .................................. 434 Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs ................................................................ 435 Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ....................................................... 436 Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID ...................................................... 437 Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Tests) .......................... 438 Appendices..................................................................................... 441 Appendix A: Quick Reference Guide ............................................................... 443 Factory Default Settings ...................................................................................... 443 Host Name ..................................................................................................... 443 Network Interfaces ....................................................................................... 443 Serial ........................................................................................................ 443 ix Wireless Array Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 ......................................................................... 444 Server Settings ............................................................................................... 444 NTP .......................................................................................................... 444 Syslog ...................................................................................................... 444 SNMP ...................................................................................................... 445 DHCP .............................................................................................................. 445 Default SSID .................................................................................................. 446 Security .......................................................................................................... 446 Global Settings - Encryption ............................................................... 446 External RADIUS (Global) .................................................................. 447 Internal RADIUS .................................................................................... 448 Administrator Account and Password ...................................................... 448 Management .................................................................................................. 448 Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................................. 449 Appendix B: Technical Support ........................................................................ 451 General Hints and Tips ....................................................................................... 451 Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................................. 452 Multiple SSIDs ............................................................................................... 452 Security ........................................................................................................... 454 VLAN Support .............................................................................................. 457 Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities .......................................... 460 Enabling Monitoring on the Array ..................................................... 460 How Monitoring Works ............................................................................... 460 Radio Assurance ........................................................................................... 461 Radio Assurance Options ..................................................................... 462 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus ..................................... 463 Upgrading the Array via CLI ............................................................................. 464 Sample Output for the Upgrade Procedure: ............................................. 465 Contact Information ............................................................................................ 469 Appendix C: Notices ........................................................................................... 471 Notices ................................................................................................................... 471 EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information ........................................ 475 Compliance Information (Non-EU) ................................................................... 482 Safety Warnings ................................................................................................... 483 Translated Safety Warnings ............................................................................... 484 Software License and Product Warranty Agreement ..................................... 485 x Wireless Array Hardware Warranty Agreement ....................................................................... 491 Glossary of Terms.......................................................................... 493 Index................................................................................................ 505 xi Wireless Array xii Wireless Array List of Figures Figure 1. Xirrus Arrays: XR Series ............................................................................ 1 Figure 2. Wireless Array (XR Series) ........................................................................ 5 Figure 3. Wireless Coverage Patterns .................................................................... 11 Figure 4. XP8 - Power over Ethernet Usage .......................................................... 12 Figure 5. WMI: Array Status.................................................................................... 13 Figure 6. Layout of IAPs (XR-7630) ........................................................................ 14 Figure 7. Wall Thickness Considerations .............................................................. 27 Figure 8. Unit Placement.......................................................................................... 28 Figure 9. Full (Normal) Coverage........................................................................... 29 Figure 10. Adjusting RF Patterns .............................................................................. 29 Figure 11. Custom Coverage ..................................................................................... 30 Figure 12. Connection Rate vs. Distance ................................................................. 30 Figure 13. Transmit Power......................................................................................... 31 Figure 14. Overlapping Cells..................................................................................... 32 Figure 15. Allocating Channels Manually ............................................................... 34 Figure 16. Classic 802.11 Signal Transmission........................................................ 36 Figure 17. MIMO Signal Processing ......................................................................... 37 Figure 18. Spatial Multiplexing................................................................................. 38 Figure 19. Channel Bonding ...................................................................................... 39 Figure 20. MAC Throughput Improvements.......................................................... 40 Figure 21. Computing 802.11n Data Rates .............................................................. 41 Figure 22. Port Failover Protection........................................................................... 42 Figure 23. Switch Failover Protection ..................................................................... 44 Figure 24. Port Requirements for XMS .................................................................... 48 Figure 25. WDS Link................................................................................................... 53 Figure 26. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection ......................................................... 54 Figure 27. WDS Failover Protection ......................................................................... 54 Figure 28. Installation Workflow .............................................................................. 57 Figure 29. Array Placement ....................................................................................... 59 Figure 30. LED Locations ........................................................................................... 63 Figure 31. Network Interface PortsXR-1000 Series ............................................ 66 Figure 32. Network Interface PortsXR-2000 Series ............................................ 66 Figure 33. Network Interface PortsXR-4000 Series ............................................ 66 Figure 34. Network Interface PortsXR-6000 Series ............................................ 67 List of Figures xiii Wi-Fi Array Figure 35. Network Interface Ports........................................................................... 67 Figure 36. Express Setup ............................................................................................ 71 Figure 37. LEDs are Switched On ............................................................................. 77 Figure 38. Web Management InterfaceOption = New Style............................. 84 Figure 39. Web Management InterfaceNew Style.............................................. 84 Figure 40. Web Management InterfaceOption = Classic Style ......................... 85 Figure 41. Web Management InterfaceClassic Style .......................................... 85 Figure 42. WMI: Frames ............................................................................................. 88 Figure 43. Major Menu Sections Collapsed (on left) .............................................. 89 Figure 44. WMI: Utility Buttons................................................................................ 91 Figure 45. Logging In to the Wireless Array........................................................... 92 Figure 46. Array Summary ........................................................................................ 96 Figure 47. Disabled IAP (Partial View).................................................................... 99 Figure 48. IAP Cells .................................................................................................. 100 Figure 49. Array Information .................................................................................. 101 Figure 50. Show Configuration ............................................................................... 102 Figure 51. Admin Login History............................................................................. 103 Figure 52. Network Settings .................................................................................... 104 Figure 53. Network Map .......................................................................................... 105 Figure 54. Spanning Tree Status.............................................................................. 108 Figure 55. Routing Table .......................................................................................... 109 Figure 56. ARP Table ................................................................................................ 109 Figure 57. DHCP Leases........................................................................................... 110 Figure 58. Connection Tracking .............................................................................. 110 Figure 59. CDP Neighbors ....................................................................................... 111 Figure 60. Network Assurance................................................................................ 112 Figure 61. Undefined VLANs.................................................................................. 113 Figure 62. RF Monitor IAPs ................................................................................. 115 Figure 63. RF Monitor IAPs ................................................................................. 115 Figure 64. RF Spectrum Analyzer........................................................................... 117 Figure 65. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List..................................................... 119 Figure 66. RF Monitor Channel History............................................................. 121 Figure 67. RF Monitor Channel History (Rotated) ........................................... 122 Figure 68. RF Monitor Channel History (Text) ................................................. 122 Figure 69. Radio Assurance ..................................................................................... 123 Figure 70. Stations ..................................................................................................... 126 Figure 71. Location Map........................................................................................... 128 xiv List of Figures Wireless Array Figure 72. Controls for Location Map .................................................................... 129 Figure 73. Station RSSI Values ............................................................................... 132 Figure 74. Station RSSI Values Colorized Graphical View ............................ 132 Figure 75. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values .................................................. 133 Figure 76. Station SNR Values Colorized Graphical View.............................. 134 Figure 77. Station Noise Floor Values ................................................................... 135 Figure 78. Station Noise Floor Values Colorized Graphical View ................ 136 Figure 79. Max by IAP.............................................................................................. 137 Figure 80. Station Assurance ................................................................................... 138 IAP Statistics Summary Page................................................................ 140 Figure 81. Figure 82. Individual IAP Statistics Page ............................................................. 142 Figure 83. Network Statistics................................................................................... 143 Figure 84. VLAN Statistics....................................................................................... 144 Figure 85. WDS Statistics ......................................................................................... 145 Figure 86. IDS Statistics Page ................................................................................. 146 Figure 87. Filter Statistics ......................................................................................... 147 Figure 88. Station Statistics ...................................................................................... 148 Figure 89. Individual Station Statistics Page......................................................... 149 Figure 90. Application Control ............................................................................... 151 Figure 91. Application Control (Pie Charts).......................................................... 153 Figure 92. Application Control (Station Traffic)................................................... 154 Figure 93. Stations (Application Control).............................................................. 155 Figure 94. System Log (Alert Level Highlighted) ................................................ 156 Figure 95. IDS Event Log ........................................................................................ 157 Figure 96. WMI: Express Setup ............................................................................... 161 Figure 97. LEDs are Switched On ........................................................................... 167 Figure 98. Network Interfaces ................................................................................. 169 Figure 99. Network Settings .................................................................................... 171 Figure 100. Network Interface Ports......................................................................... 172 Figure 101. Network Bonds ....................................................................................... 175 Figure 102. Port Modes (a, b)..................................................................................... 177 Figure 103. Port Modes (c) ......................................................................................... 178 Figure 104. Port Modes (d) ........................................................................................ 178 Figure 105. Mirroring Traffic..................................................................................... 180 Figure 106. DNS Settings............................................................................................ 181 Figure 107. CDP Settings............................................................................................ 183 Figure 108. Services..................................................................................................... 184 List of Figures xv Wi-Fi Array Figure 109. Time Settings (Manual Time)................................................................ 185 Figure 110. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled)...................................................... 186 Figure 111. NetFlow.................................................................................................... 187 Figure 112. Wi-Fi Tag.................................................................................................. 188 Figure 113. System Log .............................................................................................. 190 Figure 114. SNMP ....................................................................................................... 194 Figure 115. DHCP Management ............................................................................... 197 Figure 116. VLANs...................................................................................................... 199 Figure 117. VLAN Management............................................................................... 201 Figure 118. Tunnel Summary .................................................................................... 204 Figure 119. Tunnel Management .............................................................................. 205 Figure 120. Tunnel SSID Assignments..................................................................... 206 Figure 121. Security..................................................................................................... 208 Figure 122. Import Xirrus Certificate Authority..................................................... 212 Figure 123. Admin Management .............................................................................. 214 Figure 124. Admin Privileges ................................................................................... 216 Figure 125. Admin RADIUS ...................................................................................... 219 Figure 126. Management Control ............................................................................. 221 Figure 127. Pre-login Banner ..................................................................................... 222 Figure 128. Access Control List................................................................................. 228 Figure 129. Global Settings (Security) ...................................................................... 230 Figure 130. External RADIUS Server ....................................................................... 234 Figure 131. Internal RADIUS Server ........................................................................ 238 Figure 132. Rogue Control List ................................................................................. 240 Figure 133. SSIDs......................................................................................................... 242 Figure 134. Four Traffic Classes ................................................................................ 244 Figure 135. Priority LevelIEEE 802.1p (Layer 2)................................................. 245 Figure 136. Priority LevelDSCP (DiffServ - Layer 3) ......................................... 245 Figure 137. SSID Management .................................................................................. 249 Figure 138. SSID Management .................................................................................. 253 Figure 139. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management)..................... 256 Figure 140. Customizing an Internal Login or Splash Page.................................. 259 Figure 141. Setting Active IAPs per SSID ................................................................ 261 Figure 142. Per-SSID Access Control List ................................................................ 262 Figure 143. Groups...................................................................................................... 264 Figure 144. Group Management .............................................................................. 266 Figure 145. IAPs........................................................................................................... 271 xvi List of Figures Wireless Array Figure 146. Source of Channel Setting ..................................................................... 272 Figure 147. IAP Settings ............................................................................................. 274 Figure 148. Global Settings (IAPs) ............................................................................ 280 Figure 149. Global Settings .11an.............................................................................. 293 Figure 150. Global Settings .11bgn ........................................................................... 298 Figure 151. Global Settings .11n................................................................................ 304 Figure 152. 802.11u Global Settings.......................................................................... 308 Figure 153. Advanced RF Settings............................................................................ 313 Figure 154. Station Assurance (Advanced RF Settings) ........................................ 321 Figure 155. Hotspot 2.0 Settings................................................................................ 324 Figure 156. NAI Realms ............................................................................................. 325 Figure 157. NAI EAP .................................................................................................. 326 Figure 158. Intrusion Detection Settings.................................................................. 328 Figure 159. LED Settings ............................................................................................ 334 Figure 160. DSCP Mappings...................................................................................... 335 Figure 161. Roaming Assist ....................................................................................... 337 Figure 162. WDS.......................................................................................................... 338 Figure 163. Configuring a WDS Link....................................................................... 339 Figure 164. WDS Client Links ................................................................................... 340 Figure 165. Filters ........................................................................................................ 344 Figure 166. Filter Lists ................................................................................................ 345 Figure 167. Filter Management ................................................................................. 347 Figure 168. Filter Category or Application.............................................................. 350 Figure 169. Clusters .................................................................................................... 352 Figure 170. Cluster Definition ................................................................................... 353 Figure 171. Cluster Management.............................................................................. 354 Figure 172. Cluster Mode Operation........................................................................ 355 Figure 173. Cluster Mode Activation ....................................................................... 355 Figure 174. Viewing Statistics in Cluster Mode...................................................... 356 Figure 175. System Tools............................................................................................ 360 Figure 176. Saving the Diagnostic Log..................................................................... 367 Figure 177. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files............................................ 368 Figure 178. System Command (Ping)....................................................................... 369 Figure 179. Radius Ping Output................................................................................ 370 Figure 180. CLI Window ............................................................................................ 371 Figure 181. WMI Display Options............................................................................ 373 Figure 182. iPhone Style Option................................................................................ 374 List of Figures xvii Wi-Fi Array Figure 183. Login Window ........................................................................................ 376 Figure 184. Logging In................................................................................................ 378 Figure 185. Help Window.......................................................................................... 379 Figure 186. Full Help .................................................................................................. 380 Figure 187. Partial Help.............................................................................................. 380 Figure 188. Air Cleaner Filter Rules ......................................................................... 404 Figure 189. Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID............................................ 427 Figure 190. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP................................... 428 Figure 191. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP..................... 429 Figure 192. Enabling Global IAPs............................................................................. 430 Figure 193. Disabling Global IAPs............................................................................ 431 Figure 194. Enabling a Specific IAP.......................................................................... 432 Figure 195. Disabling a Specific IAP......................................................................... 433 Figure 196. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 434 Figure 197. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 435 Figure 198. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ................................................ 436 Figure 199. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID................................................ 437 Figure 200. Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Testing)................ 439 xviii List of Figures Wireless Array Introduction These topics introduce the Xirrus Wireless Array, including an overview of its key features and benefits. The Xirrus Family of Products on page 1. Why Choose the Xirrus Wireless Array? on page 3. Wireless Array Product Overview on page 5. Key Features and Benefits on page 14. Advanced Feature Sets on page 16. About this Users Guide on page 19. The Xirrus Family of Products Figure 1. Xirrus Arrays: XR Series The Xirrus family of products includes the following:

The XR Series of Xirrus Wireless Arrays The newest Xirrus Wireless Arrays have been completely redesigned to provide distributed intelligence, integrated switching capacity of up to 10 Gbps, increased bandwidth, and smaller size. The radios support IEEE802.11 a, b, g, and n clients, and feature the capacity and performance needed to replace switched Ethernet to the desktop. Modular radios allow you to increase the number of radios, upgrade to more powerful radios, or even upgrade later to future technologies like 802.11ac and 802.11.ad as they are introduced. Introduction 1 Wireless Array The XN Series of Xirrus Wireless Arrays The Xirrus Wireless Arrays have the speed and reach of IEEE 802.11n technology. The XN Series of Arrays feature the capacity and performance needed to replace switched Ethernet to the desktop. XN Series Arrays integrate multiple Integrated Access Pointsradios with high-gain directional antennas for increased range and coverage. The Array also incorporates an onboard multi-gigabit switch, wireless controller, and firewall into a single device, along with a dedicated wireless threat sensor and an embedded spectrum analyzer. The Wireless Array provides more than enough bandwidth, security, and control to replace switched Ethernet to the desktop as the primary network connection. Xirrus Management System (XMS) XMS is used for managing large Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface. The XMS server is available pre-installed on the Xirrus Management Appliance series, or as a software package to be installed on your own server hardware (optionally under VMware). Users start the XMS client simply by entering the URL of the XMS server on a web browser. The XMS server manages a number of Wireless Arrays via SNMP. If you need detailed information about this product, refer to the XMS Users Guide. Xirrus-supplied Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) The PoGE modules eliminate the need for running separate power cabling. Additionally, an available eight port module provides distributed power to multiple Arrays, facilitating backup power when connected via a UPS. Nomenclature Throughout this Users Guide, the Xirrus Wireless Array is also referred to as simply the Array. In some instances, the terms product and unit are also used. When discussing specific products from the Xirrus family, the product name is 2 Introduction Wireless Array used (for example, XR-4830). The Wireless Arrays operating system is referred to as the ArrayOS. The Web Management Interface for browser-based management of the Array is referred to as WMI. The XR Series Arrays have very flexible radio capabilities each of the radios may be independently configured to support IEEE802.11a, 11b, 11g, or 11n clients or a combination of client types. One radio is typically assigned as the RF monitor radio, supporting intrusion detection and prevention, self-monitoring, and other services. Radios support both 2.4GHz and 5 GHz, and are named iap1, iap2, ... iapn. The XN series of Arrays have two types of radios the 5 GHz 802.11a/n radios are named an1 through an12 (for 16-port models). The 802.11a/b/g/n radios are named abgn1 to abgn4, and they also support both 2.4GHz and 5 GHz. The Xirrus Management System is referred to as XMS. The Power over Gigabit Ethernet system may be referred to as PoGE. Why Choose the Xirrus Wireless Array?

The deployment of wireless is a necessity as businesses strive for greater flexibility in the workplace and the need for employee mobility rises. The user community is placing spiraling and often unanticipated demands on the wireless network, with the rapid proliferation of devices such as iPads and wireless enabled phones. Xirrus Wireless Arrays have the capability to support the large number of user devices present in todays environments, with superior range and coverage. Wireless is compatible with standard Ethernet protocols, so connectivity with existing wired infrastructure is transparent to users they can still access and use the same applications and network services that they use when plugged into the companys wired LAN (its only the plug that no longer exists). Wireless has come a long way in the past few years and now offers the performance, reliability and security that Enterprise customers have come to expect from their networks. The technology is being driven by four major IEEE standards:

Introduction 3 Wireless Array 802.11a Operates in the 5 GHz range with a maximum speed of 54 Mbps. 802.11b Operates in the 2.4 GHz range with a maximum speed of 11 Mbps. 802.11g Supports a higher transmission speed of 54 Mbps in the 2.4 GHz range and is backwards compatible with 802.11b. 802.11n Uses multiple antennas per radio to boost transmission speed as high as 450Mbps, increasing throughput, range, and maximum number of users. 802.11n is backwards compatible with 802.11a/b/g. Whether you have just a handful of users or thousands of users, wireless has the scalability and flexibility to serve your needs. See Also Key Features and Benefits Wireless Array Product Overview The Xirrus Family of Products 4 Introduction Wireless Array Wireless Array Product Overview Part of the family of Xirrus products, the Wireless Array is a high capacity, multi-

mode device designed with up to four times the coverage and eight times the bandwidth and user density compared with legacy thin access point wireless products. Its distributed intelligence eliminates the use of separate controllers and their accompanying bottlenecks. Each radio, with its directional high-gain antennas, can achieve up to 450 Mbps throughput (on XR-1000 and higher Array modesl). Figure 2. Wireless Array (XR Series) The Wireless Array (regardless of the product model) is Wi-Fi compliant and simultaneously supports 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n clients. The multi-

state design allows you to assign radios to 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (or both) in any desired arrangement. Integrated switching and active enterprise class features such as VLAN support and multiple SSID capability enable robust network compatibility and a high level of scalability and system control. The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) allows global management of hundreds of Arrays from a central location. Multiple versions of the Array with different numbers of Integrated Access Points

(IAPs) support a variety of deployment applications. Introduction 5 Wireless Array XR Wireless Array Product Family XR500 Series Arrays These Arrays have one Gigabit Ethernet port and two radiosone multi-state radio (2.4GHz or 5GHz) and one 5GHz radio. They support 300Mbps, connecting up to 240 users at one time. The XR500 provides flexibility for delivering wireless service in low-to-medium user density scenarios, in challenging deployments in areas with high RF attenuation, and in isolated or physically separated locations. Like other XR Arrays, these models have an integrated controller, firewall, threat sensor and spectrum analyzer. Unlike other XR Arrays, these models have omni-

directional antennas rather than directional antennas. Feature XR520 No. radios: 802.11 a/b/g/n/monitor Radio type

# Integrated omni-directional antennas Integrated wireless switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors 1 Gigabit Uplink Ports Wireless bandwidth Users supported 2 2x2 4 2 Yes 1 300 Mbps 240 XR-1000 and XR-2000 Series Arrays These Arrays include models with one Gigabit Ethernet port and two or four multi-state radios (2.4GHz or 5GHz) that can support 300Mbps or 450Mbps, connecting upwards of 320 users at one time. The Xirrus XR-1000 Series Wireless Array is a two slot chassis available in a two multi-state (2.4GHz or 5GHz) radio configuration supporting up to 160 users with 6 Introduction Wireless Array up to 900Mbps of bandwidth (up to 450 Mbps per radio). The XR-1000 provides flexibility for delivering wireless service in low user density scenarios, challenging deployments in areas with high RF attenuation, and in isolated or physically separated locations. The elliptical-shaped coverage pattern produced by its directional antennas is ideal for covering facilities with central hallways and adjacent rooms commonly found in office buildings, hotels, and dormitories. The Xirrus XR-2000 Series Wireless Array is a four slot chassis available in a four multi-state (2.4GHz or 5GHz) radio configuration supporting up to 320 users with up to 1.8Gbps of bandwidth. These models support a range of low to high-

performance applications, including offices, hospitals, campuses and classrooms, and hotels. Like all XR Arrays except the XR500 Series, these models integrate multi-state radios with high gain directional antennas, an onboard multi-gigabit switch, controller, firewall, threat sensor and spectrum analyzer all built on a modular chassis designed for future extensibility. Feature No. radios: 802.11 a/b/g/n/monitor Radio type

# Integrated antennas Integrated wireless switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors 1 Gigabit Uplink Ports Wireless bandwidth Users supported X R

1 2 2 0 2 2x2 4 2 Yes X R

1 2 3 0 2 3x3 6 2 Yes X R

2 2 2 0 2 2x2 4 4 Yes X R

2 2 3 0 2 3x3 6 4 Yes X R

2 4 2 0 4 2x2 8 4 Yes X R

2 4 3 0 4 3x3 12 4 Yes 1 600 Mbps 480 1 900 Mbps 480 1 600 Mbps 480 1 900 Mbps 480 1 1.2 Gbps 960 1 1.8 Gbps 960 Introduction 7 Wireless Array XR-4000 Series Arrays These Arrays include models with two Gigabit Ethernet ports and four or eight radios (IAPs), connecting up to 640 users at one time and offering a maximum wireless bandwidth of 3.6 Gbps (up to 450 Mbps per radio). Smaller models may be upgraded to eight radios later when your needs change. Feature XR-4420 XR-4430 XR-4820 XR-4830 Number of radios:

802.11a/b/g/n/monitor Radio type

# Integrated antennas Integrated wireless switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors 1 Gigabit Uplink Ports 4 2x2 8 8 Yes 2 4 3x3 12 8 Yes 2 8 2x2 16 8 Yes 2 8 3x3 24 8 Yes 2 Wireless bandwidth 1.2 Gbps 1.8 Gbps 2.4 Gbps 3.6 Gbps Users supported 960 960 1920 1920 8 Introduction Wireless Array XR-6000 Series Arrays These Arrays include models with four Gigabit Ethernet ports and up to sixteen radios, connecting up to 1280 users at one time and offering a maximum wireless bandwidth of 7.2 Gbps (up to 450 Mbps per radio). Smaller models may be upgraded to sixteen radios later when your needs change. A 10 Gigabit modular Ethernet expansion port (DVI connector) is available to meet high traffic demands. It is used only with an optional Xirrus 10 Gig fiber optics adapter. Feature Number of radios:

802.11a/b/g/n/monitor Radio type Number of integrated antennas Integrated wireless switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors 1 Gigabit Uplink Ports External 10 Gigabit Modular Expansion Port Wireless bandwidth (Gbps) Users supported X R

6 8 2 0 8 2x2 16 X R

6 8 3 0 8 3x3 24 X R

7 2 2 0 12 2x2 24 X R

7 2 3 0 12 3x3 36 X R

7 6 2 0 16 2x2 32 X R

7 6 3 0 16 3x3 48 16 16 16 16 16 16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 1 2.4 896 4 1 3.6 896 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 3.6 5.4 4.8 7.2 1344 1344 1792 1792 See Also Key Features and Benefits Wireless Array Product Overview Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) Introduction 9 Wireless Array Why Choose the Xirrus Wireless Array?

XN Wireless Array Product Family The following tables provide an overview of the main features supported by the XN Array product family. XN Family of Arrays Feature XN16 XN12 XN8 XN4 Number of 802.11a/b/g/n radios Number of 802.11a/n radios Total radios Number of integrated antennas Integrated Wi-Fi switch ports Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Uplink Ports 4 12 16 48 16 Yes 2 4 8 12 36 12 Yes 2 4 4 8 36 8 Yes 2 4 0 4 20 4 Yes 1 Wireless bandwidth 4.8 Gbps 3.6 Gbps 2.4 Gbps 1.2 Gbps Users supported 1280 960 640 320 See Also Key Features and Benefits Wireless Array Product Overview Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) Why Choose the Xirrus Wireless Array?

10 Introduction Wireless Array Enterprise Class Security The latest and most effective wireless encryption security standards, including WPA (Wireless Protected Access) and WPA2 with 802.11i AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) are available on the Wireless Array. In addition, the use of an embedded RADIUS server (or 802.1x with an external RADIUS server) ensures user authentication multiple Arrays can authenticate to the optional XMS, ensuring only authorized Arrays become part of the wireless network. With the Xirrus Advanced Feature Sets, intrusion detection and prevention, site monitoring, and RF spectrum analysis are performed in the background by the Array automatically. Deployment Flexibility Xirrus unique multi-radio architecture (on all Arrays except the XR500 Series) generates 360 degrees of sectored high-gain 802.11a/b/g/n coverage that provides extended range and the highest possible data rates for a large volume of clients. Each sector can be adjusted automatically or manually, creating a pattern of wireless coverage perfectly tailored to individual customer needs. For example:

outside wall Figure 3. Wireless Coverage Patterns Figure 3 depicts the following two scenarios:

Full pattern coverage All radios are activated with coverage spanning 360 degrees. If within range, clients will always receive coverage regardless of their geographic Introduction 11 Wireless Array position relative to the Array. Radios may be assigned to 2.4 GHz and/or 5.0 GHz bands in any desired pattern. Partial pattern coverage If desired, the Wireless Array can be deployed close to an exterior wall. In this case, half of all available radios have been deactivated to prevent redundant signals from bleeding beyond the sites perimeter wall. This configuration may also be used in those cases where you want to restrict wireless coverage to selected areas of the buildings interior. Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) The Xirrus-supplied XP1, XP2, and XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules provide power to your Arrays over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data, eliminating the need to run power cables and provide an AC power outlet in proximity to each unit. Managed modules provide the ability to control power using XMS. Figure 4. XP8 - Power over Ethernet Usage Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. 12 Introduction Wireless Array Enterprise Class Management The Wireless Array can be configured with its default RF settings, or the RF settings can be customized using the Arrays embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). The WMI enables easy configuration and control from a graphical console, plus a full complement of troubleshooting tools and statistics. Figure 5. WMI: Array Status In addition, a fully featured Command Line Interface (CLI) offers IT professionals a familiar management and control environment. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is also supported to allow management from an SNMP compliant management tool, such as the optional Xirrus Management System. Introduction 13 Wireless Array For deployments of more than five Arrays, we recommend that you use the Xirrus Management System (XMS). The XMS offers a rich set of features for fine control over large deployments. Key Features and Benefits This section describes some of the key product features and the benefits you can expect when deploying the Wireless Array (the XR-7630 product is used as an example in this section). High Capacity and High Performance Figure 6. Layout of IAPs (XR-7630) The XR-7630 version of the Wireless Array (Figure 6) enables wireless connectivity and easily handles time-sensitive traffic such as voice. This model includes four Gigabit uplink ports for connection to the wired network. Its sixteen IAPs (radios) provide a maximum wireless capacity of 7.2 Gbps, which offers ample reserves for the high demands of current and future applications. Of the sixteen IAPs, fifteen operate as radios which may be set up to serve your choice of client types any or all of 802.11a/b/g/n (5 GHz or 2.4 GHz bands), providing backwards compatibility with 802.11b and 802.11g. In the recommended configuration, one IAP is configured in RF monitoring and intrusion detection/prevention mode. 14 Introduction Wireless Array Extended Coverage One XR-7630 solution enables you to replace fifteen access points (including one omnidirectional IAP for monitoring the network). Fifteen IAP radios with integrated directional antennas provide increased wireless range and enhanced data rates in all directions. With a Wireless Array deployed, far fewer access points are needed and wired-like resiliency is delivered throughout your wireless network. Your Wireless Array deployment ensures:

Continuous connectivity if an IAP (radio) fails. Continuous connectivity if an Array fails. Continuous connectivity if a WDS link or switch fails. Continuous connectivity if a Gigabit uplink or switch fails. Non-Overlapping Channels Complete use of non-overlapping channels limits interference and delivers maximum capacity. On the XR-7630, up to 16 non-overlapping channels are fully utilized across the 5GHz and 2.4GHz spectrums (up to 12 across the 5GHz spectrum plus up to 3 across the 2.4 GHz spectrum typically, one additional radio is used as a dedicated RF monitor). SDMA Optimization SDMA (Spatial Division Multiple Access) technology provides full 360 coverage while allowing independent channel and power output customization. Also supports fast inter-zone handoffs for time-sensitive applications and roaming. Fast Roaming Utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at both Layer 2 and Layer 3. Easy Deployment The Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers real time monitoring and management capabilities for the wireless network ideal for the Enterprise market. It also allows you to import floor plans to help you plan your deployment. The Xirrus Wireless Array chassis has a plenum rated, lockable and tamper resistant case. Introduction 15 Wireless Array Secure Wireless Access Multiple layers of authentication and encryption ensure secure data transmissions. The Wireless Array is 802.11i compliant with line-rate encryption support for 40 and 128 bit WEP, WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption. Authentication is provided via 802.1x, including PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-SIM, EAP-GRC, and LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) passthrough. Intrusion detection and prevention provide proactive monitoring of the environment for threats. Applications Enablement The Wireless Arrays QoS (Quality of Service) functionality combined with true switch capabilities enable high density video and Voice over Wireless LAN deployments. Compliant with 802.1p and 802.1Q standards. See Also Wireless Array Product Overview Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) Why Choose the Xirrus Wireless Array?

Advanced Feature Sets The Wireless Array offers a family of powerful functionality packages, including the RF Performance Manager (RPM), RF Security Manager (RSM), and RF Analysis Manager (RAM). These packages are separately licensed for operation on your Array. Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM) The Xirrus RPM optimizes the bandwidth usage and station performance of 802.11n wireless networks. Leveraging the multiple integrated access point

(multi-radio) design of the Xirrus Wireless Array, RPM manages the allocation of wireless bandwidth to wireless stations across multiple RF channels. The result maximizes overall network performance with superior flexibility and capacity. Today's wireless infrastructure is faced with ever increasing numbers and variations of wireless enabled clients, whether in the form of notebooks, netbooks, smart phones, IP phones, printers, projectors, cameras, RFID tags, etc. The advent 16 Introduction Wireless Array of higher speed 802.11n wireless and its increased use of the 5GHz spectrum adds to the number of variables today's wireless networks must accommodate. Backwards compatibility with older clients is crucial, however their operation in a wireless network can significantly hinder the performance of faster clients. As an example, 802.11b wireless stations communicate more than 10 times slower than 802.11n stations. With each of the Arrays multiple radios operating on a different channel, RPM selects the ideal radio for each station. High-speed stations are grouped together on radios with other high speed stations, while lower speed stations are combined with other lower speed stations. This ensures optimal performance for high-speed 802.11n stations without compromise. The complete feature set of the RPM package includes:

WDS (Wireless Distribution System) for point-to-point communication Wireless Mode per IAP Sharp Cell technology Wireless Data Rate Optimization Wireless Traffic Shaping Wireless Voice Call Admission Control Fast Layer 2 and 3 Roaming Standby Mode Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM) The Xirrus RSM improves security and minimizes the risk in deploying 802.11n wireless networks. Leveraging an integrated 24/7 threat sensor and hardware-

based encryption/decryption in each Array, RSM secures the wireless network from multiple types of threats. The result delivers uncompromised overall network security with superior flexibility and performance. Today's wireless networks face a number of potential security threats in the form of rogue access points, ad-hoc clients, unauthorized clients, wireless-based attacks, eavesdropping, etc. As 802.11n is increasingly adopted in enterprise networks, defending against these threats becomes more critical. With the Arrays Introduction 17 Wireless Array dedicated threat sensor radio scanning all channels in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz spectrums, RSM searches for security threats and automatically mitigates them. High performance encryption/decryption in the enterprise wireless network is a must. The wireless network needs to support each client using the highest level of encryption (WPA2 Enterprise/128 bit AES) and without degrading the overall performance of the network. Xirrus incorporates hardware-based encryption/

decryption into each Array, delivering line-rate encryption at the edge of the network instead of at a choke point within a centralized controller. The complete feature set of the RSM package includes:

Wireless IDS/IPS (Intrusion Detection/Prevention System) Wireless stateful firewall User group policies Authenticated guest access gateway NAC integration Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM) The RF Advanced Analysis Manager (RAM) tests and troubleshoots 802.11n wireless networks. The deployment of 802.11n presents a set of unique challenges based on technology differences with legacy 802.11a/b/g networks, both on the wireless infrastructure and client side. Xirrus' RAM equips each Wireless Array with a powerful set of tools and features to optimally tune and verify an 802.11n installation, as well as give IT administrators the ability to troubleshoot issues that may occur within the wireless environment. The 802.11n standard will continue to evolve over the next several years with additional performance and optional functions, along with ongoing stream of IEEE 802.11 amendments. This changing wireless landscape mandates that appropriate tools are available to the user to analyze, optimize, and troubleshoot their changing environments. The distributed architecture of the Array enables the execution of powerful wireless and networking analysis at the edge of the network where packets traverse the wireless-to-wired boundary. The Array includes an embedded 18 Introduction Wireless Array wireless controller with the necessary computing and memory resources to provide these functions securely at the network's edge. The key elements of the RAM package include:

RF Analysis An embedded Spectrum Analyzer leverages the dedicated threat sensor radio in each Wireless Array to provide a continual view of utilization, interference, and errors across all available wireless channels. Packet Analysis Integrated packet capture provides filterable views of all traffic traversing on the wired and wireless interfaces of the Array. Performance Analysis Embedded traffic generation enables the throughput of the Arrays wireless or wired interfaces to be analyzed. Failure Recovery Radio Assurance provides an automatic self-test and self healing mechanism that ensures continuous system operation. Netflow Support Network Tools: ping, RADIUS ping, traceroute About this Users Guide This Users Guide provides detailed information and procedures that will enable wireless network administrators to install, configure and manage the Wireless Array so that end users can take full advantage of the products features and functionality without technical assistance. Organization Topics and procedures are organized by function under the following chapter headings:

Introduction Provides a brief introduction to wireless technology, an overview of the product, including its key features and benefits, and presents the product specifications. Installing the Wireless Array Defines prerequisites for deploying and installing the Array and provides instructions to help you plan and complete a successful installation. Introduction 19 Wireless Array The Web Management Interface Offers an overview of the products embedded Web Management Interface, including its content and structure. It emphasizes what you need to do to ensure that any configuration changes you make are applied, and provides a list of restricted characters. It also includes instructions for logging in to the Array with your Web browser. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Describes the status and statistics displays available on the Array using its embedded Web Management Interface. Configuring the Wireless Array Contains procedures for configuring the Array using its embedded Web Management Interface. Using Tools on the Wireless Array Contains procedures for using utility tools provided in the Web Management Interface. It includes procedures for upgrading the system firmware, uploading and downloading configurations and other files, using diagnostic tools, and resetting the Array to its factory defaults. The Command Line Interface Includes the commands and the command structure used by the Wireless Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing a Telnet connection to the Array. This chapter also includes some sample key configuration tasks using the CLI. Appendix A: Quick Reference Guide Contains the products factory default settings. Appendix B: Technical Support Offers guidance to resolve technical issues, including general hints and tips to enhance your product experience, and a procedure for isolating problems within an Array-enabled wireless network. Also includes Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and Xirrus contact information. 20 Introduction Wireless Array Appendix C: Notices Contains the legal notices, licensing, and compliance statements for the Array. Please read this section carefully. Glossary of Terms Provides an explanation of terms directly related to Xirrus product technology, organized alphabetically. Index The index is a valuable information search tool. Use the index to locate specific topics discussed in this Users Guide. Simply click on any page number in the index to jump to the referenced topic. Notes and Cautions The following symbols are used throughout this Users Guide:

information. This symbol is used for general notes that provide useful supplemental

This symbol is used for cautions. Cautions provide critical information that may adversely affect the performance of the product. Screen Images Some screen images of the Web Management Interface have been modified for clarity. For example, an image may have been cropped to highlight a specific area of the screen, and/or sample data may be included in some fields. Introduction 21 Product Specifications Please refer to the Xirrus web site for the latest specifications for these Arrays www.xirrus.com Wireless Array 22 Introduction Wireless Array Installing the Wireless Array The instructions for completing a successful installation include the following topics:

Installation Prerequisites on page 23. Planning Your Installation on page 26. Installation Workflow on page 57. Installing Your Wireless Array on page 59. Powering Up the Wireless Array on page 63. Establishing Communication with the Array on page 66. Performing the Express Setup Procedure on page 71. Installation Prerequisites Your Wireless Array deployment requires the presence of hardware and services in the host wired/wireless network, including:

Power Source Most Arrays are powered via Xirrus-supplied Power over Gigabit Ethernet. PoGE supplies power over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data, thus reducing cabling and installation effort. PoGE power injector modules are available in 1-, 2-, and 8-port configurations and are typically placed near your Gigabit Ethernet switch. An AC outlet is required for each injector module. Current Array models have integrated splitters, so no separate splitter is required. Ethernet ports You need at least one 100/1000 BaseT port to establish wired Gigabit Ethernet connectivity. XR Series Arrays have one, two, or four Gigabit ports, depending on the model (see XR Wireless Array Product Family on page 6). XN Series Arrays have one or two Gigabit ports, depending on the model. Some models also have one 10/100 BaseT port which may be used for product management if desired. See XN Wireless Array Product Family on page 10. Installing the Wireless Array 23 Wireless Array

The Arrays Ethernet ports should be connected to an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hub if a hub is used, we recommend that you do not bond-

pair Ethernet ports. Secure Shell (SSH) utility To establish secure remote command line access to the Array, you need a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY. The utility must be configured to use SSH-2, since the Array will only allow SSH-2 connections. Secure Web browser Either Internet Explorer (version 7.0 or higher), Mozilla Firefox (version 3.0 or higher), Chrome (version 3.0 or higher), or Safari (version 5.0 or higher). A secure Web browser is required for Web-based management of the Array. The browser must be on the same subnet as the Array, or you must set a static route for management as described in the warning above. Serial connection capability To connect directly to the console port on the Array (all models except XR500 and XR-1000 Series), your computer must be equipped with a male 9-pin serial port and terminal emulation software (for example, HyperTerminal). The Xirrus Array only supports serial cable lengths up to 25 per the RS-232 specification. Use the following settings when establishing a serial connection:

Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control 115,200 8 None 1 None 24 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Optional Network Components The following network components are optional. Xirrus Management System (XMS) The optional XMS offers powerful management features for small or large Wireless Array deployments. External RADIUS server Although your Array comes with an embedded RADIUS server, for 802.1x authentication in large deployments you may want to add an external RADIUS server. Client Requirements The Wireless Array should only be used with Wi-Fi certified client devices. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Failover Planning Planning Your Installation Installing the Wireless Array 25 Wireless Array Planning Your Installation This section provides guidelines and examples to help you plan your Xirrus Wireless Array deployment to achieve the best overall coverage and performance. We recommend you conduct a site survey to determine the best location and settings for each Array you install. The following topics are discussed:

General Deployment Considerations on page 26 Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 28 IEEE 802.11n Deployment Considerations on page 35 Failover Planning on page 42 Power Planning on page 45 Security Planning on page 46 Port Requirements on page 48 Network Management Planning on page 52 WDS Planning on page 53 Common Deployment Options on page 56 For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the Array, see the Xirrus Voice over Wireless Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. General Deployment Considerations For optimal placement of Arrays, we recommend that a site survey be performed by a qualified Xirrus partner. The Wireless Arrays unique multi-radio architecture generates 360 degrees of sectored high-gain 802.11a/b/g/n or 802.11a/b/g coverage that provides extended range. (Note that XR500 Series radios are omni-directional rather than sectored.) However, the number, thickness and location of walls, ceilings or other objects that the wireless signals must pass through may affect the range. Typical ranges vary depending on the types of materials and background RF (radio 26 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array frequency) noise at your location. To maximize wireless range, follow these basic guidelines:

1. Keep the number of walls and ceilings between the Array and your receiving devices to a minimum each wall or ceiling can reduce the wireless range from between 3 and 90 feet (1 to 30 meters). Position your devices so that the number of walls or ceilings is minimized. 2. Be aware of the direct line between each device. For example, a wall that is 1.5 feet thick (half a meter) at 90 is actually almost 3 feet thick (or 1 meter) when viewed at a 45 angle. At an acute 2 degree angle the same wall is over 42 feet (or 14 meters) thick! For best reception, try to ensure that your wireless devices are positioned so that signals will travel straight through a wall or ceiling. 90 45 2 1.5 feet/

.5 m

~ 3 feet/

1 m Figure 7. Wall Thickness Considerations

> 42 feet\

14 m 3. Try to position wireless client devices so that the signal passes through drywall (between studs) or open doorways and not other materials that can adversely affect the wireless signal. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Common Deployment Options Installation Prerequisites Installing the Wireless Array 27 Wireless Array Coverage and Capacity Planning This section considers coverage and capacity for your deployment(s), including placement options, RF patterns and cell sizes, area calculations, roaming considerations, and channel allocations. Note that several advanced features in this section are part of the Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM). They require the license installed on the Array to include support for RPM. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. XR500 Series radios are omni-directional rather than directional (sectored), and discussions involving sectored radios are not applicable to these Arrays. Placement Use the following guidelines when considering placement options:

1. The best placement option for the Array is ceiling-mounted within an open plan environment (cubicles rather than fixed walls). 2. Keep the Array away from electrical devices or appliances that generate RF noise. Because the Array is generally mounted on ceilings, be aware of its position relative to lighting (especially fluorescent lighting) we recommend maintaining a distance of at least 3 to 6 feet (1 to 2 meters). 100 ft/

30 m 100 ft/ 30m 100 ft/ 30 m Figure 8. Unit Placement 28 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array 3. If using multiple Arrays in the same area, maintain a distance of at least 100ft/30m between Arrays if there is direct line-of-sight between units, or at least 50ft/15m if a wall or other barrier exists between units. RF Patterns The Wireless Array allows you to control automatically or manually the pattern of wireless coverage that best suits your deployment needs. You can choose to operate with full coverage, half coverage, or custom coverage (by enabling or disabling individual sectors). Full (Normal) Coverage In normal operation, the Array provides a full 360 degrees of coverage. Figure 9. Full (Normal) Coverage Half Coverage Figure 10. Adjusting RF Patterns outside wall If installing a unit close to an exterior wall, you can deactivate half of the radios to prevent redundant signals from bleeding beyond the wall and extending Installing the Wireless Array 29 Wireless Array service into public areas. The same principle applies if you want to restrict service to an adjacent room within the site. Custom Coverage Where there are highly reflective objects in proximity to the Array, you can turn off specific radios to avoid interference and feedback. reflective object Figure 11. Custom Coverage Capacity and Cell Sizes Cell sizes should be estimated based on the number of users, the applications being used (for example, data/video/voice), and the number of Arrays available at the location. The capacity of a cell is defined as the minimum data rate desired for each sector multiplied by the total number of sectors being used. Figure 12. Connection Rate vs. Distance Figure 12 shows relative connection rates for 802.11n vs. 802.11a/g and 802.11b, and the effect of distance on the connection rates. Wireless environments can vary 30 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array greatly so the actual rates may be different depending on the specific network deployment. The XN4 has a smaller range than the larger Arrays. Fine Tuning Cell Sizes Adjusting the transmit power allows you to fine tune cell sizes. There are four standard sizes Small, Medium, Large, or Max (the default is Max). There is also an Auto setting that automatically determines the best cell size, and a Manual setting that allows you to choose your power settings directly. Small Medium Large Figure 13. Transmit Power Auto Cell Size is an automatic, self-tuning mechanism that balances cell size between Arrays to guarantee coverage while limiting the RF energy that could extend beyond the organizational boundary. Auto Cell uses communication between Arrays to dynamically set radio power so that complete coverage is provided to all areas, yet at the minimum power level required. This helps to minimize potential interference with neighboring networks. Additionally, Arrays running Auto Cell automatically detect and compensate for coverage gaps caused by system interruptions. To enable the Auto Cell Size feature, go to RF Power &

Sensitivity on page 316. For a complete discussion of the Auto Cell size feature, see the Xirrus Auto Cell Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. Installing the Wireless Array 31 If you are installing many units in proximity to each other, we recommend that you use Auto Cell Size; otherwise, reduce the transmit power using manual settings to avoid excessive interference with other Arrays or installed APs. See also, Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 28. Wireless Array Sharp Cell XR500 Series radios are omni-directional rather than directional (sectored),. This feature is not applicable to these Arrays. This patented Xirrus RF management option automatically creates more intelligently defined cells and improves performance by creating smaller, high-

throughput cells. By dynamically limiting each cell to a defined boundary (cell size), the trailing edge bleed of RF energy is reduced, thus minimizing interference between neighboring Wireless Arrays or other Access Points. To enable the Sharp Cell feature, go to RF Power & Sensitivity on page 316. For more information about this feature, see the Xirrus Sharp Cell Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. Roaming Considerations Cells should overlap approximately 10 - 15% to accommodate client roaming. ROAMING 10 - 15% overlap Figure 14. Overlapping Cells 32 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Allocating Channels Because the Wireless Array is a multi-channel device, allocating the best channels to radios is important if peak performance is to be maintained. Automatic Channel Selection We recommend that you allow the Array to make intelligent channel allocation decisions automatically. In the automatic mode, channels are allocated dynamically, driven by changes in the environment. Auto Channel assignment is performed by scanning the surrounding area for RF activity on all channels, then automatically selecting and setting channels on the Array to the best channels available. This function is typically executed when initially installing Arrays in a new location and may optionally be configured to execute periodically to account for changes in the RF environment over time. Auto Channel selection has significant advantages, including:

Allows the Array to come up for the first time and not interfere with existing equipment that may be already running, thereby limiting co-

channel interference. More accurately tunes the RF characteristics of a wireless installation than manual configuration since the radios themselves are scanning the environment from their physical location. May be configured to run periodically. To set up the automatic channel selection feature, go to Advanced RF Settings on page 313. Installing the Wireless Array 33 Wireless Array Manual Channel Selection You can manually assign channels on a per radio basis, though manual selection is not recommended (and not necessary). To avoid co-channel interference, do not select adjacent channels for radios that are physically next to each other. Maintain channel separation Figure 15. Allocating Channels Manually See Also Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites 34 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array IEEE 802.11n Deployment Considerations Note that the license installed on the Array must include support for 802.11n. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. The Xirrus Arrays support IEEE 802.11n on all IAPs, in both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. Use of 802.11n offers significant benefits:

Higher data rates Higher throughput Supports more users More robust connections Increased coverage area More secure connections supports WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) These benefits result in better support for a wide range of applications such as voice and video, intensive usage such as CAD/CAM and backups, dense user environments, and for manufacturing and warehousing environments. While 802.11n increases coverage area by almost doubling the reach, you must consider the legacy wireless devices in your network. Wireless stations connecting using 802.11a/b/g will still be subject to a reach of up to 100 feet, depending on the environment. The techniques that 802.11n uses to realize these performance improvements, and the results that can be expected are discussed in:

MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) on page 36 Multiple Data Streams Spatial Multiplexing on page 38 Channel Bonding on page 39 Improved MAC Throughput on page 40 Short Guard Interval on page 40 Obtaining Higher Data Rates on page 41 802.11n Capacity on page 42 Two very important techniques to consider are Channel Bonding and Multiple Data Streams Spatial Multiplexing because they contribute a large portion of Installing the Wireless Array 35 Wireless Array 802.11ns speed improvements and because they are optional and configurable, as opposed to the parts of 802.11n that are fixed. While the settings for 802.11n IAPs come pre-configured on the Array for robust performance in typical usage, you should review the settings for your deployment, especially channel bonding. A global setting is provided to enable or disable 802.11n mode. See Global Settings

.11n on page 304 to configure 802.11n operation. MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) signal processing is one of the core technologies of 802.11n. It mitigates interference and maintains broadband performance even with weak signals. Prior to 802.11n, a data stream was transmitted via one antenna. At the receiving end, the antenna with the best signal was selected to receive data. (Figure 16) Figure 16. Classic 802.11 Signal Transmission MIMO signal processing uses multiple antennas to send and receive data. It takes advantage of multipath reflections to improve signal coherence and greatly increase receiver sensitivity (Figure 17). 36 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Antenna 1 Signal Receiver Antenna 2 Signal Antenna 3 Signal MIMO Processed Signal A t t e n u a t i o n Frequency Across Subcarriers Figure 17. MIMO Signal Processing these signals are used Multipath signals were considered to be interference by 802.11a/b/g radios, and degraded performance. In 802.11n, to enhance performance. This extra sensitivity can be used for greater range or higher data rates. The enhanced signal is the processed sum of individual antennas. Signal processing eliminates nulls and fading that any one antenna would see. MIMO signal processing is sophisticated enough to discern multiple spatial streams (see Multiple Data Streams Spatial Multiplexing). There are no settings to configure for MIMO. Installing the Wireless Array 37 Wireless Array Multiple Data Streams Spatial Multiplexing Spatial Multiplexing transmits completely separate data streams on different antennas (in the same channel) that are recombined to produce new 802.11n data rates. Higher data rates are achieved by splitting the original data stream into separate data streams. Each separate stream is transmitted on a different antenna

(using its own RF chain). MIMO signal processing at the receiver can detect and recover each stream. Streams are then recombined, yielding higher data rates. Data Stream Transmitter Tx 1 Tx 2 Tx N M M Rx 1 Rx 2 Rx M Receiver Data Stream Figure 18. Spatial Multiplexing Spatial multiplexing can double, triple, or quadruple the date rate, depending on the number of transmit antennas used. You can configure the number of chains

(i.e., streams) separately for transmitting and receiving. By default, the Array uses three chains for transmitting and receiving (see Global Settings .11n on page 304). 38 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Channel Bonding Channel bonding increases data rates by combining two adjacent 20 MHz channels into one 40 MHz channel. This increases the data rate to slightly more than double. A bonded 40 MHz channel is specified in terms of the Primary channel and the adjacent channel to Bond. The Bond channel is represented by +1 to use the channel above the Primary channel, or -1 to use the channel below. In the example shown, Channel 40 is the Primary channel and it is bonded to Channel 36, the channel below it, by specifying -1. Be aware that Channel Bonding can make channel planning more difficult, since you are using two channels for an IAP. We recommend the use of the 5 GHz band, since it has many more channels than the 2.4 GHz band, and thus more channels are available for bonding. The Array provides an Automatic Channel Bonding setting that will automatically select the best channel for bonding on each IAP. If you enable this option, you may select whether bonding will be dynamic (the bonded channel changes in response to environmental conditions) or static (the bonded channel will not be changed. See Global Settings .11n on page 304. To configure channel bonding manually, on a per-IAP basis, see IAP Settings on page 274. Ch#

36 40 Ch#

(40, -1) 20 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz Standard 802.11 channels are effectively 20MHz wide. Channel bonding combines two adjacent 20MHz channels into a single 40MHz channel providing increased throughput. Figure 19. Channel Bonding Installing the Wireless Array 39 Wireless Array Improved MAC Throughput These changes make 802.11n transmission of MAC frames 40% more efficient than legacy transmission:

MAC data frames are combined and given a single PHY header. Implicit Block ACK acknowledges all data frames within a combined frame. Spacing between frames is reduced. Frame Aggregation Legacy Operation Data Frame ACK Frame Data Frame ACK Frame Data Frame ACK Frame 1 1 High Throughput Operation 1 2 Data Frame

2 N RIFS Usage (Reduced Inter-Frame Spacing) Legacy Operation 2

N N Block ACK Frame

1 2 N PHY Header MAC Header Data Frame Payload ACK Frame Payload Data Frame ACK Frame Data Frame ACK Frame Data Frame ACK Frame 1 1 2 SIFS SIFS High Throughput Operation Data Frame Data Frame 1 RIFS 2

2

Block ACK Request Frame 2 RIFS SIFS Data Frame N N N Block ACK Response Frame 1 2

N Figure 20. MAC Throughput Improvements Short Guard Interval This option reduces the wait time between signals that are being sent out over the air. The guard interval provides immunity to propagation delays and reflections, and is normally 800 ns (long). By using a short guard interval (400 ns), the data rate is increased by approximately 11%. The short interval may be used in many environments (especially indoors). If the short guard interval is used in an inappropriate environment, the signal quality will suffer and throughput will decrease. See Global Settings .11n on page 304 to configure the guard interval. 40 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Obtaining Higher Data Rates The data rate increase obtained by using 802.11n on an Array is incremental, based on the technologies that are applied and the options that you select:

Higher encoding rates (Mandatory in 802.11n) Spatial Streams (Mandatory, but multiplier varies directly with number of streams selected.) Channel Bonding (Mandatory in 802.11n, apply multiplier to IAP if it is bonded.) Short Guard Interval (Optional) See Figure 21 to see the 802.11n data rate increase for an IAP. Apply this increase to the 802.11 a, b or g data rates selected for the Array. Choose New Base Encoding + Modulation BPSK (6.5) QPSK (13, 19.5) QAM-16 (26, 39) QAM-64 (58.5, 65) x Optionally Multiply by 2, 3, 4 for the Number of Additional Spatial Streams x Optionally Multiply By 2.077 to Bond Two 20MHz Channels x Optionally Multiply by 1.11 for Shorter Guard Interval to Increase Symbol Rate

New 11n Data Rate Figure 21. Computing 802.11n Data Rates Installing the Wireless Array 41 Wireless Array 802.11n Capacity 802.11n offers major increases in capacity over previous 802.11 standards, as shown in the table below. 802.11 Mode

# Channels Max Theoretical Capacity Fast Ethernet 802.11 a/n: 3 Streams 802.11 a/n: 2 Streams 802.11 a/n: 1 Stream 802.11 a 802.11 g/n: 3 Streams 802.11 g 802.11 b No 23 23 23 23 3 3 3 Yes 23 * 450 Mbps = 10.2 Gbps 23 * 300 Mbps = 6.8 Gbps 23 * 150 Mbps = 3.4 Gbps 23 * 54 Mbps = 1.2 Gbps 3 * 450 Mbps = 1.35 Gbps

(1 or 2 streams have proportionally lower capacity) 3 * 54 Mbps = 162 Mbps 3 * 11 Mbps = 33 Mbps Failover Planning This section discusses failover protection at the unit and port levels. To ensure that service is continued in the event of a port failure, you can utilize two Gigabit Ethernet ports simultaneously as a bonded pair (on Arrays with two or more Gigabit ports). Multiple port connections Ethernet switch Figure 22. Port Failover Protection 42 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array In addition, the Array has full failover protection between the bonded-pair Gigabit ports (see following table). Interface Fast Ethernet Bridges Data?

No Gigabit port Yes Bonded Gigabit port Yes Bridges Fails Over Management Traffic?

To:

IP address Yes Yes Yes None DHCP or static Bonded port Bonded port DHCP or static Same The Wireless Array Gigabit Ethernet ports actually support a number of modes:

802.3ad Link Aggregation Load Balancing Broadcast Link Backup Mirrored For more details on Gigabit port modes and their configuration, please see Network Bonds on page 175. Installing the Wireless Array 43 Switch Failover Protection To ensure that service is continued in the event of a switch failure, you can connect Arrays having multiple Gigabit ports to more than one Ethernet switch

(not a hub). Wireless Array Ethernet connections Ethernet switch Backup switch Figure 23. Switch Failover Protection Gigabit Ethernet connections must be on the same subnet. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Installation Prerequisites Network Management Planning Planning Your Installation Power Planning Security Planning 44 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Power Planning All XR and XN Series Array models support Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) with an integrated splitter. This section discusses PoGE power. Power over Gigabit Ethernet To deliver power to the Array, you must use Xirrus-supplied may use the optional XP1, XP2, or XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) modules. They provide power over Cat 5e or Cat 6 cables to the Array without running power cables see Figure 4 on page 12. Specific models of the Array are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see the Power over Gigabit Ethernet Installation and User Guide. When using Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable, power can be provided up to a distance of 100m. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Failover Planning Network Management Planning Security Planning Installing the Wireless Array 45 Wireless Array Security Planning This section offers some useful guidelines for defining your preferred encryption and authentication method. For additional information, see Understanding Security on page 209 and the Security section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 452. Note that several advanced features in this section are part of the Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM). They require the license installed on the Array to include support for RSM. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. Wireless Encryption Encryption ensures that no user can decipher another users data transmitted over the airwaves. There are three encryption options available to you, including:

WEP-40bit or WEP-128bit Because WEP is vulnerable to cracks, we recommend that you only use this for legacy devices that cannot support a stronger encryption type. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) This is much more secure than WEP and uses TKIP for encryption. Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2) with AES This is government-grade encryption available on most new client adapters and uses the AESCCM encryption mode (Advanced Encryption StandardCounter Mode). Authentication Authentication ensures users are who they say they are, and occurs when users attempt to join the wireless network and periodically thereafter. The following authentication methods are available with the Wireless Array:

RADIUS 802.1x 802.1x uses a remote RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different authentication methods (EAP-TLS, EAP-

TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and EAP-LEAP Passthrough). Administrators may 46 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array also be authenticated via RADIUS when preferred, or to meet particular security standards. Xirrus Internal RADIUS server Recommended for smaller numbers of users (about 100 or less). Supports EAP-PEAP only Pre-Shared Key Uses a pass-phrase or key that is manually distributed to all authorized users. The same passphrase is given to client devices and entered into each Array. MAC Access Control Lists (ACLs) MAC access control lists provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network, and can be used in addition to any of the above authentication methods. ACLs are good for embedded devices, like printers and bar-code scanners (though MAC addresses can be spoofed). The Array supports 1,000 global ACL entries. You may also define per-SSID access control lists, with up to 1000 entries each. See Also Failover Planning Network Management Planning Power Planning Installing the Wireless Array 47 Wireless Array Port Requirements A number of ports are used by various Array features and by the Xirrus Management System (XMS). The Port Requirements table on page 49 lists ports and the features that require them (XMS port requirements are included in the table for your convenience). If you are using a feature, please make sure that the ports that it requires are not blocked by firewalls or other policies, and that they do not conflict with any other port assignments. As an example, XMS port requirements are illustrated in Figure 24. XMS requires ports 161, 162, and 443 to be passed between Arrays and the XMS server. Similarly, ports 9090 and 9091 are required for communication between the XMS server and XMS clients, and port 25 is typically used by the XMS server to access an SMTP server to send email notifications. SSID Trafc on VLANs A, B, etc. Management over Native VLAN Internal Resources Trunked 802.1q VLAN Connection Trafc from Arrays VLAN A L2 Switching Infrastructure Trafc from Arrays VLAN B External Network /

Internet Firewall XMS Server XMS Client*

SMTP Server*

Ports:

161, 162, 443 Ports:

9090, 9091 Ports:

25

* XMS Client and SMTP Server may be internal or external resources. Figure 24. Port Requirements for XMS 48 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array The following table lists port requirements for the Array and for XMS, how they are used, and whether they may be changed. Port Application Peer Configurable Ping FTP SSH Telnet SMTP TFTP NTP SNMP Array XMS Server Client Client Client Mail Server TFTP Server NTP Server XMS Server XMS Server SNMP Traphost Note -

Up to four Traphosts may be configured. HTTPS (WMI,WPR) Client Syslog Syslog Server icmp 20 tcp 21 tcp 22 tcp 23 tcp 25 tcp 69 udp 123 udp 161 udp 162 udp 443 tcp 514 udp 1812, 1645 udp RADIUS (some servers use 1645) RADIUS Server 1813, 1646 udp 2055 udp 5000 tcp RADIUS Accounting

(some servers still use 1646) Netflow RADIUS Accounting Server Client Virtual Tunnel VTUN Server 22610 udp XRP (Xirrus Roaming) Arrays 22612 udp Xircon (Console Utility) Admin Workstation No Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes - but required by XMS Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Installing the Wireless Array 49 Port Application Peer Configurable XMS Wireless Array icmp 22 tcp 25 tcp 123 udp 161 udp Ping SSH SMTP NTP SNMP 162 udp SNMP Traphost 1 443 tcp HTTPS 514 udp Resident Syslog server 1099 tcp 2000 tcp 3306 tcp 8001 tcp RMI Registry XMS Back-end Server MySQL Database Status Viewer 8007 tcp Tomcat Shutdown 8009 tcp Web Container Arrays Arrays Mail Server NTP Server Arrays Arrays Arrays Internal*

Internal*

Internal*

Internal*

Internal*

Internal*

Internal*

9090 tcp XMS Webserver XMS client 9091 tcp XMS Client Server XMS client 9092 tcp XMS Client Server XMS client No Yes Yes No No Via XMS config file No Via XMS config file No No No No During installation During installation During installation Via XMS config file Via XMS config file 9443 tcp XMS WMI SSL XMS web client No

* Internal to XMS Server, no ports need to be unblocked on other network devices 50 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array See Also Management Control External Radius Services VLAN Management Installing the Wireless Array 51 Wireless Array Network Management Planning Network management can be performed using any of the following methods:

Command Line Interface, using an SSH (Secure Shell) utility, like PuTTY. The utility must be set up to use SSH-2, since the Array will only allow SSH-2 connections. Web-based management, using the Arrays embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). This method provides configuration and basic monitoring tools, and is good for small deployments (one or two units). Centralized Web-based management, using the optional Xirrus Management System (XMS), which can be run on a dedicated Xirrus appliance or your own server. The XMS is used for managing large Wireless Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface and offers the following features:

Globally manage large numbers of Arrays (up to 500) Seamless view of the entire wireless network Easily configure large numbers of Arrays Rogue AP monitoring Easily manage system-wide firmware updates Monitor performance and trends Aggregation of alerts and alarms See Also Failover Planning Power Planning Security Planning 52 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array WDS Planning WDS (Wireless Distribution System) creates wireless backhauls between Arrays, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple Arrays without the need for a wired backbone to link them (see Figure 25). WDS features include:

One to three IAPs may be used to form a single WDS link, yielding up to 1350 Mbps bandwidth per link. Up to three different WDS links may be created on a single Array. Automatic IAP Load Balancing If desired, you may allow clients to associate to a BSS on the same radio interface used for a WDS Host Link. This will take bandwidth from the WDS link. Multiple links per Array allow you to configure multi-hop connections. Figure 25. WDS Link Installing the Wireless Array 53 Wireless Array Figure 26. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection Multiple WDS links can provide link redundancy (failover capability - see Figure 27). A network protocol (Spanning Tree Protocol STP) prevents Arrays from forming network loops. Figure 27. WDS Failover Protection 54 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array WDS links have a Host/Client relationship similar to the usual IAP/station pattern for Arrays:

A WDS Client Link associates/authenticates to a host (target) Array in the same way that a station associates to an IAP. The client side of the link must be configured with the root MAC address of the target (host) Array. A WDS Host Link acts like an IAP by allowing one WDS Client Link to associate to it. An Array may have both client and host links. WDS configuration is performed only on the client-side Array. See WDS on page 338. Note that both Arrays must be configured with the same SSID name. Installing the Wireless Array 55 Common Deployment Options The following table lists some typical and recommended deployment options for a number of the features that have been discussed in this chapter. Wireless Array Function Power Failover VLANs Number of Wireless Arrays One or Two Three or More Power over Gigabit Ethernet Power over Gigabit Ethernet UPS backup

(recommended) Recommended Highly recommended Optional Optional use, Encryption Authentication WPA2 with AES

(recommended) PSK or 802.1x Internal RADIUS server EAP-PEAP Pre-Shared Key Can be used to put all APs on one VLAN or map to existing VLAN scheme WPA2 with AES

(recommended) 802.1x keying External RADIUS server Management Internal WMI XMS (SNMP) Internal CLI (via SSHv2) See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Network Management Planning Planning Your Installation Power Planning Security Planning 56 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Installation Workflow This workflow illustrates the steps that are required to install and configure your Wireless Array successfully. Review this flowchart before attempting to install the unit on a customers network. Determine the number of Arrays needed Choose the location(s) for your Wireless Arrays Run Ethernet cables for PoGE

(<100m total distance from switch) Install the mounting plate Connect the cables and turn on the power Verify that the Ethernet link and radio LEDs are functioning correctly Log in to WMI and enter your license Perform the Express Setup procedure Figure 28. Installation Workflow See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Common Deployment Options Installing the Wireless Array 57 Wireless Array Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Planning Your Installation Power Planning Wireless Array Product Overview Security Planning 58 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Installing Your Wireless Array This section provides instructions for completing a physical installation of your Xirrus Wireless Array. Choosing a Location Based on coverage, capacity and deployment examples previously discussed, choose a location for the Array that will provide the best results for your needs. The Wireless Array was designed to be mounted on a ceiling where the unit is unobtrusive and wireless transmissions can travel unimpeded throughout open plan areas. You also have the option of mounting the Array on a wall, using the optional wall mount assembly kit. Choose a location that is central to your users (see the following diagram for correct placement. WRONG ONRORON WRONGGGO ONRORON CORRECTRORRERORREC Figure 29. Array Placement Wiring Considerations Before using the Xirrus-supplied Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules (PoGE) to distribute power, see Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) on page 12. Installing the Wireless Array 59 Once you have determined the best location for your Wireless Array, you must run cables to the location for the following services:

Wireless Array Power No separate power cable to the Array is required when using PoGE modules. The PoGE module requires a dedicated AC power outlet (100 - 240 VAC). Network Gigabit POE1 If using PoGE modules, the total of all Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable segments from the Gigabit Ethernet switch to an Array Ethernet port must be less than 100m long. The Array must be connected to PoGE networks without routing cabling to the outside plant, to ensure that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible high voltage crossover. Gigabit POE2For Arrays with a second POE port, the same restrictions listed above apply.(optional, not available on the four-port Arrays) Fast Ethernet (optional, not available on the four-port Arrays) Serial cable (optional) cable lengths up to 25 per the RS-232 specification. Important Notes About Network Connections Read the following notes before making any network connections. When the units IP address is unknown or a network connection has not been established, the serial cable is used for connecting directly with the Command Line Interface (CLI) via HyperTerminal. When a network connection is established, the Array can be managed from any of the available network connections, either Fast Ethernet, Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2. For the XR-1000, the Xirrus Xircon utility may be used locally to set up an IP address if necessary. 60 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array

The Arrays Ethernet ports should be plugged into an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hub if a hub is used, we recommend that you connect only one Ethernet port. The Gigabit1 Ethernet interface is the primary port for both data and management traffic. If a single Ethernet connection is used, it must be connected to the Gigabit1 Ethernet interface. See also, Failover Planning on page 42. The 10/100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10/100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured for this interface. See interface on page 407. See Also Failover Planning Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Mounting the Array Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) Installing the Wireless Array 61 Wireless Array Mounting the Array A number of options are available for mounting Arrays:

Ceiling mount Wall mount Secure mount in a locking indoor enclosure I-Beam mount in a protective enclosure (gymnasium mount) Factory enclosure A detailed Quick Installation Guide is provided with the mounting option that you selected when ordering your Array. Please follow the provided instructions carefully. Dismounting the Array To dismount any other Array model For all Array models, push up on the Array (i.e., push it against the mounting plate). Then turn the Array to the left to remove it. This is similar to dismounting a smoke detector. 62 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Powering Up the Wireless Array When powering up, the Array follows a specific sequence of LED patterns showing the boot progress, and following a successful boot will provide extensive status information. Ethernet Activity and Status LEDs IAP LEDs Figure 30. LED Locations Array LED settings may be altered or disabled entirely for diagnostic purposes or for personal preference. Changes are made via the Arrays Command Line Interface or the Web Management Interface refer to LED Settings on page 334. Installing the Wireless Array 63 Wireless Array Array LED Operating Sequences Use the following tables to review the operating sequences of the Arrays LEDs. LED Boot Sequence on page 64 LED Operation when Array is Running on page 65 LED Boot Sequence The normal boot LED sequence is as follows:

Array Activity Status LED IAP LEDs Power ON Blinking GREEN All OFF Boot loader power ON self-test Blinking GREEN All ON Image load from compact FLASH Blinking GREEN Spinning pattern (rotate all to ON, then all to OFF) Image load failure Blinking ORANGE All OFF Hand off to ArrayOS Solid GREEN All OFF System software initialization Solid GREEN Up and running Solid ON Walking pattern (LED rotating one position per second) ON for IAPs that are up:

OFF for IAPs that are down. Green or orange per table on the next page. Behavior may be changed using LED Settings on page 334. 64 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array LED Operation when Array is Running The normal LED operation when the Array is running is shown in the table below. Note that behavior may be modified using LED Settings on page 334 or via the CLI. LED Status Reason IAP LED is OFF IAP LED is solid ON IAP LED heartbeat IAP LED flashing Flashing at 10 Hz Flashing at 5 Hz Flashing at 2.5 Hz IAP LED is GREEN IAP LED is ORANGE IAP LED flashing ORANGE to GREEN at 1 Hz Ethernet LEDs are dual color IAP is down IAP is up, but no associations and no traffic IAP is up, with stations associated but no traffic IAP is up, passing traffic Traffic > 1500 packets/sec Traffic > 150 packets/sec Traffic > 1 packet/sec IAP is operating in the 2.4 GHz band IAP is operating in the 5 GHz band The radio is in monitor mode

(standard intrude detect) Ethernet LED is ORANGE Ethernet LED is GREEN Transferring data at 1 Gbps Transferring data at 10/100 Mbps See Also Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Installing Your Wireless Array LED Settings Installing the Wireless Array 65 Wireless Array Establishing Communication with the Array The Array may be configured through the Command Line Interface (CLI) using SSH, or on a browser via the graphical Web Management Interface (WMI). You may use the CLI via the serial management port (consoleon all Arrays except the XR500 and XR-1000 Series), the Fast Ethernet port, or any of the Gigabit Ethernet ports. You can use the WMI via any of the Arrays Ethernet ports. Gigabit POE (gig1) Figure 31. Network Interface PortsXR-1000 Series Serial (Console) Gigabit POE (gig1) Figure 32. Network Interface PortsXR-2000 Series Serial (Console) Gigabit POE (gig1) Gigabit 2 (gig2) Figure 33. Network Interface PortsXR-4000 Series 66 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Serial (Console) Gigabit POE1 (gig1) Gigabit POE2 (gig2) Gigabit 3 (gig3) Gigabit 4 (gig4) Figure 34. Network Interface PortsXR-6000 Series Serial Fast Ethernet Gigabit 1 Gigabit 2 Figure 35. Network Interface Ports The Xirrus Xircon utility may also be used to communicate with Arrays locally as an alternative to using a serial connection to the console. This is especially useful for the XR500 and XR-1000 Series, which do not have a console port. See Securing Low Level Access to the Array on page 78. Using the Serial Port If using the serial port to make your connection, use serial settings of 8 bits, no parity, no flow control, 1 stop bit (8N1) and a speed setting of 115200 baud. Use the communication package of your choice. Using the Ethernet Ports By default, the Array's Ethernet interfaces use DHCP to obtain an IP address. If the Array is booted and does not receive DHCP addresses on either the Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet ports, then the Fast Ethernet port will default to an Installing the Wireless Array 67 IP address of 10.0.1.1 and both Gigabit1 and its bonded pair port (if any) will default to 10.0.2.1 with a mask of 255.255.255.0. If the Array is connected to a network that provides DHCP addresses, the IP address can be determined by the following three methods:

Wireless Array 1. The simplest way to address the Array is using its default hostname which example, XR4012N0823091CACD). If your network provides DHCP and DNS, then you can use this hostname. number Arrays serial

(for the is 2. Otherwise, examine the DHCP tables on the server and find the addresses assigned to the Array (Xirrus MAC addresses begin with 000F7D). 3. Alternatively, you may query the Array using the CLI via the console port

(on all models except the wall-1000 series). Log in using the default user name admin and password admin. Use the show ethernet command to view the IP addresses assigned to each port. 4. If the Array cannot obtain an IP address via DHCP, the factory default uses a static IP address of 10.0.2.1 with a mask of 255.255.255.0 on its Gigabit POE port. Take care to ensure that your network is not using the 10.0.2.1 IP address prior to connecting the Array to the network. To connect to the Array, you must set your laptop to be in the same subnet as the Array: set your laptops IP address to be in the 10.0.2.xx subnet, and set its subnet mask to 255.255.255.0. If this subnet is already in use on your network, you may connect your laptop directly to the Array by connecting the laptop to the power injectors IN port temporarily (this port may be called the SWITCH port or the DATA port on your injector). 68 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Starting the WMI Use this procedure to log in to the WMI via your Web browser. 1. Establish a network connection and open your Web browser. 2. Connect to the Wireless Array using its host name or IP address as described in the previous section. Logging In When logging in to the Array, use the default user name and password the default user name is admin, and the default password is admin. See Also Installation Workflow Performing the Express Setup Procedure Powering Up the Wireless Array Entering the License A license is needed to enable the full functionality of the Array. Without a license, the Array can be powered up and will only have a basic wireless network configuration including just one operating radio. The Arrays license determines many of the features that are available on the Array. For example, automatic cell sizing and channel allocation require a license supporting the RF Performance Manager (RPM). Also, IEEE 802.11n operation on Arrays requires a license. The Arrays license is not installed at the factory. You must enter your license before proceeding to the next step, Performing the Express Setup Procedure. The procedure below describes entering the license key using the WMI. If you are using the Xirrus Management System (XMS), you may use it to easily manage and upgrade large numbers of licenses for the wireless network. 1. This procedure assumes that you have pointed a browser to the Arrays IP address to start WMI, and that you have logged in with the default username and password above. Installing the Wireless Array 69 Wireless Array 2. In the left hand frame, in the Configuration section, click Express Setup. 3. License Key: Enter the key that was provided for the Array. The key was provided to you in an email as an attachment in the form of an Excel file

(.xls). Enter the key exactly as it appears in the file. Click the Apply button to apply the key. 4. Now you may verify the features provided by the key. In the Status section of the left hand frame, click Array and then click Information. Check the items listed in the License Features row. If you are installing a large number of licenses and do not have XMS, a Xirrus Licensing Tool may be acquired from Xirrus Support to help push licenses to large number of Arrays. 70 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array Performing the Express Setup Procedure The Express Setup procedure establishes global configuration settings that enable basic Array functionality. Changes made in this window will affect all radios. Figure 36. Express Setup Installing the Wireless Array 71 Procedure for Performing an Express Setup Wireless Array 1. Host Name: Specify a unique host name for this Array. The host name is used to identify the Array on the network. Use a name that will be meaningful within your network environment, up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The default is Xirrus-WiFi-Array. 2. Location Information: Enter a brief but meaningful description that accurately defines the physical location of the Array. In an environment where multiple units are installed, clear definitions for their locations are important if you want to identify a specific unit. 3. Admin Contact: Enter the name and contact information of the person who is responsible for administering the Array at the designated location. 4. Admin Email: Enter the email address of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 5. Admin Phone: Enter the telephone number of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 6. License Key: If Xirrus issued you a license that differs from the current value shown, enter it now. See also, Entering the License on page 69. 7. Configure SNMPv2: Select whether to Enable SNMPv2 on the Array, and change the SNMP Community Strings if desired. If you are using the Xirrus Management System (XMS), these strings must match the values used by XMS. The default values for the Array match the defaults in XMS. For more details, including SNMPv3, see SNMP on page 194. 8. Configure the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Megabit) and Gigabit network interfaces. The fields for each of these interfaces are the same, and include:

a. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface, or choose No to disable the interface. b. Allow Management on Interface: Choose Yes to allow management of the Array via this network interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. 72 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array For improved security, you should also take the additional steps described in Securing Low Level Access to the Array on page 78. c. Configuration Server Protocol: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP to assign IP addresses to the Arrays Ethernet interfaces, or choose Static if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you choose the Static IP option, you must enter the following IP Settings:

Address: Enter a valid IP address for this Array. To use any of the remote connections (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be used. Subnet Mask: Enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask (the default is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located. Default Gateway: Enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to forward data to other networks. Click the Apply button for this interface when done making IP changes. 9. SSID Settings: This section specifies the wireless network name and security settings. a. SSID (Wireless Network Name): The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a unique name that identifies a wireless network. All devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. The default for this field is xirrus. For additional information about SSIDs, go to the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 452. b. Wireless Security: Select the desired wireless security scheme (Open, WEP, WPA, WPA2, or WPA-Both). WPA2 is recommended for the best Wi-Fi security.

Open This option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are Installing the Wireless Array 73 Wireless Array required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. WEP generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP or AES as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication.

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode.

WPA-Both (WPA and WPA2) This option makes use of both WPA and WPA2. For more information about security, including a full review of all security options and settings, go to Understanding Security on page 209. c. WEP Encryption Key/Passphrase: Depending on the wireless security scheme you selected, enter a unique WEP key or WPA passphrase. This field and the one below only appear if you select a Wireless Security option other than Open. d. Confirm Encryption Key/Passphrase: If you entered a WEP key or WPA passphrase, confirm it here. e. Click Apply SSID Settings when done. 74 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array 10. Admin Settings: This section allows you to change the default admin username, password, and privileges for the Array. You may change the password and leave the user name as is, but we suggest that you change both to improve Array security. a. New Admin User (Replaces user admin): Enter the name of a new administrator user account. Be sure to record the new account name and password, because the default admin user will be deleted! Note that the Array also offers the option of authenticating administrators using a RADIUS server (see Admin Management on page 214)). For improved security, you should also take the additional steps described in Securing Low Level Access to the Array on page 78. b. New Admin Privilege Level: By default, the new administrator will have read/write privileges on the Array (i.e., the new user will be able to change the configuration of the Array). If you wish the new account to have different privileges, select the desired level from the drop-down list. For more information about user privileges, please see Admin Privileges on page 216. c. New Admin Password: Enter a new administration password for managing this Array. If you forget this password, you must reset the Array to its factory defaults so that the password is reset to admin (its default setting). d. Confirm Admin Password: If you entered a new administration password, confirm the new password here. e. Click Apply Admin Settings when done. 11. Time and Date Settings: This section specifies an optional time (NTP -

Network Time Protocol) server or modifies the system time if youre not using a server. a. Current Array Date and Time: This read-only field shows the current time for your convenience. Installing the Wireless Array 75 Wireless Array b. Time Zone: Select your time zone from the choices available in the pull-down list. c. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). d. Use Network Time Protocol: Check this box if you want to use an NTP server to synchronize the Arrays clock. Use of NTP is mandatory for Arrays to be managed with XMS (the Xirrus Management System), and ensures that Syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. If you check Yes, the NTP server fields are displayed. If you dont want to use an NTP server, leave this box unchecked (default) and set the system time on the Array manually. e. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. f. NTP Primary Authentication: If you are using authentication with NTP, select the type of key: MD5 or SHA1. Select None if you are not using authentication (this is the default). For more information on authenticated NTP, see Time Settings (NTP) on page 185. g. NTP Primary Authentication Key ID: Enter the key ID, which is a decimal integer. h. NTP Primary Authentication Key: Enter your key, which is a string of characters. i. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. You may use the authentication fields as described above if you wish to set up authentication for the secondary server. j. Adjust Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, the time fields become active. Enter the revised time (hours, minutes, 76 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). k. Adjust Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, the date fields become active. Enter the revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). 12. Quick Configuration: This offers predefined configuration options such as Classroom and High-Density that capture best practices from years of field experience. If one of the options in the drop-down list is appropriate to your deployment, select it and click Apply. For example, the High-

Density option uses best practices to configure the Array for high density settings such as lecture halls, convention centers, stadiums, etc. 13. IAP Settings:

Enable/Configure All IAPs: Click on the Execute button to enable and auto configure all IAPs (a message displays the countdown time in seconds to complete the auto-configuration task). When an IAP is enabled, its LED is switched on. (Figure 37, see also Array LED Operating Sequences on page 64.) LED on Figure 37. LEDs are Switched On Installing the Wireless Array 77 14. Click on the Save changes to flash button at the top right if you wish to Wireless Array make your changes permanent. This ends the Express Setup procedure. See Also Establishing Communication with the Array Installation Prerequisites Installation Workflow Logging In Multiple SSIDs Security Securing Low Level Access to the Array Most management of the Xirrus Array is done via the Web Management Interface

(WMI) as you just saw in Performing the Express Setup Procedure on page 71. Another often used option is CLIsee The Command Line Interface on page 377. The Array also has a lower level interface: XBL (Xirrus Boot Loader), which allows access to more primitive commands. You wont normally use XBL unless instructed to do so by Xirrus Customer Support. For proper security, you should replace the default XBL login username and password with your own, as instructed below. XBL has its own username and password, separate from the ArrayOS Admin User and Password (used for logging in to the WMI and CLI) that you changed in Step 10 on page 75. Xirrus also provides the Xircon utility for connecting to Xirrus XR Arrays that are not reachable via the normal access methods (such as SSH or WMI) and that do not have a physical console port (XR500 and XR-1000 Series Arrays), or whose console port is not accessible. Xircon discovers Arrays on your network subnet by sending IP/UDP broadcast packets. Once an Array is discovered, Xircon can establish an encrypted console session to the Array via the network even if the Array IP configuration is incorrect. Xircon allows you to manage the Array using CLI, just as you would if connected to the console port. Xircon also has an option for easily accessing XBL. 78 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array In normal circumstances Xirrus Arrays should be configured and managed through secure shell (SSH) or via the Web Management Interface (WMI). A connection is established using either the Array hostname or DHCP-assigned IP address, or via the other options described in Using the Ethernet Ports on page 67. Xircon may be needed in special circumstances as directed by Xirrus Customer Support for troubleshooting Array problems or IP connectivity. (In this case, see the Xircon User Guide for detailed information.) Xircon access to the Array may be controlled:

You may enable or disable all Xircon access to the Array as instructed in the procedure below. There are also options to allow access only to CLI

(i.e., ArrayOS access) or only to XBL. Since XR500 and XR-1000 Array models do not have a console port, these models have Xircon access to both XBL and CLI enabled by default. For Arrays that do not have a console port, to avoid potentially being locked out of the Array, Xircon should always be enabled at the XBL level at least.

! If you disable Xircon access to both XBL and CLI on XR-1000 models, you must ensure that you do not lose track of the username and password to log in to CLI/WMI! In this situation, there is no way to recover from a lost password, other than returning the Array to Xirrus. If you have Xircon access to XBL enabled, you can reset the password, but this recovery will require setting the unit to factory defaults with loss of all configuration data. On all other Array models (those with a console port), Xircon access to both XBL and CLI is disabled by default. If Xircon is not going to be used to access an Array, we recommend leaving Xircon access disabled. Procedure for Securing Low Level Array Access Use the following steps to replace the default XBL username and password, and optionally to change the type of Xircon management access that is allowed. These steps use CLI commands. Installing the Wireless Array 79 Wireless Array 1. To access CLI via the WMI, click CLI under the Tools section on the left

(for detailed instructions see CLI on page 371). Skip to Step 4 on page 80. To access CLI via SSH, see Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection on page 377. Then proceed to the next step. 2. At the login as prompt, log in to CLI using the username and password that you set in Step 10 on page 75. login as: jsmith jsmith@xr4012802207c's password:

Xirrus Wi-Fi Array ArrayOS Version 6.1.2-3299 Copyright (c) 2005-2012 Xirrus, Inc. http://www.xirrus.com XR4012802207C#

3. Type configure to enter the CLI config mode. hostname#configure 4. If Xircon access at the XBL level is to be allowed, use the following three commands to change the XBL username and password from the default values of admin/admin. In the example below, replace newusername and newpassword with your desired entries. Note that these entries are case-sensitive.

(config)#boot-env set username newusername

(config)#boot-env set password newpassword

(config)#save 5. Enter the following commands if you wish to change Xircon access permission:

(config)# management

(config-mgmt)# xircon <management-status>

(config-mgmt)# save

(config-mgmt)# exit

(config)#

<management-status> may be one of :

on enables both CLI and XBL access 80 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array off disables both CLI and XBL access aos-only enables only CLI (i.e. ArrayOS) access boot-only enables only XBL access Note that there is a WMI setting for changing Xircon access, timeout period, and the UDP port used. This may be used instead of CLI if you wish. See Management Control on page 221. Note that you cannot change the XBL username and password via the WMI. Installing the Wireless Array 81 Wireless Array 82 Installing the Wireless Array Wireless Array The Web Management Interface This topic provides an overview of the Xirrus Wireless Arrays embedded Web Management Interface (WMI), used for establishing your networks configuration settings and wireless operating parameters. It also includes login instructions. The following topics are discussed:

An Overview Structure of the WMI User Interface Logging In Applying Configuration Changes The Web Management Interface 83 Wireless Array An Overview The WMI is an easy-to-use graphical interface to your Wireless Array. It allows you to configure the product to suit your individual requirements and ensure that the unit functions efficiently and effectively. Options allow you to choose among different appearances for the WMI. See Options on page 373. Figure 38. Web Management InterfaceOption = New Style Figure 39. Web Management InterfaceNew Style 84 The Web Management Interface Wireless Array Figure 40. Web Management InterfaceOption = Classic Style Figure 41. Web Management InterfaceClassic Style The Web Management Interface 85 Structure of the WMI The content of the WMI is organized by function and hierarchy, shown in the following table. Click on any item below to jump to the referenced destination. Wireless Array Statistics Windows IAP Statistics Summary Per-IAP Statistics Network Statistics VLAN Statistics WDS Statistics IDS Statistics Filter Statistics Station Statistics Per-Station Statistics Application Control Windows System Log Window IDS Event Log Window Status Windows Array Status Windows Array Summary Array Information Array Configuration Admin History Network Status Windows Network Map Spanning Tree Status Routing Table ARP Table DHCP Leases Connection Tracking/NAT CDP Neighbors Network Assurance RF Monitor Windows IAPs Spectrum Analyzer Intrusion Detection Channel History Radio Assurance Station Status Windows Stations Location Map RSSI Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) Noise Floor Max by IAP Station Assurance 86 The Web Management Interface Wireless Array Configuration Windows Configuration Windows (contd) Express Setup Network Network Interfaces Network Bonds DNS Settings CDP Settings Services Time Settings (NTP) NetFlow Wi-Fi Tag System Log SNMP DHCP Server VLANs VLAN Management Tunnels Tunnel Management Security Admin Management Admin Privileges Admin RADIUS Management Control Access Control List Global Settings External Radius Internal Radius Rogue Control List SSIDs SSID Management Active IAPs Per-SSID Access Control List Groups Group Management IAPs IAP Settings Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn Global Settings .11n Global Settings .11u Advanced RF Settings Hotspot 2.0 NAI Realms NAI EAP Intrusion Detection LED Settings DSCP Mappings Roaming Assist WDS WDS Client Links Filters Filter Lists Filter Management Clusters Cluster Definition Cluster Management Cluster Operation Tool Windows System Tools CLI Options Logout The Web Management Interface 87 User Interface Left frame Right frame Array info Wireless Array Top level menu

(expand/collapse) Pull-down menu Help Log Message counters Click to configure IAP/view statistics Figure 42. WMI: Frames 88 The Web Management Interface Wireless Array The WMI has been designed with simplicity in mind, making navigation quick and easy. In the following example, youll see that windows are divided into left and right frames. The left frame contains three main elements:

Menu organized by function (for example, Network, SSIDs, Security, etc.). Click a heading, such as Network, to display a summary of its current configuration, as well as an associated pull-down menu. The three major menu sections (Status, Configuration, Tools) may each be collapsed down to hide the headings under them. Click again to display the headings. (Figure 43 ) Three Log Messages counters are located at the bottom of the menu. They provide a running total of messages generated by the ArrayOS Syslog subsystem during your session organized into Critical, Warning, and General messages. Click on a counter to display the associated Syslog messages. Messages at the selected level or higher will be shown. For more information, please see System Log Window on page 156. The Array representation contains shortcut links. Click a radio to view statistics for it. Click the center of the Array to display the IAP Settings window, which allows you to configure the Arrays radios. Figure 43. Major Menu Sections Collapsed (on left) The Web Management Interface 89 Wireless Array The right frame displays the status information or configuration parameters for the Wireless Array. This is where you review the Arrays current status and activity or input data (if you want to make changes). The green Array information bar at the top of the frame describes the Array the Name and IP address allow you to quickly confirm that WMI is connected to the correct Array. The current Uptime since the last reboot is also shown. Some settings are only available if the Arrays license includes appropriate Xirrus Advanced Feature Sets. If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. Note that WMI provides options which allow you to change its appearance and behavior. You may change:

Style changes the colors and appearance of WMI (i.e., its skin). Refresh Interval the refresh time when automatic refresh is selected. Close menu section when deselected changes the behavior of the menu in the left frame. Clear screen when loading new page. See Options on page 373 for more information. 90 The Web Management Interface Wireless Array Utility Buttons At the bottom of each window you will find a set of useful buttons a Feedback button, a Print button and a Help button. Print button Feedback button Help button Figure 44. WMI: Utility Buttons Click on the Feedback button to generate a Web page that allows you to submit your comments to Xirrus, Inc. Click on the Print button to send a print file of the active window to your local printer. Click on the Help button to access the Arrays online help system. Submitting Your Comments When submitting comments via the Feedback button (ensure that you provide as much detail as possible, including your contact information, the product model number that the comment relates to, and the ArrayOS software version (if known). When finished, click on the Submit button to submit your comment. The Web Management Interface 91 Wireless Array Logging In Use this procedure to log in to the WMI via your Web browser. 1. Establish a network connection and open your Web browser. 2. If your network supports DHCP and DNS, enter the Arrays default host name in the browsers URL. The default host name is simply the Arrays serial number (for example, XN0823091CACD). Otherwise, enter the Arrays IP address. This may be determined as described in Using the Ethernet Ports on page 67. 3. To log in to the Arrays Web Management Interface, enter admin for both the user name and password. Figure 45. Logging In to the Wireless Array Applying Configuration Changes In most of the WMI configuration windows, your changes to settings are applied to the Array as you make them. In most cases, there is no separate Apply button to click to make the changes take effect. There are a few exceptions to this rule. In these cases, a particular section of a page may have its own Apply Settings button right below the settings. In both cases described above, the changes that you have made are not saved to the latest configuration file in the Arrays flash memory, so they will not be restored after a reboot. Click the Save changes to flash button (located on the upper right of each page) in order to make sure that these changes will be applied 92 The Web Management Interface Wireless Array after rebooting. This will save the entire current configuration, not only the changes on current WMI page. Character Restrictions When inputting strings in the WMI (for example, assigning SSIDs, host name, password, etc.), use common alphanumeric characters. Some of the fields in the WMI will not accept special characters, so use of the following characters should typically be avoided:

The Web Management Interface 93 Wireless Array 94 The Web Management Interface Wireless Array Viewing Status on the Wireless Array These windows provide status information and statistics for your Array using the products embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). You cannot make configuration changes to your Array from these windows. The following topics have been organized into functional areas that reflect the flow and content of the Status section of the navigation tree in the left frame of the WMI. Array Status Windows on page 96 Network Status Windows on page 103 RF Monitor Windows on page 114 Station Status Windows on page 125 Statistics Windows on page 140 Application Control Windows on page 150 System Log Window on page 156 IDS Event Log Window on page 157 Configuration and Tools windows are not discussed here. For information on these windows, please see:

Configuring the Wireless Array on page 159 Using Tools on the Wireless Array on page 359 Note that the Status menu section may be collapsed down to hide the headings under it by clicking it. Click again to display the headings. (See Figure 43 on page 89) Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 95 Wireless Array Array Status Windows The following Array Status windows are available:

Array Summary displays information on the configuration of all Array interfaces, including IAPs. Array Information provides version/serial number information for all Array components. Array Configuration shows all configuration information for the Array in text format. Admin History shows all current and past logins since the last reboot. Array Summary This is a status only window that provides a snapshot of the global configuration settings for all Wireless Array network interfaces and IAPs. You must go to the appropriate configuration window to make changes to any of the settings displayed here configuration changes cannot be made from this window. Clicking on an interface or IAP will take you to the proper window for making configuration changes. Figure 46. Array Summary 96 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Content of the Array Summary Window The Array Summary window is sub-divided into the Ethernet Interfaces section and the Integrated Access Points (radio) section, providing you with the following information:

Ethernet Settings Summary This section provides information about network interface devices. To make configuration changes to these devices, go to Network Interfaces on page 171.

Interface: Lists the network interfaces that are available on the Array.

State: Shows the current state of each interface, either enabled or disabled.

Mgmt: Shows whether Array management traffic is allowed on this interface.

Auto Neg: Shows whether auto-negotiation is in use on this interface, to determine settings for speed, parity bits, etc.

LED: Shows whether LED display of interface status is enabled.

Link: Shows whether the link on this interface is up or down.

Duplex: Shows whether full duplex mode is in use.

Speed: Shows the speed of this interface in Mbps.

MTU Size: Shows the Maximum Transmission Unit size that has been configured. This is the largest packet size (in bytes) that the interface can pass along.

DHCP: Shows whether DHCP on this port is enabled or disabled.

IP Address: Shows the current IP address assigned to each network interface device.

Subnet Mask: Shows the subnet mask, which defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located.

Gateway: Shows the IP address of the router that the Array uses to transmit data to other networks. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 97 Wireless Array Bond Settings Summary This section provides information about the relationship that has been selected for the Gigabit ports. For detailed explanations and to make configuration changes, see Network Bonds on page 175.

Bond: Lists all network bonds that have been configured.

Mode: Shows the type of relationship that has been selected for the Gigabit ports.

Ports: Shows the Gigabit ports that are part of this bond.

Port Mode: Shows the relationship that has been selected for the Ethernet ports. See Network Bonds on page 175 for details

Active VLANs: Shows the VLANs that are active in this bond.

Mirror: Shows whether mirroring is enabled on this bond. Integrated Access Points Section This section provides information about the Integrated Access Points

(IAPs) that are contained within the Array. How many IAPs are listed depends on which product model you are using. To make configuration changes to these IAPs, go to IAP Settings on page 274.

IAP: Lists the IAPs that are available on the Array.

State: Shows the current state of each IAP, either up or down. IAPs that are down are shown in RED. Figure 47 shows an example where iap7 is down.

AP Type: Shows the types of 802.11 clients supported by this IAP (11/

a/b/g/n) and the number of separate data streams transmitted and received by the antennas of each IAP for 802.11n. For example, 3x3 means that the IAP supports three transmit chains and three receive chains. See Multiple Data Streams Spatial Multiplexing on page 38. 98 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Figure 47. Disabled IAP (Partial View)

Channel: Shows which channel each IAP is using, and the channel setting. To avoid co-channel interference, adjacent radios should not be using adjacent channels. To make channel selections for a specific IAP, go to IAP Settings on page 274.

Wi-Fi Mode: Shows the 802.11 client types that the IAP has been configured to support.

Antenna: Shows which antenna is being used by each IAP.

Cell Size: Indicates which cell size setting is currently active for each IAP small, medium, large, max, automatic, or manually defined by you. The cell size of an IAP is a function of its transmit power and determines the IAPs overall coverage. To define cell sizes, go to IAP Settings on page 274. For additional information about cell sizes and the importance of planning for and defining the optimum cell sizes for your Array, go to Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 28. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 99 Wireless Array Figure 48. IAP Cells

Tx Power: Shows the transmit power for each IAP.

Rx Threshold: Shows the receive threshold for each IAP.

Stations: Informs you how many client stations are currently associated with each IAP.

WDS Link/Distance: The WDS Link on this radio (if any), and whether the link has been set to support Long Distance Links. See WDS on page 338.

MAC Address/BSSID: Shows the MAC address for each IAP.

Description: The description (if any) that you set for this IAP. 100 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Array Information This is a status only window that shows you the current firmware versions utilized by the Array, serial numbers assigned to each module, MAC addresses, licensing information, recent boot timestamps, and current internal temperatures and fan speed. Note that the License Features row lists the features that are supported by your Arrays license. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361 and Advanced Feature Sets on page 16 for more information. Figure 49. Array Information Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 101 Wireless Array You cannot make configuration changes in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with network services, you may want to print the content of this window for your records. Array Configuration This is a status only window that allows you to display the configuration settings assigned to the Array, based on the following filter options:

Running displays the current configuration (the one running now). Saved displays the saved configuration from this session. Lastboot displays the configuration as it was after the last reboot. Factory displays the configuration established at the factory. Figure 50. Show Configuration If you want to see just the differences between the Running, Saved, Lastboot, and Factory configurations, you can do this by choosing a configuration option from the Select Config pull-down menu then selecting an alternative configuration option from the Select Diff pull-down menu. 102 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array To also include the default configuration settings in the output, choose your configuration then click in the Include Defaults check box. If Include Defaults is disabled, then only the changes from the default configuration are shown. Admin History It is useful to know who else is currently logged in to an array while you're configuring it. It's also nice to see who has logged in since the array booted. This status-only window shows you all administrator logins to the Array that have occurred since the last reboot. To determine who is currently logged in, check which entries say active in the Logout Time column. Figure 51. Admin Login History Network Status Windows The following Network Status windows are available:

Network displays a summary of network interface settings. Network Map displays information about this Array and neighboring Arrays that have been detected. Spanning Tree Status displays the spanning tree status of network links on this Array. Routing Table displays information about routing on this Array. ARP Table displays information about Address Resolution Protocol on this Array. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 103 Wireless Array DHCP Leases displays information about IP addresses (leases) that the Array has allocated to client stations. Connection Tracking/NAT lists connections that have been established for client stations. CDP Neighbors lists neighboring network devices using Cisco Discovery Protocol. Network Assurance shows results of connectivity tests for network servers. Undefined VLANs shows VLANs present on an 802.1Q connection to the Array, that are not configured in the Array's VLAN list. Network This window provides a snapshot of the configuration settings currently established for Arrays wired interfaces. This includes the Gigabit interfaces and their bonding settings. DNS Settings are summarized as well. You can click on any item in the Interface or Bond columns to go to the associated configuration window. Figure 52. Network Settings 104 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array WMI windows that allow you to change or view configuration settings associated with the network interfaces include:

Network Interfaces on page 171 Network Bonds on page 175 DNS Settings on page 181 CDP Settings on page 183 Network Map This window offers detailed information about this Array and all neighboring Arrays, including how the Arrays have been set up within your network. Figure 53. Network Map The Network Map has a number of options at the top of the page that allow you to customize your output by selecting from a variety of information that may be displayed. You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon

. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 105 Content of the Network Map Window By default, the network map shows the following status information for each Array:

Wireless Array Array Name: The host name assigned to the Array. To establish the host name, go to Express Setup on page 161. You may click the host name to access WMI for this Array. IP Address: The Arrays IP address. You may click the address to access WMI for this Array. If DHCP is enabled, the Arrays IP address is assigned by the DHCP server. If DHCP is disabled, you must assign a static IP address. To enable DHCP or to assign a static IP address for the Array, go to Express Setup on page 161. Location: The location assigned to the Array. To establish the location information, go to Express Setup on page 161. Array OS: The software version running on the Array. IAP: The number of IAPs on the Array.

(IAP) Up: Informs you how many IAPs are currently up and running. To enable or disable all IAPs, go to Express Setup on page 161. To enable or disable individual IAPs, go to IAP Settings on page 274. SSID: Informs you how many SSIDs have been assigned for the Array. To assign an SSID, go to SSID Management on page 249.

(SSID) On: Informs you how many SSIDs are enabled. To enable or disable SSIDs, go to SSID Management on page 249. In Range: Informs you whether the Array is within wireless range of another Wireless Array. Fast Roam: Informs you whether or not the Xirrus fast roaming feature is enabled. This feature utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at both Layer 2 and Layer 3. To enable or disable fast roaming, go to Global Settings (IAP) on page 280. Uptime (D:H:M): Informs you how long the Array has been up and running (in Days, Hours and Minutes). 106 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array To see additional information, select from the following checkboxes at the bottom of the page. This will show the columns described below. Hardware Model: The model number of each Array (XR-4820, XR-7630, etc.), plus the amount of RAM memory and the speed of the processor. Serial: Displays the serial number of each Array. License License: The license key of each Array. Licensed Features: Lists the optional features enabled by the key, if any. Software (enabled by default) Enable/disable display of the Array OS column. Firmware Boot Loader: The software version number of the boot loader on each Array. SCD Firmware: The software version number of the SCD firmware on each Array. IAP Info (enabled by default) Enable/disable display of the IAP/Up columns. Stations Stations: Tells you how many stations are currently associated to each Array. To deauthenticate a station, go to Stations on page 126. The columns to the right (H, D, W, and M) show the highest number of stations that have been associated over various periods of time: the previous hour, day, week, and month. Default Sets the columns displayed to the default settings. By default, only Software and IAP Info are selected. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 107 Wireless Array Spanning Tree Status Multiple active paths between stations can cause loops in the network. If a loop exists in the network topology, the potential exists for the duplication of messages. The spanning tree protocol is a link management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing undesirable loops. For a wireless network to function properly, only one active path can exist between two stations. To facilitate path redundancy, the spanning tree protocol defines a tree that spans all stations in the network and forces certain redundant data paths into a standby

(blocked) state. If one segment in the spanning tree becomes unreachable, the spanning tree algorithm reconfigures the network topology and reestablishes the link by activating the standby path. The spanning tree function is transparent to client stations. Figure 54. Spanning Tree Status This window shows the spanning tree status (forwarding or blocked) for path segments that terminate on the gigabit ports and WDS links of this Array. You may sort the rows based on the VLAN Name or Number columns by clicking the column header. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Network Network Interfaces Network Status Windows VLANs WDS 108 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Routing Table This status-only window lists the entries in the Arrays routing table. The table provides the Array with instructions for sending each packet to its next hop on its route across the network. Figure 55. Routing Table See Also VLANs Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID ARP Table This status-only window lists the entries in the Arrays ARP table. For a device with a given IP address, this table lists the devices MAC address. It also shows the Array interface through which this device may be reached. The table typically includes devices that are on the same local area network segment as the Array. Figure 56. ARP Table See Also Routing Table ARP Filtering Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 109 Wireless Array DHCP Leases This status-only window lists the IP addresses (leases) that the Array has allocated to client stations. For each, it shows the IP address assigned from one of the defined DHCP pools, and the MAC address and host name of the client station. The start and end time of the lease show how long the allocation is valid. The same IP address is normally renewed at the expiration of the current lease. Figure 57. DHCP Leases See Also DHCP Server Connection Tracking/NAT This status-only window lists the session connections that have been created on behalf of clients. This table may also be used to view information about current NAT sessions. Figure 58. Connection Tracking 110 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Click the Show Hostnames checkbox at the top of the page to display name information (if any) for the source and destination location of the connection. The Hostname columns will replace traffic statistics columns. You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon

. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Filters CDP Neighbors This status-only window lists devices on the Arrays network that support the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP). Figure 59. CDP Neighbors The Array performs discovery on the network on an ongoing basis. This list shows the devices that have been discovered Cisco devices and other devices on the network that have CDP running. For each, it shows the devices host name, IP address, manufacturer and model name, the device interface that is connected to the network (i.e., the port that was discovered), and the network capabilities of the device (switch, router, supported protocols, etc.). CDP must be enabled on the Array in order to gather and display this information. For details and some restrictions, see CDP Settings on page 183. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 111 Network Assurance This status-only window shows the results of ongoing network assurance testing. Wireless Array Figure 60. Network Assurance The Array checks connectivity to network servers that you have configured (for example, DNS and NTP servers) on an ongoing basis. For each server, this list shows the servers host name (if any), IP address, and status. Network assurance must be enabled on the Array in order to perform these connectivity tests and display this information. See Management Control on page 221. See Also Management Control 112 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Undefined VLANs This status-only window lists VLANs that have not been configured on the Array, but that are being detected on the Arrays trunk port(s), i.e. wired ports. See VLANs on page 199. Figure 61. Undefined VLANs This feature alerts you to the fact that an 802.1Q trunk to the Array has VLANs that are not being properly handled on the Array. To reduce unnecessary traffic, only VLANs that are actually needed on the Array should normally be on the trunk, e.g., the management VLAN and SSID VLANs. In some cases such as multicast forwarding for Apple Bonjour you may want to extend other VLANs to the Array, in order to forward Bonjour or other multicast packets (see Advanced Traffic Optimization on page 284). See Also VLANs Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 113 Wireless Array RF Monitor Windows Every Wireless Array includes an integrated RF spectrum analyzer as a standard feature. The spectrum analyzer allows you to characterize the RF environment by monitoring throughput, signal, noise, errors, and interference levels continually per channel. This capability uses the assigned threat-sensor (monitor) radio. The associated software is part of the ArrayOS. The following RF Status windows are available:

IAPs displays current statistics and RF measurements for each of the Arrays IAPs. Spectrum Analyzer displays current statistics and RF measurements for each of the Arrays channels. Intrusion Detection displays rogue APs that have been detected by the Array. Channel History charts ongoing statistics and RF measurements for one selected channel over time. Radio Assurance displays counts of types of problems that caused each IAP to reset. Some status information is only available if the Arrays license includes Advanced Feature Sets. For example, the Spectrum Analyzer requires the Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM). If a feature is unavailable, then your license does not support the feature and you will get an error message if you try to set the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. 114 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array IAPs The RF Monitor IAPs window displays traffic statistics and RF readings observed by each Array IAP (radio). Note that the data is an instantaneous snapshot for the IAP it is not an average or a cumulative total. To graph these values over time for a particular channel, see Channel History on page 121. For detailed information on the measurements displayed, please see Spectrum Analyzer Measurements on page 118. Figure 62. RF Monitor IAPs Figure 62 presents the data as a graphical display, enabled by selecting the Graph checkbox on the upper left. If this option is not selected, data is presented as a numerical table. Figure 63. RF Monitor IAPs Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 115 Wireless Array You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon

. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Spectrum Analyzer The RF measurements for this feature are obtained by the monitor radio. You must have a radio set to monitor mode for any data to be available. See IAP Settings on page 274. is a distributed capability that Spectrum analysis on Wireless Arrays automatically covers the entire wireless network, since a sensor is present in every unit. Arrays monitor the network 24/7 and analyze interference anywhere in the network from your desk. Theres no need to walk around with a device as with traditional spectrum analyzers, thus you dont have to be in the right place to find outside sources that may cause network problems or pose a security threat. The Array monitors all 802.11 radio bands (a/b/g/n), not just those currently used for data transmission. The RF Spectrum Analyzer window displays instantaneous traffic statistics and RF readings for all channels, as measured by the Arrays monitor radio. This differs from the RF Monitor-IAPs window, which displays values measured by each IAP radio for its current assigned channel. For the spectrum analyzer, the monitor radio is in a listen-only mode, scanning across all wireless channels. Each channel is scanned in sequence, for a 250 millisecond interval per channel. The spectrum analyzer window presents the data as a graphical display of vertical bar graphs for each statistic as shown in Figure 64 (the default presentation), or horizontally as bar graphs or numerical RF measurements. The measurements displayed are explained in Spectrum Analyzer Measurements on page 118. As an aid to viewing data for a particular channel, click the channel number. The channel will be highlighted down the page (or across the page for a rotated view, in both text and graph modes). Click additional channels to highlight them for easy comparison. To remove the highlighting from a channel, click the channel number again. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. 116 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Select Display Options Click Channel number to highlight The Spectrum Analyzer offers several display options:

Figure 64. RF Spectrum Analyzer To display horizontal bar graphs, click the Rotate checkbox at the bottom of the data window. In the rotated view, if you wish to view data as a numerical table, click the Text checkbox. Click again to return to a graphical display. The text option is only available in the rotated view. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 117 Wireless Array When viewing a graphical display, click Bars to have the bar graphs displayed against a gray background you may find this easier on the eyes. This operation is not available when Text is selected. You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column

. header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon Sorting is only available in the rotated view. At the bottom left of the frame, you may select whether to display only 2.4 GHz channels, 5 GHz channels, or both (the default is both). Note that the data is an instantaneous snapshot it is not an average or a cumulative total. Spectrum Analyzer Measurements The spectrum analyzer displays the following information:

Packets/Sec: Total number of wireless packets per second on the channel, both valid and errored packets. Bytes/Sec: Total number of wireless bytes per second on the channel, valid packets only. 802.11 Busy: Percentage of time that 802.11 activity is seen on the channel. Other Busy: Percentage of time that the channel is unavailable due to non-802.11 activity. The total busy time (802.11 Busy plus Other Busy) will never total more than 100%. The remaining time (100% minus total busy time) is quiet time the time that no activity was seen on the channel. Signal to Noise: Average SNR (signal to noise ratio) seen on the channel, calculated from the signal seen on valid 802.11 packets less the noise floor level. A dash value -means no SNR data was available for the interval. Noise Floor: Average noise floor reading seen on the channel (ambient noise). A dash value -means no noise data was available for the interval. Error Rate: Percentage of the total number of wireless packets seen on the channel that have CRC errors. The Error rate percentage may be high on 118 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array some channels since the monitor radio is set to receive at a very sensitive level, enabling it to hear packets from devices at far distances. Average RSSI: Average RSSI level seen on 802.11 packets received on the channel. A dash value -means no RSSI data was available for the interval. Average Data Rate: Average data rate over time (per byte, not per packet) seen on 802.11 packets received on the channel. A dash value -means no data rate information was available for the interval. A higher date rate

(above 6 Mbps) typically indicates user data traffic on the channel. Otherwise, the data rate reflects control packets at the lower basic rates. Intrusion Detection This window displays all detected access points, according to the classifications you select from the checkboxes at the top Blocked, Unknown, Known, or Approved. This includes ad hoc access points (station-to-station connections). For more information about intrusion detection, rogue APs, and blocking, please see About Blocking Rogue APs on page 331. Classify APs Select APs to Display Figure 65. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 119 Wireless Array The Intrusion Detection window provides the easiest method for classifying rogue APs as Blocked, Known, Approved, or Unknown. Choose one or more APs using the checkbox in the Select column, then use the buttons on the upper left to classify them with the following actions: Approve, Set Known, Block, or Set Unknown. You can sort the results based on the following parameters by clicking the desired column header:

SSID BSSID Manufacturer Channel RSSI Security Type Status Discovered Last Active You can refresh the list at any time by clicking on the Refresh button, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh the list automatically. See Also Network Map Rogue Control List SSIDs SSID Management 120 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Channel History The RF Monitor Channel History window focuses on traffic statistics and RF readings observed for just one channel that you select in the Channel field. A new set of readings is added every 10 seconds for a 5 GHz channel, or every 5 seconds for a 2.4 GHz channel. For descriptions of the measurements displayed, please see Spectrum Analyzer Measurements on page 118. Figure 66. RF Monitor Channel History Figure 66 presents the data in graphical form. New data appears at the left, with older readings shifting to the right. To make the data appear as a barchart, click the Bar checkbox which will shade the background. You also have the option of clicking the Rotate checkbox to give each statistic its own column. In other words, the graph for each statistic will grow down the page as new readings display at the top. (Figure 67) Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 121 Wireless Array Figure 67. RF Monitor Channel History (Rotated) If you select Rotate and Text together, data is presented as a numerical table.

(Figure 68) Click Pause to stop collecting data, or Resume to continue. Figure 68. RF Monitor Channel History (Text) 122 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Radio Assurance Radio Assurance mode is only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM). If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. When Radio Assurance mode is enabled, the monitor radio performs loopback tests on the Arrays radios. When problems are encountered, the Array can take various actions to correct them by performing different levels of reset on the affected radio. This window shows which resets, if any, have been performed on which radios since the last reboot. The Arrays response to radio problems is controlled by the Radio Assurance Mode selected, as described in RF Resilience on page 315. If you have selected Failure Alerts & Repairs (with or without reboots), then the Array can take corrective action if a problem is detected. Note that radio assurance requires RF Monitor Mode to be enabled in Advanced RF Settings to turn on self-monitoring functions. It also requires a radio to be set to monitoring mode. For a detailed discussion of the operation of this feature and the types of resets performed, see Radio Assurance on page 461. Figure 69. Radio Assurance For each of the Arrays radios, this window shows the radios state, its type (IEEE 802.11 type, and antenna type2x2 or 3x3), the assigned channel, and the selected 802.11 wireless mode. To the right, the table shows counts for the number of Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 123 times, if any, that radio assurance has performed each of the following types of resets since the last reboot, as described in Radio Assurance:

Wireless Array Monitor Beacon Phy MAC System (i.e., reboot the Array) See Also IAPs Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM) RF Resilience Radio Assurance 124 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Station Status Windows The following Station Status windows are available:

Stations this list describes all stations associated to the Array. Location Map displays a map showing the approximate locations of all stations associated to the array. RSSI for each associated station, this displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator at each of the Arrays IAPs. Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) for each associated station, this displays the SNR at each of the Arrays IAPs. Noise Floor for each associated station, this displays the ambient noise

(silence) value at each of the Arrays IAPs. Max by IAP for each IAP, this shows the historical maximum number of stations that have been associated to it over various periods of time. Station Assurance displays stations that are having connectivity problems. Some status information is only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM). If a feature is unavailable, then your license does not support the feature and you will get an error message if you try to set the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 125 Wireless Array Stations This status-only window shows client stations currently visible to the Array. You may choose to view only stations that have Associated to the Array, or only stations that are Unassociated, or both, by selecting the appropriate checkboxes above the list. The list always shows the MAC address of each station, its IP address, the SSID used for the association, the Group (if any) that this station belongs to, its VLAN, its QoS, the IAP used for the association, transmit and receive rates, the RSSI for each station, and how long each association has been active (up time). You may click other checkboxes above the list to show a number of additional columns:

Identification: shows more identifying information for the station its User Name, Host Name, Manufacturer, Device Type, and Device Class

(for example, notebook, iPad, etc.). Security:

includes security settings used by the connection Enc(ryption) type, Cipher used, Key Mgmt used, and Media supported by the station. Connection Info: shows the Band (5GHz or 2.4 GHz) and Channel(s) used (plus bonded channel, if any, for 802.11n). Shows additional RF measurements that affect the quality of the connection: SNR (signal to noise ratio) and Silence the ambient noise (floor) value. Figure 70. Stations You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header,

. Click again to indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon 126 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array reverse the sort order. You may select a specific station and perform one of the following actions by clicking the associated button:

Deny Access: Sends a de-authentication frame to the selected station and explicitly denies it access by adding its MAC address to the Deny List in the Access Control List window. To permit access again, go to Access Control List on page 227 and delete the station from the Deny list. Deauthenticate: Sends a de-authentication frame to the selected station. The station may re-authenticate. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Access Control List Station Status Windows Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 127 Wireless Array Location Map The Location Map shows the approximate locations of stations relative to this Array. The location of each station is computed based on the RSSI of its signal as received by the Array. The distance is adjusted based on the environment setting that you selected. You may display just the stations associated to this Array, unassociated stations (shown in gray), or both. The station count is shown on the right, above the map. You may also choose to display only 5 GHz stations (shown in orange) or 2.4 GHz stations (shown in green), or both. Associated Stations orange - 5 GHz green - 2.4GHz Hover mouse to show details Unassociated Station Array Figure 71. Location Map The map and Array are shown as if you were looking down on the Array from above, say from a skylight on the roof. Thus the positions of the radios are a mirror image of the way they are typically drawn when looking at the face of the Array. Radios are marked on the map to show the orientation of the Array. A station is identified by the type of Preferred Label that you select: Netbios Name, IP Address, MAC Address, or Manufacturer. If multiple stations are near each other, they will be displayed slightly offset so that one station does not 128 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array completely obscure another. You may minimize a station that is not of interest by clicking it. There is also a Minimize All button. You may replace the range-finder background image above with your own custom image of the floorplan of the area served by the Array see Working with the Custom Image on page 131 Hover the mouse over a station to show detailed information. (Figure 71) For a station that is associated to this Array, the details include:

The IAP, Channel, and SSID to which the station is associated. The MAC and IP address and Netbios name of the station. The TX Rate and RX Rate of this connection. The approximate Distance of this station from the Array. The distance is estimated using the received signal strength and your environment setting. The environment determines the typical signal attenuation due to walls and other construction that affect signal reception. Controls and items displayed on the Location Map window The Location Map has its own scroll bars in addition to the browsers scroll bars. If you narrow the browser window, the maps scroll bar may be hidden. Use the browsers bottom scroll bar if you need to move it into view. Scale Stations to display Minimize stations Preferred Label Zoom in Zoom out Environment Setting Replace background Reset display Rotate map Station counts Figure 72. Controls for Location Map Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 129 Wireless Array Display Associated/Unassociated: Select whether to display stations that are associated to the Array, stations that are not associated, or both. Display 2.4 GHz/5 GHz: Select whether to display 802.11bgn stations, or 802.11an stations, or both. Preferred Label: This field is located on the top of the window towards the right. It selects the type of label to be displayed for stations: Netbios Name, IP Address, MAC Address, or Manufacturer. If you select NetBIOS (this is the default), then that name, if known, will be used to label each Array. Else, its IP or MAC address will be used, in that order. Auto Refresh: Instructs the Array to refresh this window automatically. Refresh: Updates the stations displayed. Custom Image: Use this feature to replace the default background image with your own image of the floor plan of your location. Click the Browse button and browse to the desired file on your computer. This may be a

.gif, .jpg, .jpeg., .png, .htm, or .html file. The scale of the file should be 100 feet per inch. Then click Upload (see below). For more information on using the custom, image, see Working with the Custom Image on page 131. Upload: After browsing to the desired custom image, click the Upload button to install it. The map is redisplayed with your new background. No hash marks (for the map scale) are added to the image display. Reset: Click this button to restore the map display to the factory settings. All attributes are restored including the stations selected for display, the scale, the rotation, and the background map. Rotate: Click this button to rotate the orientation of the entire map. It rotates the map 45o counter-clockwise. Enlarge: Click this button to enlarge (zoom in on) the map. The displayed Scale is updated with the new scale for the map. Reduce: Click this button to reduce (zoom out on) the map. The displayed Scale is updated with the new scale for the map. 130 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Environment: This field is located on the top right of the window. Select the type of environment for this Arrays deployment: Indoor open (few walls or obstructions), Indoor walled

(typical wall or cubicle construction), or Indoor dense (many walls or obstructions, or unusually dense walls). Scale: This view-only value shows the approximate distance represented by each hashmark on the default map background. Associated, Unassociated, Total Stations: These view-only values show the station counts observed by the Array. See Also Station Status Windows Working with the Custom Image After you have uploaded a custom image (see Custom Image and Upload in Controls and items displayed on the Location Map window on page 129), you should move the display of the Array on your map to correspond with its actual location at your site. To move the Array on the map, simply click it, then drag and drop it to the desired location. The Array will continue to follow the mouse pointer to allow you to make further changes to its location. When you are satisfied with its location, click the Array again to return to normal operation. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 131 Wireless Array RSSI For each station that is associated to the Array, the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) window shows the stations RSSI value as measured by each IAP. In other words, the window shows the strength of the stations signal at each radio. You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. Figure 73. Station RSSI Values By default, the RSSI is displayed numerically. You may display the relative strength using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the strongest signals indicated by the most intense color. (Figure 73) If you select Graph, then the RSSI is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection. (Figure 74) The stations are listed to the left of the Array click on a station to show its RSSI values on the Array. Figure 74. Station RSSI Values Colorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon

. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in 132 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) For each station that is associated to the Array, the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) window shows the stations SNR value as measured by each IAP. In other words, the window shows the SNR of the stations signal at each IAP radio. The signal-

to-noise ratio can be very useful for determining the cause of poor performance at a station. A low value means that action may need to be taken to reduce sources of noise in the environment and/or improve the signal from the station. Figure 75. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. By default, the SNR is displayed numerically. (Figure 75) You may display the relative value using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the highest SNR indicated by the most intense color. (Figure 76) If you select Graph, then the SNR is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection. The stations are listed to the left of the Array click on a station to show its SNR values on the Array. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 133 Wireless Array Figure 76. Station SNR Values Colorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon

. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows 134 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Noise Floor For each station that is associated to the Array, the Noise Floor window shows the ambient noise affecting a stations signal as measured by each IAP. The noise floor is the RSSI value when the station is not transmitting, sometimes called a Silence value. In other words, the window shows the noise floor of the stations signal at each IAP radio. The noise floor value can be very useful for characterizing the environment of a station to determine the cause of poor performance. A relatively high value means that action may need to be taken to reduce sources of noise in the environment. Figure 77. Station Noise Floor Values You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. By default, the noise floor is displayed numerically. (Figure 77) You may display the relative value using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the highest noise indicated by the most intense color. If you select Graph, then the ambient noise is shown on a representation of the Array, either colorized or numerically based on your selection.(Figure 78) The stations are listed to the left of the Array click on a station to show its values on the Array. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 135 Wireless Array Figure 78. Station Noise Floor Values Colorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon

. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Station Status Windows RF Monitor Windows 136 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Max by IAP This status-only window shows the maximum number of client stations that have historically been associated to the Array. For each IAP, the list shows the IAPs state and channel number, the current number of stations associated, and the highest number of stations that have been associated over various periods of time:

hour, day, week, month, and year. In other words, the Max Station Count shows the high water mark over the selected period of time the maximum count of stations for the selected period, rather than a cumulative count of all stations that have associated. This information aids in network administration and in planning for additional capacity. Figure 79. Max by IAP You may click an IAP to go to the IAP Settings window. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also IAPs Station Status Windows Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 137 Wireless Array Station Assurance Station assurance monitors the quality of the connections that users are experiencing on the wireless network. This window shows client stations that have had connectivity issues. You may enable or disable the station assurance feature and set thresholds for the problems that it checks, such as excessive packet retry or packet error rates, or stations that are unable to stay associated to the Array. Please see Station Assurance on page 320 for more information about these settings. When the Array detects that a station has reached the threshold value for one or more of the issues checked, it adds the station to this page. In addition, an event is triggered, a trap is generated, and a Syslog message is logged. For each station, this list shows the MAC address, its IP address, its host name, its device type, device class, and manufacturer. It also shows the values of the various statistics that were monitored for problems as described in Station Assurance on page 320: associated time, authentication failures, packet error rate, packet retry rate, packet data rate, RSSI, signal to noise ratio (SNR), and distance. Figure 80. Station Assurance You may click the Clear Inactive button to remove stations that are no longer connected to the Array from the list. Click the Clear All button to remove all entries and start fresh to add problem stations to the list as they are detected. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click Auto Refresh to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. 138 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array See Also IAPs Station Status Windows Station Assurance Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 139 Wireless Array Statistics Windows The following Array Statistics windows are available:

IAP Statistics Summary provides an overview of the statistical data associated with all IAPs. Expands to show links for displaying detailed statistics for individual IAPs. Per-IAP Statistics provides detailed statistics for an individual IAP. Network Statistics displays statistical data associated with each network (Ethernet) interface. VLAN Statistics provides statistical data associated with your assigned VLANs. WDS Statistics provides statistical data for all WDS client and host links. Filter Statistics provides statistical data for all configured filters. Station Statistics provides statistical data associated with each station. IAP Statistics Summary This is a status only window that provides an overview of the statistical data associated with all IAPs. It also shows the channel used by each IAP. For detailed statistics for a specific IAP, see Per-IAP Statistics on page 141. Click the Unicast Stats Only checkbox on the lower left to filter the results, or clear the checkbox to show statistics for all wireless traffic. Figure 81. IAP Statistics Summary Page 140 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also System Log Window Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn IAPs Per-IAP Statistics This is a status only window that provides detailed statistics for the selected IAP. If you click the link for IAP All in the left frame, each detailed statistic field will show the sum of that statistic for all IAPs. For a summary of statistics for all IAPs, see IAP Statistics Summary on page 140. Use the Display Percentages checkbox at the lower left to select the output format check this option to express each statistic as a percentage of the total at the top of the column, or leave it blank to display raw numbers. A quick way to display the statistics for a particular IAP is by clicking the Array graphic at the bottom left of the WMI window. Click the desired IAP, and the selected statistics will be displayed. See User Interface on page 88. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 141 Wireless Array Figure 82. Individual IAP Statistics Page You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also System Log Window Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn IAPs 142 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Network Statistics This is a status only window that allows you to review statistical data associated with each network (Ethernet) interface and its activity. You can Refresh the data

(update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. If you are experiencing problems on the Array, you may also want to print this window for your records

. Figure 83. Network Statistics See Also DHCP Server DNS Settings Network Network Interfaces Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 143 Wireless Array VLAN Statistics This is a status only window that allows you to review statistical data associated with your assigned VLANs. You can refresh the information that is displayed on this page at any time by clicking on the Refresh button, or select the Auto Refresh option for this window to refresh automatically. The Clear All button at the lower left allows you to clear (zero out) all VLAN statistics. Figure 84. VLAN Statistics See Also VLAN Management VLANs 144 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array WDS Statistics The main WDS Statistics window provides statistical data for all WDS client and host links. To access data about a specific WDS client or host link, simply click on the desired link in the left frame to access the appropriate window. You may also choose to view a sum of the statistics for all client links, all host links, or all links

(both client and host links). Figure 85. WDS Statistics See Also SSID Management WDS Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 145 Wireless Array IDS Statistics The Xirrus Array employs a number of IDS/IPS (Intrusion Detection System/

Intrusion Prevention System) strategies to detect and prevent malicious attacks on the wireless network. This status-only window provides detailed intrusion detection statistics for the selected IAP. Use the Display Averages checkbox at the upper left to select the output format check this option to express each statistic as an average rate, or leave it blank to display raw counts. Note that you must have Intrusion Detection Mode enabled to collect IDS statistics. See Intrusion Detection on page 328. Information about IDS events is discussed in the IDS Event Log Window on page 157 Figure 86. IDS Statistics Page You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Intrusion Detection IDS Event Log Window 146 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Filter Statistics The Filter Statistics window provides statistical data for all configured filters. The name, state (enabled on or off), and type (allow or deny) of each filter is shown. For enabled filters, this window shows the number of packets and bytes that met the filter criteria. Click on a column header to sort the rows based on that column. Click on a filter name to edit the filter settings. Figure 87. Filter Statistics See Also Filters Application Control Windows Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 147 Wireless Array Station Statistics This status-only window provides an overview of statistical data for all stations. Stations are listed by MAC address, and Receive and Transmit statistics are summarized for each. For detailed statistics for a specific station, click the desired MAC address in the Station column and see Per-Station Statistics on page 149. Figure 88. Station Statistics Note that you can clear the data for an individual station (see Per-Station Statistics), but you cannot clear the data for all stations using this window. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. See Also Per-Station Statistics 148 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Per-Station Statistics This window provides detailed statistics for the selected station. This window is accessed from the Station Statistics window click the MAC address of the desired entry in the Station column to display its Per-Station Statistics window. Receive and Transmit statistics are listed by Rate this is the data rate in Mbps. For a summary of statistics for all stations, see Station Statistics on page 148. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Figure 89. Individual Station Statistics Page See Also Station Statistics Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 149 Wireless Array Application Control Windows This feature is only available if the Array license includes Application Control. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. Application Control data is only available from XR Series Array models. It is not available on XN Arrays. The Application Control feature provides real-time visibility of application usage by users across the wireless network. Network usage has changed enormously in the last few years, with the increase in smartphone and tablet usage stressing networks. Increasing traffic from legitimate business needs such as cloud- and web-based applications, streaming media and VoIP must be handled with an adequate quality of experience. Application Control is discussed in the following topics:

About Application Control an overview of this feature. Application Control displays information about applications running on the wireless network. Stations (Application Control) displays a list of stations. Click one to analyze application control information for only that station. About Application Control The Array uses Deep Packet Inspection (DPI) to determine what applications are being used and by whom, and how much bandwidth they are consuming. These applications are rated by their degree of risk and productiveness. Filters may then be put in place to implement per-application policies that keep network usage focused on productive uses:

Usage of non-productive and risky applications like BitTorrent can be restricted using Filters. Traffic for mission-critical applications like VoIP and WebEx may be given higher priority (QoS). Non- critical traffic from applications like YouTube may be given lower priority (QoS). 150 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Traffic flows for specific applications may be controlled by sending them into VLANs that are designated for that type of traffic. Application Control can track application usage over time to monitor trends. Usage may be tracked by Array, VLAN, or station. Many hundreds of applications are recognized and grouped into a number of categories. The distributed architecture of Xirrus Arrays allows Application Control to scale naturally as you grow the network. Application Control This display-only window provides a snapshot of the application usage on your Array. In order to view the Application Control window, the Array must have a licence that supports this feature, and you must have enabled the Application Control option on the Filter Lists page (seeFilter Lists on page 345). Figure 90. Application Control Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 151 Wireless Array The Application Control window has three sections:

Selection Criteria allow you to choose the type of data to show, and to filter for a single VLAN or station. Pie Charts present a color coded at-a-glance view of the top ten applications being used by the network. Traffic Tables beneath the pie charts list the applications in use along with traffic statistics. Unique Productivity and Risk ratings let you easily assess the nature of applications in use, so that you can take action using Filter Management. Selection Criteria At the top of the window, the options in the gray ribbon allow you to customize the display with the following choices:

Display for VLAN: Use the drop-down list if you wish to select just one VLAN to analyze, or leave the default value of all to see data from all VLANs. Display for Station: Use the drop-down list if you wish to select just one station to analyze (stations are listed by their MAC address), or leave the default value of all to see data from all stations. You may also use the Stations window to select a station to display. See Stations (Application Control) on page 155. Station Traffic: Check this box if you wish to analyze traffic from stations, listing the applications that they are using. Array Management Traffic: Check this box if you wish to analyze management traffic on this Array, including the load due to functions such as Xirrus Roaming. Tracking traffic into the array on the management side can alert you to nefarious activityand even to traffic on the wired network that would best be blocked before it hits the Array. You may display both station and Array management traffic, if you wish. By Application: Check this box if you wish to analyze and list traffic by what specific applications are in use, such as WebEx or BitTorrent. 152 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array By Category: Check this box if you wish to analyze and list traffic by what types of applications are in use, such as Games or Collaboration. Auto Refresh instructs the Array to periodically refresh this window automatically. Use the Refresh button to refresh the window right now. Pie Charts Figure 91. Application Control (Pie Charts) These charts provide a quick way to determine how your wireless bandwidth is being used. There are charts for Station Traffic and/or Array Management Traffic, depending on which checkboxes you selected. Similarly, there are charts for By Application and/or By Category, depending on your selections. The top ten applications or categories are listed, by percentage of bandwidth usage. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 153 Traffic Tables Wireless Array Figure 92. Application Control (Station Traffic) These tables provide detailed information about how your wireless bandwidth is being used. There are tables for Station Traffic and/or Array Management Traffic, depending on which checkboxes you selected. Similarly, there are tables for By Application and/or By Category, depending on your selections. In addition to showing traffic statistics, there are two unique and highly useful columns. Risk estimates the likelihood of an application causing problems for your business, such as a file-sharing utility introducing viruses or exposing you to legal problems. Risk is rated from 1 (low risk, e.g., Google) to 5 (high risk, e.g., BitTorrent). Risky applications (rated at 4 or 5) are flagged for your attention by highlighting the entry in pale red. Productivity estimates the value of an activity to your business, from 1 (unproductive, e.g., Y8 gaming site) to 5 (productive, e.g., WebEx). You may click the heading of any column to sort based on that column. Click again to sort in the reverse order. For instance, sort on Risk to find problem applications, or sort on Productivity to find applications that should be given increased or decreased handling priority. 154 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array When you find risky or unproductive applications taking up bandwidth on the network, you can easily create Filters to control them. See Filter Management on page 347. You may use filters to:

Block problematic traffic, such as BitTorrent or Y8. Prioritize mission critical trafficby increasing the QoS assigned to the traffic. See Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array on page 244. Lower the priority of less productive trafficuse filters to decrease the QoS assigned to traffic for applications like YouTube and Facebook. Stations (Application Control) This status-only window shows client stations currently visible to the Array. The MAC address in the first column is a link. Click on a selected station, and the Application Control window opens with the Display for Station field set to that station, to perform a detailed analysis of its application usage. Figure 93. Stations (Application Control) The rest of the fields and display options on this window (including the Identification, Security, and Connection Info checkboxes) are as described in Stations on page 126. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 155 Wireless Array System Log Window This is a status only window that allows you to review the system log, where system alerts and messages are displayed. Although there are no configuration options available in this window, you do have the usual choice of deciding how the event messages are sorted by clicking in the column header for the desired field (Time Stamp, Priority, or Message). Time Stamp sorts the list based on the time the event occurred. Priority sorts the list based on the priority assigned to the message. Message sorts the list based on the message category The displayed messages may be filtered by using the Filter Priority option, which allows control of the minimum priority level displayed. For example, you may choose (under Services >System Log) to log messages at or above Debug level but use Filter Priority to display only those at Information level and above. Figure 94. System Log (Alert Level Highlighted) Use the Highlight Priority field if you wish to highlight messages at the selected priority level. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the message list, or click on the Clear All button at the upper left to delete all messages. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Note that there is a shortcut way to view system log messages. If you click Log Messages near the bottom of the left hand frame, WMI displays counts of log messages at different severity levels. Click a count to display just those messages in the System Log window. See Figure 42 on page 88 for more information. 156 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array IDS Event Log Window This status only window displays the Intrusion Detection System (IDS) Event log, listing any detected attacks on your network. For descriptions of the types of attacks detected, as well as the settings to fine-tune IDS on the Array, please see Intrusion Detection on page 328. The displayed messages may be filtered by using the Filter Event setting, which allows you to select just one type of intrusion to display. For example, you may choose to display only beacon flood attacks. Figure 95. IDS Event Log Use the Highlight Event field if you wish to highlight all events of one particular type in the list. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the message list, or click the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the Array to refresh this window automatically. Although there are no configuration options available in this window, you do have the usual choice of deciding how the event messages are sorted by clicking in the column header for the desired field. Time Stamp the time that the event occurred. IAP the affected radio. Channel the affected channel. Event the type of attack, as described in Intrusion Detection. SSID the SSID that was attacked. MAC Address the MAC address of the attacker. Viewing Status on the Wireless Array 157 Wireless Array Period the length of the window used to determine whether the count of this type of event exceeded the threshold. Current the count of this type of event for the current period. Average the average count per period of this type of event. Maximum the maximum count per period of this type of event. 158 Viewing Status on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Configuring the Wireless Array The following topics include procedures for configuring the Array using the products embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). Procedures have been organized into functional areas that reflect the flow and content of the WMI. The following WMI windows allow you to establish configuration parameters for your Array, and include:

Express Setup on page 161 Network on page 169 Services on page 184 VLANs on page 199 Tunnels on page 204 Security on page 208 SSIDs on page 242 Groups on page 264 IAPs on page 271 WDS on page 338 Filters on page 344 Clusters on page 352 After making changes to the configuration settings of an Array you must click on the Save changes to flash button at the top of the configuration window, otherwise the changes you make will not be applied the next time the Array is rebooted. Some settings are only available if the Arrays license includes appropriate Xirrus Advanced Feature Sets. If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. Configuring the Wireless Array 159 Wireless Array Note that the Configuration menu section may be collapsed down to hide the headings under it by clicking it. Click again to display the headings. (See Figure 43 on page 89.) This chapter only discusses using the configuration windows on the Array. To view status or use system tools on the Array, please see:

Viewing Status on the Wireless Array on page 95 Using Tools on the Wireless Array on page 359 160 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Express Setup Use the Express Setup page to establish global configuration settings that enable basic Array functionality. Any changes you make in this window will affect all radios. Figure 96. WMI: Express Setup Configuring the Wireless Array 161 When finished, click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. Procedure for Performing an Express Setup Wireless Array 1. Host Name: Specify a unique host name for this Array. The host name is used to identify the Array on the network. Use a name that will be meaningful within your network environment, up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The default is the Arrays serial number. 2. Location Information: Enter a brief but meaningful description that accurately defines the physical location of the Array. In an environment where multiple units are installed, clear definitions for their locations are important if you want to identify a specific unit. 3. Admin Contact: Enter the name and contact information of the person who is responsible for administering the Array at the designated location. 4. Admin Email: Enter the email address of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 5. Admin Phone: Enter the telephone number of the admin contact you entered in Step 3. 6. License Key: If Xirrus issued you a license that differs from the current value shown, enter it now. 7. Configure SNMPv2: Select whether to Enable SNMPv2 on the Array, and set the SNMPv2 community strings. The factory default value for the Read-Only Community String is xirrus_read_only. The factory default value for the Read-Write Community String is xirrus. If you are using the Xirrus Management System (XMS), the read-write string must match the string used by XMS. XMS also uses the default value xirrus. 8. Configure the Gigabit Ethernet network interface settings. Please see Network Interfaces on page 171 for more information. For XN Arrays, configure the 10/100 Ethernet 0 (10/100 Mb) port as well. The fields for each of these interfaces are similar, and include:

162 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array a. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface, or choose No to disable the interface. b. Allow Management on Interface: Choose Yes to allow management of the Array via this Gigabit interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. Note that for XN Arrays, the 10/100 Ethernet port is also known as the Management Port, and management is always enabled on this port. c. Configuration Server Protocol: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP to assign IP addresses to the Arrays Ethernet interfaces, or choose Static if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you choose the Static IP option, you must enter the following IP Settings:

Address: Enter a valid IP address for this Array. To use a remote connection (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be used.

Subnet Mask: Enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask (the default is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located.

Default Gateway: Enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to forward data to other networks.

Click the Apply button for this interface when done making IP changes. 9. SSID Settings: This section specifies the wireless network name and security settings. a. The SSID (Wireless Network Name) is a unique name that identifies a wireless network (SSID stands for Service Set Identifier). All devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. The default SSID is xirrus. Entering a value in this field will replace the default SSID with the new name. For additional information about SSIDs, go to the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 452. Configuring the Wireless Array 163 b. Wireless Security: Select the desired wireless security scheme (Open, WEP or WPA). Make your selection from the choices available in the pull-down list. Wireless Array

Open This option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. WEP generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP or AES as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication. WPA is the stronger of the two wireless security schemes.

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode.

WPA-Both (WPA and WPA2) This option makes use of both WPA and WPA2. For more information about security, including a full review of all security options and settings, go to Understanding Security on page 209. c. WEP Encryption Key/Passphrase: Depending on the wireless security scheme you selected, enter a unique WEP key or WPA passphrase. This field and the one below only appear if you select a Wireless Security option other than Open. 164 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array d. Confirm Encryption Key/Passphrase: If you entered a WEP key or WPA passphrase, confirm it here. e. Click Apply SSID Settings when done. 10. Admin Settings: This section allows you to change the default admin username, password, and privileges for the Array. You may change the password and leave the user name as is, but we suggest that you change both to improve Array security. a. New Admin User (Replaces user admin): Enter the name of a new administrator user account. Be sure to record the new account name and password, because the default admin user will be deleted! Note that the Array also offers the option of authenticating administrators using a RADIUS server (see Admin Management on page 214)). b. New Admin Privilege Level: By default, the new administrator will have read/write privileges on the Array (i.e., the new user will be able to change the configuration of the Array). If you wish the new account to have different privileges, select the desired level from the drop-down list. For more information about user privileges, please see Admin Privileges on page 216. Take care to make sure to leave yourself enough read/write privileges on at least one account to be able to administer the Array. c. New Admin Password: Enter a new administration password for managing this Array. If you forget this password, you must reset the Array to its factory defaults so that the password is reset to admin (its default setting). d. Confirm Admin Password: If you entered a new administration password, confirm the new password here. e. Click Apply Admin Settings when done. 11. Time and Date Settings: Specify an optional time (NTP - Network Time Protocol) server or modify the system time if youre not using a server. a. Current Array Date and Time: This read-only field shows the current time for your convenience. Configuring the Wireless Array 165 Wireless Array b. Time Zone: Select your time zone from the choices available in the pull-down list. c. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). d. Use Network Time Protocol: Check this box if you want to use an NTP server to synchronize the Arrays clock. Use of NTP is mandatory for Arrays to be managed with XMS (the Xirrus Management System), and ensures that Syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. Without using an NTP server (no universal clock), each Array will use its own internal clock and stamp times accordingly, which may result in discrepancies. If you select Yes, the NTP server fields are displayed. If you dont want to use an NTP server, select No (default) and set the system time on the Array manually. e. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. f. NTP Primary Authentication:

If you are using authentication with NTP, select the type of key: MD5 or SHA1. Select None if you are not using authentication (this is the default). For more information on authenticated NTP, see Time Settings (NTP) on page 185.

(optional) g. NTP Primary Authentication Key ID: Enter the key ID, which is a decimal integer. h. NTP Primary Authentication Key: Enter your key, which is a string of characters. i. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. You may use the authentication fields as described above if you wish to set up authentication for the secondary server. 166 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array j. Adjust Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, the time fields become active. Enter the revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). k. Adjust Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, the date fields become active. Enter the revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). 12. Quick Configuration: This offers predefined configuration options such as Classroom and High-Density that capture best practices from years of field experience. If one of the options in the drop-down list is appropriate to your deployment, select it and click Apply. For example, the High-

Density option uses best practices to configure the Array for high density settings such as lecture halls, convention centers, stadiums, etc. 13. IAP Settings:

Enable/Configure All IAPs: Click on the Execute button to enable and auto configure all IAPs (a message displays the countdown time in seconds to complete the auto-configuration task). When an IAP is enabled, its LED is switched on. LED on Figure 97. LEDs are Switched On Configuring the Wireless Array 167 14. Click Save changes to flash at the upper right to make your changes permanent, i.e., these settings will still be in effect after a reboot. Wireless Array 168 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Network This is a status-only window that provides a snapshot of the configuration settings currently established for the Ethernet interfaces. DNS Settings and CDP Settings (Cisco Discovery Protocol) are summarized as well. You must go to the appropriate configuration window to make changes to any of the settings displayed here (configuration changes cannot be made from this window). You can click on any item in the Interface column to jump to the associated configuration window. Figure 98. Network Interfaces WMI windows that allow you to change or view configuration settings associated with the network interfaces include:

Network Interfaces on page 171 Network Bonds on page 175 DNS Settings on page 181 CDP Settings on page 183 See Also DNS Settings Network Interfaces Network Status Windows Configuring the Wireless Array 169 Spanning Tree Status Network Statistics Wireless Array 170 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Network Interfaces XR500, XR-1000, and XR-2000 Series Arrays have one Gigabit Ethernet interface, while XR-4000 Series Arrays have two, and XR-6000 Series models have four. This window allows you to establish configuration settings for these interfaces. Figure 99. Network Settings Configuring the Wireless Array 171 Wireless Array On XN Series Arrays, this window configures the 10/100 Fast Ethernet interface and the Gigabit 1 and Gigabit2 interfaces When finished making changes, click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. When the status of a port changes, a Syslog entry is created describing the change. Network Interface Ports The following diagram shows the location of network interface ports on the underside of an XR Series Array. XR-4000 Series XR-6000 Series Console Gigabit1 POE Gigabit2 POE Gigabit3 Gigabit4 Console Gigabit1 POE Gigabit2 Figure 100. Network Interface Ports Procedure for Configuring the Network Interfaces Configure the Gigabit network interfaces (for XN Arrays, configure the Fast Ethernet port as well). The fields for each of these interfaces are the same, and include:

1. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface, or choose No to disable the interface. 172 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 2. LED Indicator: Choose Enabled to allow the LED for this interface to blink with traffic on the port, or choose Disabled to turn the LED off. The LED will still light during the boot sequence, then turn off. This option is only available for the Gigabit interfaces. 3. Allow Management on Interface: Choose Yes to allow management of this Array via the selected network interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. For XN Arrays, this option is only available for the Gigabit interfaces management is always enabled on the 10/100 interface (sometimes called the Management Port). 4. Auto Negotiate: This feature allows the Array to negotiate the best transmission rates automatically. Choose Yes to enable this feature, or choose No to disable this feature the default is enabled. If you disable the Auto Negotiate feature, you must define the Duplex and Speed options manually (otherwise these options are not available). Both sides of the link must have the same values for the following settings, or the connection will have errors. a. Duplex: Full-duplex mode transmits data in two directions simultaneously (for example, a telephone is a full-duplex device because both parties can talk and be heard at the same time). Half-

duplex allows data transmission in one direction at a time only (for example, a walkie-talkie is a half-duplex device). If the Auto-

Negotiate feature is disabled, you can manually choose Half or Full duplex for your data transmission preference. b. MTU: the Maximum Transmission Unit size. This is the largest packet size (in bytes) that the interface can pass along. c. Speed: If the Auto-Negotiate feature is disabled, you must manually choose the desired data transmission speed from the pull-down list. For XN Arrays, when configuring the Fast Ethernet interface the options are 10 Megabit or 100 Megabit. For configuring the Gigabit interfaces the options are 10 Megabit or 100 Megabit. (Note that 1000 Megabit speed can only be set by Auto-Negotiation.) Configuring the Wireless Array 173 Wireless Array 5. Configuration Server Protocol / IP Settings: Choose DHCP to instruct the Array to use DHCP when assigning IP addresses to the Array, or choose Static IP if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you select the Static IP option you must specify the IP address, IP subnet mask and default gateway. a. Address: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the Array. To use any of the remote connections (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be established. b. Subnet Mask: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask (the default for Class C is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the Array is located. c. Default Gateway: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the Array uses to send data to other networks. (You dont need to enter the gateway if it is on the same subnet as the Array.) d. Click the Apply button for this interface when done making IP changes. 6. Static Route (IP Address/Mask): (For XN Arrays, Fast Ethernet port only) The 10-100 Ethernet Port may be used for managing the Array out of band from the Gigabit Ethernet ports. The 10-100 port will route only management traffic, using a static route that may be configured using this field. 7. When done configuring all interfaces as desired, click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Network Bonds DNS Settings Network Network Statistics Spanning Tree Status 174 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Network Bonds On models with more than one Gigabit port these ports may be bonded, i.e. configured to work together in sets. For example, one port may provide active backup or load balancing for another, or other options as described in this section. XR-6000 Series Arrays have four Gigabit ports, and you may specify which ports are bonded to work together as a pair. You may also select more than two ports to work together in one group. You may use the mirror option to have all the traffic that is ingressing and egressing one bond be transmitted by the bond you are configuring. For example, if you configure Bond2 to mirror Bond1, then all traffic going in and out of Bond1s Gigabit ports will be transmitted out of Bond2s Gigabit ports. This way of duplicating one bonds traffic to another bond is very useful for troubleshooting with a network analyzer. Figure 101. Network Bonds Configuring the Wireless Array 175 Wireless Array If a set of Gigabit ports have been bonded, the IP address, IP mask, IP gateway, IP DHCP, and Management settings are shared between bonded ports. Any changes you make to these settings on one member will be reflected in the settings of the other members. Other settings may be configured individually. Procedure for Configuring Network Bonds Configure the bonding behavior of the Gigabit network interfaces. The fields for each of these bonds are the same, and include:

1. Bond Mode: Select the desired behavior for a set of bonded Gigabit Ethernet ports from the following options. The modes below describe the relationship between a set of Gigabit portsfor example, load balancing or active backup. Use the Bond Ports field to select the ports that are bonded (set in Step 2). Two or more ports may be bonded. You may also include just one single port in a bondthis is useful for mirroring one Gigabit port to another port (Step 5 on page 180). In Arrays that have four Gigabit ports, you have the option of bonding three or four ports together. In this discussion, we call two ports that are bonded Gigx and Gigy. a. Active Backup (gig ports fail over to each other) This mode provides fault tolerance and is the default mode. Gigx acts as the primary link. Gigy is the backup link and is passive. Gigy assumes the IP properties of Gigx. If Gigx fails, the Array automatically fails over to Gigy. When a failover occurs in this mode, Gigy issues gratuitous ARPs to allow it to substitute for Gigx at Layer 3 as well as Layer 2. See Figure 102 (a). You may include more than two ports in the bond with Active Backup to provide additional fault tolerance. For example, if you have three Gigabit ports configured in a bond, if the first two ports in the bond were to go down, the Array would fail over traffic to the third Gigabit port. 176 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array

(a) Active backup

(b) Aggregate using 802.3ad Figure 102. Port Modes (a, b) b. Aggregate Traffic from gig ports using 802.3ad The Array sends network traffic across all member Gigabit ports to increase link speed to the network. These ports act as a single logical interface, using a load balancing algorithm to balance traffic across the ports. For non-

IP traffic (such as ARP), the last byte of the destination MAC address is used to do the calculation. If the packet is a fragment or not TCP or UDP, the source and destination IP addresses are used to do the calculation. If the packet is TCP or UDP over IP then the source IP address, destination IP address, source port number and destination port number are all used to do the calculation. The network switch must also support 802.3ad. If a port fails, the connection degrades gracefully the other port still transmits. See Figure 102 (b). c. Transmit Traffic on all gig ports Transmits incoming traffic on all Gigabit ports. Any traffic received on Gigabit ports is sent to the onboard processor. This mode provides fault tolerance. See Figure 103 (c). Configuring the Wireless Array 177 Wireless Array

(c) Transmit on all ports Figure 103. Port Modes (c)

(d) Load balance traffic Figure 104. Port Modes (d) 178 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array d. Load balance traffic between gig ports This option provides trunking, similar to option (b) Aggregate Traffic from gig1 & gig2 using 802.3ad, but it does not use 802.3ad and it uses a different load balancing algorithm to determine the outgoing Gigabit port. The outgoing port used is based on an exclusive OR of the source and destination MAC address. Like option (b), this mode also provides load balancing and fault tolerance. See Figure 104 (d). 2. Bond Ports: Select the ports to be members of this bond for the behavior specified by Bond Mode. By default, Bond1 contains Gig1 and Gig2. You may also set up a bond with a single port, for example, if you wish to mirror one Gigabit port to another. In Arrays that have four Gigabit ports, you also have the option of bonding three or four ports together. When you check off a port to be a member of a bond, that port is automatically removed from any other bonds that contain it. 3. Active VLANs: Active VLANs is a read-only field that shows the VLANs that you have selected to be passed through this port. You may modify this list by making selections in Set Active VLANs. 4. Set Active VLANs: Create and manage the list of VLANs that are allowed to be passed through this port. Traffic will be dropped for VLANs that are not in this list. You may view the complete list of VLANs whose traffic will be passed in the Active VLANs list, above. The default setting is to pass All VLANs. a. To add a VLAN to the list of allowed VLANs, type its name or number, and click Add. To allow all VLANs (current or future) to be passed, click the All button. b. To remove a VLAN from the list of allowed VLANs, type its name or number, and click Delete. To remove all VLANs from the Active VLANs list, click None. c. To allow only the set of currently defined VLANs (see VLANs on page 199) to be passed, click the Current button. Essentially, this fixes the Active VLANs list to contain the Arrays currently defined VLANs, and only this set, until you make explicit changes to the Configuring the Wireless Array 179 Wireless Array Active VLANs list. If you create new VLANs, they will not be passed unless you take action to add them to the list. 5. Mirror Specify one of the active bonds (Bondx) that is to be mirrored by this bond (Bondy). (Figure 105) All wireless traffic received on the Array is transmitted out both Bondx and Bondy. All traffic received on Bondx is passed on to the onboard processor as well as out Bondy. All traffic received on Bondy is passed on to the onboard processor as well as out Bondx. This allows a network analyzer to be plugged into Bondy to capture traffic for troubleshooting, while the bonded ports provide network connectivity for data traffic. Mirroring is also used to duplicate the traffic from one bond to another bond traffic received on Bondx is transmitted by Bondy; similarly, traffic received on Bondy is transmitted by Bondx. This allows the Array to act as a wired bridge and allows Arrays to be daisy-chained and still maintain wired connectivity. If each bond contains just one port as is the case for XN Arrays, then you have the simple case of one port mirroring another. Figure 105. Mirroring Traffic 180 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 6. When done configuring bonds as desired, click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Network Interfaces DNS Settings Network Network Statistics Spanning Tree Status DNS Settings This window allows you to establish your DNS (Domain Name System) settings. The Array uses these DNS servers to resolve host names into IP addresses. The Array also registers its own Host Name with these DNS servers, so that others may address the Array using its name rather than its IP address. An option allows you to specify that the Arrays DNS servers will be assigned via a DHCP server on the wired network. Note that the DNS servers defined here are not used by wireless clients servers for stations associated to the Array are defined along with DHCP pools. See DHCP Server on page 197. At least one DNS server must be set up if you want to offer clients associating with the Array the ability to use meaningful host names instead of numerical IP addresses. When finished, click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. Figure 106. DNS Settings Configuring the Wireless Array 181 Wireless Array Procedure for Configuring DNS Servers 1. DNS Host Name: Enter a valid DNS host name. 2. DNS Domain: Enter the DNS domain name. 3. DNS Server 1: Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. 4. DNS Server 2 and DNS Server 3: Enter the IP address of the secondary and tertiary DNS servers (if required). 5. Use DNS settings assigned by DHCP: If you are using DHCP to assign the Arrays IP address, you may turn this option On. The Array will then obtain its DNS domain and server settings from the network DHCP server that assigns an IP address to the Array, rather than using the DNS Server fields above. You may also configure that DHCP server to assign a host name to the Array. 6. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also DHCP Server Network Network Interfaces Network Statistics Spanning Tree Status 182 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array CDP Settings CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) is a layer 2 network protocol used to share information (such as the device manufacturer and model, network capabilities, and IP address) with other directly connected network devices. Wireless Arrays can both advertise their presence by sending CDP announcements, and gather and display information sent by neighbors (see CDP Neighbors on page 111). This window allows you to establish your CDP settings. When finished, Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. Figure 107. CDP Settings Procedure for Configuring CDP Settings 1. Enable CDP: When CDP is enabled, the Array sends out CDP announcements of the Arrays presence, and gathers CDP data sent by neighbors. When disabled, it does neither. CDP is enabled by default. 2. CDP Interval: The Array sends out CDP announcements advertising its presence at this interval. The default is 60 seconds. 3. CDP Hold Time: CDP information received from neighbors is retained for this period of time before aging out of the Arrays neighbor list. Thus, if a neighbor stops sending announcements, it will no longer appear on the CDP Neighbors window after CDP Hold Time seconds from its last announcement. The default is 180 seconds. See Also CDP Neighbors Network Network Interfaces Network Statistics Configuring the Wireless Array 183 Wireless Array Services This is a status-only window that allows you to review the current settings and status for services on the Array, including DHCP, SNMP, Syslog, and Network Time Protocol (NTP) services. For example, for the DHCP server, it shows each DHCP pool name, whether the pool is enabled, the IP address range, the gateway address, lease times, and the DNS domain being used. There are no configuration options available in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with network services, you may want to print this window for your records. The following sections discuss configuring services on the Array:

Figure 108. Services Time Settings (NTP) on page 185 NetFlow on page 187 Wi-Fi Tag on page 188 System Log on page 190 SNMP on page 194 DHCP Server on page 197 184 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Time Settings (NTP) This window allows you to manage the Arrays time settings, including synchronizing the Arrays clock with a universal clock from an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. We recommend that you use NTP for proper operation of SNMP in XMS (the Xirrus Management System), since a lack of synchronization will cause errors to be detected. Synchronizing the Arrays clock with an NTP server also ensures that Syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. It is possible to use authentication with NTP to ensure that you are receiving synchronization from a known source. For example, the instructions for requesting a key for the NIST Authenticated NTP server are available at http://www.nist.gov/pml/div688/grp00/upload/ntp_instructions.pdf. The Array allows you to enter optional authentication information. Figure 109. Time Settings (Manual Time) Procedure for Managing the Time Settings 1. Current Array Date and Time: Shows the current time for your convenience. 2. Time Zone: Select the time zone you want to use (normally your local time zone) from the pull-down list. 3. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: Check this box if you want the system to adjust for daylight savings automatically, otherwise leave this box unchecked (default). 4. Use Network Time Protocol: select whether to set time manually or use NTP to manage system time. Configuring the Wireless Array 185 Wireless Array 5. Setting Time Manually a. Adjust Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system time. When the box is checked, you may enter a revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current time, this box should be left unchecked (default). b. Adjust Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, check this box if you want to adjust the current system date. When the box is checked, you may enter a revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. If you dont want to adjust the current date, this box should be left unchecked (default). 6. Using an NTP Server a. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server. Figure 110. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled) b. NTP Primary Authentication:

If you are using authentication with NTP, select the type of key: MD5 or SHA1. Select None if you are not using authentication (this is the default).

(optional) c. NTP Primary Authentication Key ID: Enter the key ID, which is a decimal integer. 186 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array d. NTP Primary Authentication Key: Enter your key, which is a string of characters. e. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the Array is unable to contact the primary server. You may use the authentication fields as described above if you wish to set up authentication for the secondary server. See Also Express Setup Services SNMP System Log NetFlow This window allows you to enable or disable the sending of NetFlow information to a designated collector. NetFlow is a proprietary but open network protocol developed by Cisco Systems for collecting IP traffic information. When NetFlow is enabled, the Array will send IP flow information (traffic statistics) to the designated collector. Figure 111. NetFlow NetFlow sends per-flow network traffic information from the Array. Network managers can use a NetFlow collector to view the statistics on a per-flow basis and use this information to make key decisions. Knowing how many packets and bytes are sent to and from certain IP addresses or across specific network Configuring the Wireless Array 187 Wireless Array interfaces allows administrators to track usage by various areas. Traffic flow information may be used to engineer networks for better performance. Some features, such as Netflow, are only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM). If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. Procedure for Configuring NetFlow 1. Enable NetFlow: Select one of the Netflow versions to enable NetFlow functionality: v5, v9, or IPFIX. Internet Protocol Flow Information Export

(IPFIX) is an IETF protocol (www.ietf.org) performing many of the same functions as Netflow. Choose Disable if you wish to disable this feature. 2. NetFlow Collector Host (Domain or IP): If you enabled NetFlow, enter the domain name or IP address of the collector. 3. NetFlow Collector Port: If you enabled NetFlow, enter the port on the collector host to which to send data. Wi-Fi Tag This window enables or disables Wi-Fi tag capabilities. When enabled, the Array listens for and collects information about Wi-Fi RFID tags sent on the designated channel. These tags are transmitted by specialized tag devices (for example, AeroScout Tags). A Wi-Fi tagging server (such as AeroScout) then queries the Array for a report on the tags that it has received. The Wi-Fi tagging server uses proprietary algorithms to determine locations for devices sending tag signals. Figure 112. Wi-Fi Tag 188 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Configuring Wi-Fi Tag 1. Enable Wi-Fi Tag: Choose Yes to enable Wi-Fi tag functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. 2. Wi-Fi Tag UDP Port: If you enabled Wi-Fi tagging, enter the port on the Array which the Wi-Fi tagging server will use to query the Array for tagging data. When queried, the Array will send back information on the tags it has observed. For each, the Array sends information such as the MAC address of the tag transmitting device, and the RSSI and noise floor observed. 3. Wi-Fi Tag Channel: If you enabled Wi-Fi tagging, enter the 802.11 channel on which the Array will listen for tags. The tag devices must be set up to transmit on this channel. Only one channel may be configured, and it must be an 802.11b/g channel in the range of Channel 1 to 11. Configuring the Wireless Array 189 Wireless Array System Log This window allows you to enable or disable the Syslog server, define primary, secondary, and tertiary servers, set up email notification, and set the level for Syslog reporting for each server and for email notification the Syslog service will send Syslog messages at the selected severity or above to the defined Syslog servers and email address. An option allows you to use a Splunk application to analyze Array events by sending data in key:value pairs, as described in About Using the Splunk Application for Xirrus Arrays on page 193. Figure 113. System Log Procedure for Configuring Syslog 1. Enable Syslog Server: Choose Yes to enable Syslog functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. 2. Console Logging: If you enabled Syslog, select whether or not to echo Syslog messages to the console as they occur. If you enable console logging, be sure to set the Console Logging level (see Step 8 below). 190 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 3. Local File Size (1-2000 lines): Enter a value in this field to define how many Syslog records are retained locally on the Arrays internal Syslog file. The default is 2000. 4. Primary Server Address (Hostname or IP) and Port: If you enabled Syslog, enter the hostname or IP address of the primary Syslog server. You may also change the port used on the server if you do not wish to use 514, the default port. 5. Secondary/Tertiary Server Address (Hostname or IP) and Port:

(Optional) If you enabled Syslog, you may enter the hostname or IP address of one or two additional Syslog servers to which messages will also be sent. You may also change the port used on each server if you do not wish to use 514, the default port. You may set one of the server addresses to the address of a server for Splunk (see About Using the Splunk Application for Xirrus Arrays on page 193). 6. Email Notification: (Optional) The following parameters allow you to send an email to a designated address each time a Syslog message is generated. The email will include the text of the Syslog message. a. Email Syslog SMTP Server Address (Hostname or IP) and Port: The hostname or the IP address of the SMTP server to be used for sending the email. Note that this specifies the mail server, not the email recipient. You may also change the port used on the server if you do not wish to use 25, the default SMTP port. b. Email Syslog SMTP User Name: Specify a user name for logging in to an account on the mail server designated in Step a. c. Email Syslog SMTP User Password: Specify a password for logging in to an account on the mail server designated in Step a. d. Email Syslog SMTP From: Specify the From email address to be displayed in the email. e. Email Syslog SMTP Recipient Addresses: Specify the entire email address of the recipient of the email notification. You may specify Configuring the Wireless Array 191 Wireless Array additional recipients by separating the email addresses with semicolons (;). 7. Station Formatting: If you are sending event information to a Splunk server, select Key/Value to send data in Splunks expected format, otherwise leave this at the default value of Standard. See About Using the Splunk Application for Xirrus Arrays on page 193. 8. Syslog Levels: For each of the Syslog destinations, choose your preferred level of Syslog reporting from the pull-down list. Messages with criticality at the selected level and above will be shown. The default level varies depending on the destination. a. Console Logging: For messages to be echoed to the console, the default level is Critical and more serious. This prevents large numbers of non-critical messages from being displayed on the console. If you set this level too low, the volume of messages may make it very difficult to work with the CLI or view other output on the console. b. Local File: For records to be stored on the Arrays internal Syslog file, choose your preferred level of Syslog reporting from the pull-down list. The default level is Debugging and more serious. c. Primary Server: Choose the preferred level of Syslog reporting for the primary server. The default level is Debugging and more serious. d. Secondary/Tertiary Server: Choose the preferred level of reporting for the secondary/tertiary server. The default level is Information and more serious. (Optional) e. Email SMTP Server: Choose the preferred level of Syslog reporting for the email notifications. The default level is Warning and more serious. This prevents your mailbox from being filled up with a large number of less severe messages such as informational messages. 9. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. 192 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array About Using the Splunk Application for Xirrus Arrays Splunk may be used to provide visibility into client experience and analyze usage on XR Series Wireless Arrays. A Splunk application (Splunk for Xirrus XR Wireless Arrays) has been developed to present this operational intelligence at a glance. The app includes field extractions, event types, searches and dashboards to help shine a light on station status and activity. To use Splunk, set up your Splunk server with the Splunk applicationavailable from the Splunk web site at Splunk for Xirrus XR Wireless Arrays. Configure the Array to send data to Splunk by setting a Primary, Secondary, or Tertiary Server Address to the IP address or hostname of your Splunk server. Then set Station Formatting to Key/Value to send data in Splunks expected format. You may specify Server Addresses for Syslog servers and a Splunk server on the same Array. See Also System Log Window Services SNMP Time Settings (NTP) Configuring the Wireless Array 193 Wireless Array SNMP This window allows you to enable or disable SNMP v2 and SNMP v3 and define the SNMP parameters. SNMP allows remote management of the Array by the Xirrus Management System (XMS) and other SNMP management tools. SNMP v3 was designed to offer much stronger security. You may enable either SNMP version, neither, or both. Complete SNMP details for the Array, including trap descriptions, are found in the Xirrus MIB, available at support.xirrus.com, in the Downloads section (login is required to download the MIB). NOTE: If you are managing your Arrays with XMS (the Xirrus Management System), it is very important to make sure that your SNMP settings match those that you have configured for XMS. XMS uses both SNMP v2 and v3, with v3 given preference. Figure 114. SNMP 194 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Configuring SNMP SNMPv2 Settings 1. Enable SNMPv2: Choose Yes to enable SNMP v2 functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. When used in conjunction with the Xirrus Management System, SNMP v2 (not SNMP v3) must be enabled on each Array to be managed with XMS. The default for this feature is Yes

(enabled). 2. SNMP Read-Write Community String: Enter the read-write community string. The default is xirrus. 3. SNMP Read-Only Community String: Enter the read-only community string. The default is xirrus_read_only. SNMPv3 Settings 4. Enable SNMPv3: Choose Yes to enable SNMP v3 functionality, or choose No to disable this feature. The default for this feature is Yes (enabled). 5. Authentication: Select the desired method for authenticating SNMPv3 packets: SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) or MD5 (Message Digest Algorithm 5). 6. Privacy: Select the desired method for encrypting data: DES (Data Encryption Standard) or the stronger AES (Advanced Encryption Standard). 7. Context Engine ID: The unique identifier for this SNMP server. We recommend that you do not change this value. The Context Engine ID must be set if data collection is to be done via a proxy agent. This ID helps the proxy agent to identify the target agent from which data is to be collected. 8. SNMP Read-Write Username: Enter the read-write user name. This username and password allow configuration changes to be made on the Array. The default is xirrus-rw. 9. SNMP Read-Write Authentication Password: Enter the read-write password for authentication (i.e., logging in). The default is xirrus-rw. Configuring the Wireless Array 195 Wireless Array 10. SNMP Read-Write Privacy Password: Enter the read-write password for privacy (i.e., a key for encryption). The default is xirrus-rw. 11. SNMP Read-Only Username: Enter the read-only user name. This username and password do not allow configuration changes to be made on the Array. The default is xirrus-ro. 12. SNMP Read-Only Authentication Password: Enter the read-only password for authentication (i.e., logging in). The default is xirrus-ro. 13. SNMP Read-Only Privacy Password: Enter the read-only password for privacy (i.e., a key for encryption). The default is xirrus-ro. SNMP Trap Settings 14. SNMP Trap Host IP Address: Enter the IP Address or hostname, as well as the Port number, of an SNMP management station that is to receive SNMP traps. You may specify up to four hosts that are to receive traps. Note that by default, Trap Host 1 sends traps to Xirrus-XMS. Thus, the Array will automatically communicate its presence to XMS (as long as the network is configured correctly to allow this host name to be resolved note that DNS is not normally case-sensitive). For a definition of the traps sent by Xirrus Wireless Arrays, you may download the Xirrus MIB from support.xirrus.com (login required). Search for the string TRAP in the MIB file. 15. Send Auth Failure Traps: Choose Yes to log authentication failure traps or No to disable this feature. 16. Keepalive Trap Interval (minutes): Traps are sent out at this interval to indicate the presence of the Array on the network. Keepalive traps are required for proper operation with XMS. To disable keepalive traps, set the value to 0. 17. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Services 196 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array System Log Time Settings (NTP) DHCP Server This window allows you to create, enable, modify and delete DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) address pools. DHCP allows the Array to provide wireless clients with IP addresses and other networking information. The DHCP server will not provide DHCP services to the wired side of the network. If you do not use the DHCP server on the Array, then your wired network must be configured to supply DHCP addresses and gateway and DNS server addresses to wireless clients. When you create a DHCP pool, you must define the DHCP lease time (default and maximum), the IP address ranges (pools) that the DHCP server can assign, and the gateway address and DNS servers to be used by clients. Figure 115. DHCP Management DHCP usage is determined in several windows see SSID Management, Group Management, and VLAN Management. Procedure for Configuring the DHCP Server 1. New Internal DHCP Pool: Enter a name for the new DHCP pool, then click on the Create button. The new pool ID is added to the list of available DHCP pools. 2. On: Click this checkbox to make this pool of addresses available, or clear it to disable the pool. Configuring the Wireless Array 197 Wireless Array 3. Lease Time Default: This field defines the default DHCP lease time (in seconds). The factory default is 300 seconds, but you can change the default at any time. 4. Lease Time Max: Enter a value (in seconds) to define the maximum allowable DHCP lease time. The default is 300 seconds. 5. Network Address Translation (NAT): Check this box to enable the Network Address Translation feature. 6. Lease IP Range Start: Enter an IP address to define the start of the IP range that will be used by the DHCP server. The default is 192.168.1.100. 7. Lease IP Range End: Enter an IP address to define the end of the IP range that will be used by the DHCP server. The DHCP server will only use IP addresses that fall between the start and end range that you define on this page. The default is 192.168.1.200. 8. Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask for this IP range for the DHCP server. The default is 255.255.255.0. 9. Gateway: If necessary, enter the IP address of the gateway. 10. Domain: Enter the DNS domain name. See DNS Settings on page 181. 11. DNS Servers (1 to 3): Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server, secondary DNS server and tertiary DNS server. These DNS server addresses will be passed to stations when they associate, along with the assigned IP address. Note that if you leave these blank, no DNS information is sent to the stations. DHCP will not default to sending the DNS servers that are configured in DNS Settings. See also, DNS Settings on page 181. 12. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also DHCP Leases DNS Settings Network Map 198 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array VLANs This is a status-only window that allows you to review the current status of configured VLANs. VLANS are virtual LANs used to create broadcast domains. You should create VLAN entries on the Array for all of the VLANs in your wired network if you wish to make traffic from those VLANs available on the wireless network. Each tagged VLAN should be associated with a wireless SSID (see VLAN Management on page 201). The Array will discard any VLAN-tagged packets arriving on its wired ports, unless the same VLAN has been defined on the Array. See Undefined VLANs on page 113. In addition to listing all VLANs, this window shows your settings for the Default Route VLAN and the Native (Untagged) VLAN (Step 1 page 202). Figure 116. VLANs For a discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the Array, see the Xirrus Voice over Wireless Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. Understanding Virtual Tunnels Xirrus Arrays support Layer 2 tunneling. This allows an Array to use tunnels to transport traffic for one or more SSID-VLAN pairs onto a single destination network through the Layer 3 core network. Tunnels may be implemented with:

The Xirrus Tunnel Server (XTS)see the Xirrus Tunnel Server Users Guide. Virtual Tunnel Server (VTS)see below. Configuring the Wireless Array 199 Wireless Array Virtual Tunnel Server (VTS) Tunneling capability is provided by a Virtual Tunnel Server. You supply the server and deploy it in your network using open-source VTun software, available from vtun.sourceforge.net. To enable the Array to use tunneling for a VLAN, simply enter the IP address, port and secret for the tunnel server as described in Step 11 on page 203. VTun may be configured for a number of different tunnel types, protocols, and encryption types. For use with Arrays, we recommend the following configuration choices:

Tunnel Type: Ether (Ethernet tunnel) Protocol: UDP Encryption Type: select one of the encryption types supported by VTun

(AES and Blowfish options are available) Keepalive: yes VTS Client-Server Interaction The Array is a client of the Virtual Tunnel Server. When you specify a VTS for an active VLAN-SSID pair, the Array contacts the VTS. The server then creates a tunnel session to the Array. VTun encapsulated packets will cross the Layer 3 network from the Array to the VTS. When packets arrive at the VTS, they will be de-encapsulated and the resultant packets will be passed to your switch with 802.1q VLAN tags for final Layer 2 processing. The process occurs in reverse for packets traveling in the other direction. We recommend that you enable the VTun keep-alive option. This will send a keep-alive packet once per second to ensure that the tunnel remains active. Tunnels can be configured to come up on demand but this is a poor choice for wireless, since tunnel setup can take roughly 5-20 seconds and present a problem for authentication. 200 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array VLAN Management This window allows you to assign and configure VLANs. After creating a new VLAN (added to the list of VLANs), you can modify the configuration parameters of an existing VLAN or delete a selected VLAN. You may create up to 32 VLANs. Figure 117. VLAN Management The Wireless Array supports dynamic VLAN assignments specified by RADIUS policy settings. When RADIUS sends these assignments, the Array dynamically assigns wireless stations to VLANs as requested. VLAN tags on traffic are passed through the Array (i.e., VLAN tags are not stripped). Once a station has been dynamically moved to a new VLAN, it will be shown in the Stations window as a member of the new VLAN. (Figure 70 on page 126) It is critical to configure all VLANs to be used on the Array, even those that will be dynamically assigned. Configuring the Wireless Array 201 Procedure for Managing VLANs Wireless Array 1. Default Route: This option sets a default route from the Array. The Array supports a default route on native and tagged interfaces. Once the default route is configured the Array will attempt to use Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to find the default router. ARP finds the MAC address of a device with a given IP address by sending out a broadcast message requesting this information. This option allows you to choose a default VLAN route from the pull-down list. The IP Gateway must be established for this function to work. After changing the Default Route, you must click Save changes to flash and then reboot. 2. Native VLAN: This option sets whether the Array management is tagged or untagged. If you select a Native VLAN, then that VLAN will use an untagged (Native) link. Otherwise, the Array will use 802.1Q tagging and a specific VLAN ID with management enabled for management of the Array. 3. New VLAN Name/Number: Enter a name and number for the new VLAN in this field, then click on the Create button. The new VLAN is added to the list. 4. VLAN Number: Enter a number for this VLAN (1-4094). 5. Management: Check this box to allow management over this VLAN. 6. Xirrus Roaming: Check this box to allow roaming over this VLAN. 7. DHCP: Check this box if you want the DHCP server to assign the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to the VLAN automatically, otherwise you must go to the next step and assign these parameters manually. 8. IP Address: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter a valid IP address for this VLAN association. 9. Subnet Mask: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter the subnet mask IP address for this VLAN association. 202 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 10. Gateway: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter the IP gateway address for this VLAN association. 11. Tunnel Server: If this VLAN is to be tunneled, enter the IP address or host name of the tunnel server that will perform the tunneling. For more information on virtual tunnels, please see Understanding Virtual Tunnels on page 199. 12. Port: If this VLAN is to be tunneled, enter the port number of the tunnel server. 13. New Secret: Enter the password expected by the tunnel server. 14. Delete: To delete the selected VLAN, simply click the Delete button to remove the VLAN from the list. 15. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also VLAN Statistics VLANs Tunnels Configuring the Wireless Array 203 Tunnels This read-only window allows you to review the tunnels that have been defined on the Array. It lists all tunnels and their settings, including the type of authentication and the local and remote endpoints for each tunnel. Wireless Array Figure 118. Tunnel Summary About Xirrus Tunnels Xirrus Arrays offer GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunneling with VLAN support. This allows an Array to use tunnels to bridge Layer 2 traffic for one or more SSID-VLAN pairs onto a single destination network through the Layer 3 network. GRE tunneling is quite flexible, and can encapsulate many network layer protocols. As a result, it can support a variety of applications. For example, a Wi-Fi hotspot can allow guest logins and use the tunnel to give guests direct access to the Internet, without allowing access to the local network. In a small office, you may define a tunnel to connect users to the corporate office network. Tunnels may also used when providing cellular offload capability. Tunnels may be implemented with:

The Xirrus Tunnel Server (XTS)see the Xirrus Tunnel Server Users Guide. VTS see Virtual Tunnel Server (VTS) on page 200. To create a tunnel, you specify the Local Endpoint, which should be one of the Arrays wired ports, and the Primary Remote Endpoint. A Secondary Remote Endpoint may also be specified in case of a failure at the first endpoint. Traffic for a VLAN-SSID pair is sent in GRE encapsulated packets across the Layer 3 network from the Array to the remote endpoint. When packets arrive, the 204 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array encapsulation is stripped and the resultant packets are passed to your switch with 802.1q VLAN tags for final Layer 2 processing. The process occurs in reverse for packets traveling in the other direction. One tunnel is able to transport up to 16 VLANs. Tunnel Management This window allows you to create tunnels. Figure 119. Tunnel Management Procedure for Managing Tunnels 1. New Tunnel Name: Enter a name for the new tunnel in this field, then click on the Create button. The new tunnel is added to the list. 2. Enabled: The new tunnel is created in the disabled state. Click this checkbox to enable it. 3. Type: Enter the type of tunnel, none or gre. 4. Local Endpoint: Enter the IP address of the Array Gigabit or 10 Gigabit port where the tunnel is to begin. 5. Primary Remote Endpoint: Enter the IP address of the remote endpoint of the tunnel. 6. Secondary Remote Endpoint: This provides a failover capability. If the primary tunnel fails, traffic is switched over to the secondary tunnel. Enter the IP address of the remote endpoint of the secondary tunnel. 7. DHCP Option: Check this box if you want the DHCP server to assign the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address when a station makes a DHCP request. Configuring the Wireless Array 205 Wireless Array 8. MTU: Set maximum transmission unit (MTU) size. 9. Interval: The tunnel mechanism will ping the current remote endpoint periodically to ensure that it is still reachable. Enter the ping interval (in seconds). 10. Failures: Enter the number of consecutive ping failures that will cause the Array to consider the tunnel to be down. 11. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. 12. Proceed to SSID Assignments to define the SSIDs (and associated VLANs) for which each tunnel will bridge data. You may create up to 16 tunnels. Each will need an SSID/VLAN pair assigned to it so that it can function properly. SSID Assignments This window allows you to select the SSIDs to be bridged by each tunnel. Figure 120. Tunnel SSID Assignments Procedure for Assigning SSIDs This window lists the tunnels and SSIDs that you have defined. SSIDs to be tunnelled should be associated with a VLAN (see SSID Management on page 249). 206 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 1. For each tunnel, select the SSIDs that are to be bridged to the remote endpoint. Clear the checkbox for any SSID that you no longer wish to include in the tunnel. 2. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Tunnels VLANs SSIDs Configuring the Wireless Array 207 Wireless Array Security This status- only window allows you to review the Arrays security parameters. It includes the assigned network administration accounts, Access Control List

(ACL) values, management settings, encryption and authentication protocol settings, and RADIUS configuration settings. There are no configuration options available in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with security, you may want to print this window for your records. Figure 121. Security For additional information about wireless network security, refer to:

Security Planning on page 46 Understanding Security on page 209 The Security section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 452 For information about secure use of the WMI, refer to:

Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI on page 212 Using the Arrays Default Certificate on page 212 Using an External Certificate Authority on page 213 About Creating Admin Accounts on the RADIUS Server on page 218 About Creating User Accounts on the RADIUS Server on page 234 208 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Security settings are configured with the following windows:

Admin Management on page 214 Admin Privileges on page 216 Admin RADIUS on page 218 Management Control on page 221 Access Control List on page 227 Global Settings on page 230 External Radius on page 234 Internal Radius on page 238 Rogue Control List on page 240 Understanding Security The Xirrus Wireless Array incorporates many configurable security features. After initially installing an Array, always change the default administrator password (the default is admin), and choose a strong replacement password

(containing letters, numbers and special characters). When appropriate, issue read-only administrator accounts. Other security considerations include:

SSH versus Telnet: Be aware that Telnet is not secure over network connections and should be used only with a direct serial port connection. When connecting to the units Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell version 2 (SSH-2) utility. SSH-2 provides stronger security than SSH-1. The most commonly used freeware providing SSH tools is PuTTY. Configuration auditing: The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers powerful management features for small or large Xirrus wireless deployments, and can audit your configuration settings automatically. In addition, using the XMS eliminates the need for an FTP server. Choosing an encryption method: Wireless data encryption prevents eavesdropping on data being transmitted or received over the airwaves. Configuring the Wireless Array 209 The Array allows you to establish the following data encryption configuration options:

Wireless Array

Open this option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) this option provides minimal protection (though much better than using an open network). An early standard for wireless data encryption and supported by all Wi-Fi certified equipment, WEP is vulnerable to hacking and is therefore not recommended for use by Enterprise networks.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2 these are much stronger encryption modes than WEP, using TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) or AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) to encrypt data. WPA solves security issues with WEP. It also allows you to establish encryption keys on a per-user-basis, with key rotation for added security. In addition, TKIP provides Message Integrity Check (MIC) functionality and prevents active attacks on the wireless network. AES is the strongest encryption standard and is used by government agencies; however, old legacy hardware may not be capable of supporting the AES mode (it probably wont work on older wireless clients). Because AES is the strongest encryption standard currently available, WPA2 with AES is highly recommended for Enterprise networks. Any of the above encryption methods can be used and an Array can support multiple encryption methods simultaneously, but only one method may be selected per SSID (except that selecting WPA-Both allows WPA and WPA2 to be used at the same time on the same SSID). Otherwise, if multiple security methods are needed, you must define multiple SSIDs. 210 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array The encryption mode (WEP, WPA, etc.) is selected in the SSIDs >SSID Management window

(see SSID Management on page 249). The encryption standard used with WPA or WPA2 (AES or TKIP) is selected in the Security>Global Settings window under WPA Settings

(see Global Settings on page 230). Choosing an authentication method: User authentication ensures that users are who they say they are. For this purpose, the Array allows you to choose between the following user authentication methods:

Pre-Shared Key users must manually enter a key (passphrase) on the client side of the wireless network that matches the key stored by the administrator in the Array. This method should be used only for smaller networks when a RADIUS server is unavailable. If PSK must be used, choose a strong passphrase containing between 8 and 63 characters (20 is preferred). Always use a combination of letters, numbers and special characters. Never use English words separated by spaces.

RADIUS 802.1x with EAP 802.1x uses a RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different EAP

(Extensible Authentication Protocol) authentication methods, including EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and LEAP-

Passthrough. The RADIUS server can be internal (provided by the Wireless Array) or external. An external RADIUS server offers more functionality and security, and is recommended for large deployments. When using this method, user names and passwords must be entered into the RADIUS server for user authentication.

MAC Address ACLs (Access Control Lists) MAC address ACLs provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network. Access Control Lists work well when there are a limited number of users in this case, enter the MAC address of each user in the Allow list. In the event of a lost or stolen MAC adapter, enter the affected MAC Configuring the Wireless Array 211 address in the Deny list. The Wireless Array will accept up to 1,000 ACL entries. Wireless Array Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI When you point your browser to the Array to connect to the WMI, the Array presents an X.509 security certificate to the browser to establish a secure channel. One significant piece of information in the certificate is the Arrays host name. This ties the certificate to a particular Array and ensures the client that it is connecting to that host. Certificate Authorities (CAs) are entities that digitally sign certificates, using their own certificates (for example, VeriSign is a well-known CA). When the Array presents its certificate to the clients browser, the browser looks up the CA that signed the certificate to decide whether to trust it. Browsers ship with a small set of trusted CAs already installed. If the browser trusts the certificates CA, it checks to ensure the host name (and IP address) match those on the certificate. If any of these checks fail, you get a security warning when connecting to the WMI. The Array ships with a default certificate that is signed by the Xirrus CA. You may choose to use this certificate, or to use a certificate issued by the CA of your choice, as described in the following sections:

Using the Arrays Default Certificate Using an External Certificate Authority Using the Arrays Default Certificate Figure 122. Import Xirrus Certificate Authority 212 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array The Arrays certificate is signed by a Xirrus CA that is customized for your Array and its current host name. By default, browsers will not trust the Arrays certificate. You may import the Xirrus certificate to instruct the browser to trust the Xirrus CA on all future connections to Arrays. The certificate for the Xirrus CA is available on the Array, so that you can import it into your browsers cache of trusted CAs (right alongside VeriSign, for example). On the Management Control window of the WMI you will see the xirrus-ca.crt file. (Figure 122) By clicking and opening this file, you can follow your browsers instructions and import the Xirrus CA into your CA cache (see page 225 for more information). This instructs your browser to trust any of the certificates signed by the Xirrus CA, so that when you connect to any of our Arrays you should no longer see the warning about an untrusted site. Note however, that this only works if you use the host name when connecting to the Array. If you use the IP address to connect, you get a lesser warning saying that the certificate was only meant for hostname. Since an Arrays certificate is based on the Arrays host name, any time you change the host name the Arrays CA will regenerate and sign a new certificate. This happens automatically the next time you reboot after changing the host name. If you have already installed the Xirrus CA on a browser, this new Array certificate should automatically be trusted. When you install the Xirrus CA in your browser, it will trust a certificate signed by any Xirrus Array, as long as you connect using the Arrays host name. Using an External Certificate Authority If you prefer, you may install a certificate on your Array signed by an outside CA. Why use a certificate from an external CA? The Arrays certificate is used for security when stations attempt to associate to an SSID that has Web Page Redirect enabled. In this case, it is preferable for the Array to present a certificate from an external CA that is likely to be trusted by most browsers. When a WPR login page is presented, the user will not see a security error if the Arrays certificate was obtained from an external CA that is already trusted by the users browser. WMI provides options for creating a Certificate Signing Request that you can send to an external CA, and for uploading the signed certificate to the Array after Configuring the Wireless Array 213 Wireless Array you obtain it from the CA. This certificate will be tied to the Arrays host name and private key. See External Certification Authority on page 226 for more details. Admin Management This window allows you to manage network administrator accounts (create, modify and delete). It also allows you to limit account access to a read only status. When finished, click on the Save changes to flash button if you wish to make your changes permanent. Figure 123. Admin Management Procedure for Creating or Modifying Network Administrator Accounts 1. Admin ID: Enter the login name for a new network administrator ID. The length of the ID must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive. 2. Read/Write: Choose 1:read-write if you want to give this administrator ID full read/write privileges, or choose 0:read-only to restrict this user to read only status. In the read only mode, administrators cannot save changes to configurations. Or you may select one of your custom-defined privilege levels (see Admin Privileges on page 216). 3. New Password: Enter a password for this ID. The length of the password must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive. 4. Verify: Re-enter the password in this field to verify that you typed the password correctly. If you do not re-enter the correct password, an error message is displayed). 214 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 5. Click on the Create button to add this administrator ID to the list. 6. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Admin Privileges External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Management Control Configuring the Wireless Array 215 Wireless Array Admin Privileges This window provides a detailed level of control over the privileges of Array administrators. Administrators may be assigned one of eight Privilege Levels. You may define the privilege level of each major feature (Configuration Section) that may be configured on the Array. For example, say that you set the privilege level to 4 for Reboot Array, Security, Radius Server, and SNMP, and you leave all other configuration sections at the default privilege level of 1. In this case, any administrator with a privilege level of 4 or higher may perform any operation on the Array, while an administrator with a privilege level lower than 4 but at least 1 may perform any operation except those whose level was set to 4. An error message will be displayed if an operation is attempted without a sufficient privilege level. Figure 124. Admin Privileges Privilege level 0 is read-only. As a minimum, all administrators have permission for read access to all areas of Array configuration. Higher privilege levels may be used to define additional privileges for specific configuration sections. 216 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array If you are using an Admin RADIUS server to define administrator accounts, please see RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus on page 463 to set the privilege level for each administrator. Procedure for Configuring Admin Privileges 1. Privilege Level Names (optional): You may assign a Name to each Privilege Level. The name may be used to describe the access granted by this level. By default, levels 0 and 1 are named read-only and read-write, respectively, and levels 2 through 7 have the same name as their level number. 2. Privilege Levels: Use this section to assign a Minimum Privilege Level to selected Configuration Sections as desired. By default, all sections are assigned level 1. When you select a higher privilege level for a configuration section, then only administrators who have at least that privilege level will be able to make configuration changes to that section. 3. You may click ^ at the bottom of any row to toggle the values in the entire column to either on or off. 4. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also External Radius Groups Admin Management Admin RADIUS Security Configuring the Wireless Array 217 Wireless Array Admin RADIUS This window allows you to set up authentication of network administrators via RADIUS. Using RADIUS to control administrator accounts for logging in to Arrays has these benefits:

Centralized control of administrator accounts. Less effort you don't have to set up user names and passwords on each Array; just enter them once on the RADIUS server and then all of the Arrays can pull from the RADIUS server. Enforced policies you may set password rules (e.g., passwords must contain at least one number and be at least 12 characters in length), and you may set expiration times for passwords. Admin RADIUS settings override any local administrator accounts configured on the Admin Management window. If you have Admin RADIUS enabled, all administrator authentication is done via the configured RADIUS servers. The only exception to this is when you are connected via the Console port (using CLI). If you are using the Console port, the Array will authenticate administrators using accounts configured on the Admin Management window first, and then use the RADIUS servers. This provides a safety net to be ensure that you are not completely locked out of an Array if the RADIUS server is down. About Creating Admin Accounts on the RADIUS Server Permissions for RADIUS administrator accounts are controlled by the RADIUS Xirrus-Admin-Role attribute. This is a Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA). To define the privileges permitted to an administrator account, set the value of its Xirrus-

Admin-Role attribute to the desired Privilege Level Name string, as defined in Admin Privileges on page 216. For more information about the RADIUS VSAs used by Xirrus, see RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus on page 463. When configuring administrator accounts on the RADIUS server, you must observe the same restrictions for length and legal characters as when creating these accounts on the Array using the Admin Management window: the user name and password must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive. 218 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Figure 125. Admin RADIUS Procedure for Configuring Admin RADIUS Use this window to enable/disable administrator authentication via RADIUS, and to set up primary and secondary servers to use for authentication of administrators attempting to log in to the Array. 1. Admin RADIUS Settings:

a. Enable Admin RADIUS: Click Yes to enable the use of RADIUS to authenticate administrators logging in to the Array. You will need to specify the RADIUS server(s) to be used. b. Authentication Type: Select the protocol used for authentication of administrators, CHAP or PAP (the default).

PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), is a simple protocol. PAP transmits ASCII passwords over the network in the clear

(unencrypted) and is therefore considered insecure.

CHAP (Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol) is a more secure protocol. The login request is sent using a one-way hash function. Configuring the Wireless Array 219 Wireless Array c. Timeout (seconds): Define the maximum idle time (in seconds) before the RADIUS servers session times out. The default is 600 seconds. 2. Admin RADIUS Primary Server: This is the RADIUS server that you intend to use as your primary server. a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. The shared secret that you define must match the secret used by the RADIUS server. 3. Admin RADIUS Secondary Server (optional): If desired, enter an alternative external RADIUS server. If the primary RADIUS server becomes unreachable, the Array will failover to the secondary RADIUS server (defined here). a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. 220 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Management Control This window allows you to enable or disable the Array management interfaces and set their inactivity time-outs. The supported range is 300 (default) to 100,000 seconds. Figure 126. Management Control Procedure for Configuring Management Control 1. Management Settings:

a. Maximum login attempts allowed (1-255): After this number of consecutive failing administrator login attempts via ssh or telnet, the Failed login retry period is enforced. The default is 3. Configuring the Wireless Array 221 Wireless Array b. Failed login retry period (0-65535 seconds): After the maximum number (defined above) of consecutive failing administrator login attempts via ssh or telnet, the administrators IP address is denied access to the array for the specified period of time (in seconds). The default is 0. c. Pre-login Banner: Text that you enter here will be displayed above the WMI login prompt. (Figure 127) Figure 127. Pre-login Banner d. Post-login Banner: Text that you enter here will be displayed in a message box after a user logs in to the WMI. 2. SSH a. On/Off: Choose On to enable management of the Array over a Secure Shell (SSH-2) connection, or Off to disable this feature. Be aware that only SSH-2 connections are supported by the Array. SSH clients used for connecting to the Array must be configured to use SSH-2. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your SSH connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. c. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by SSH. The default port is 22. 222 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 3. Telnet:

a. On/Off: Choose On to enable Array management over a Telnet connection, or Off to disable this feature. SSH offers a more secure connection than Telnet, and is recommended over Telnet. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your Telnet connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. c. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by Telnet. The default port is 23. 4. Xircon The Xircon utility is not used with XN Arrays. For those Arrays, this setting should always be turned Off. The Xircon utility connects to Xirrus Arrays that are not reachable via the normal access methods (such as SSH or WMI) and that do not have a physical console port (XR-1000 models), or whose console port is not accessible. Please see Securing Low Level Access to the Array on page 78 for more information about Xircon. You can enable or disable Xircon access to the Array as instructed below.

! Warning: If you disable Xircon access completely on XR-1000 models, you must ensure that you do not lose track of the username and password to log in to CLI/WMI! There is no way to recover from a lost password, other than returning the Array to Xirrus. a. On/Off: Choose On to enable Xircon access to the Array at the ArrayOS (CLI) and Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL) levels, or Off to disable access at both levels. On XR-1000 Array models only, Xircon access is On by default. On all other Array models, Xircon access is Off by default. b. ArrayOS only: Choose this radio button to enable Xircon access at the ArrayOS level only (i.e., Xircon can access CLI only). Access to the Array at the Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL) level is disabled. Configuring the Wireless Array 223 Wireless Array c. Boot only: Choose this radio button to enable Xircon access at the Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL) level only. ArrayOS level (CLI) access to the Array is disabled. d. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your Xircon connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. e. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by Xircon. The default port is 22612. 5. Serial a. On/Off: Choose On to enable management of the Array via a serial connection, or choose Off to disable this feature. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your serial connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. 6. HTTPS a. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your HTTPS connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. Management via HTTPS (i.e., the Web Management Interface) cannot be disabled on this window. To disable management over HTTPS, you must use the Command Line Interface. b. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by SSH. The default port is 443. 224 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 7. Management Modes a. Network Assurance: Click the On button to enable this mode. Network assurance checks network connectivity to each server that you configure, such as the NTP server, RADIUS servers, SNMP trap hosts, etc. By proactively identifying network resources that are unavailable, the network manager can be alerted of problems potentially before end-users notice an issue. The distributed intelligence of Arrays provides this monitoring at multiple points across the network, adding to the ability to isolate the problem and expedite the resolution Connectivity is checked when you configure a server. If a newly configured server is unreachable, you will be notified directly and a Syslog entry is created. Configured servers are checked once per Period which by default is 300 seconds (five minutes). Servers are checked regardless of whether they are configured as IP addresses or host names. If a server becomes unreachable, a Syslog message is generated. When the server again becomes reachable, another Syslog message is generated. To view the status of all configured servers checked by this feature, please see Network Assurance on page 112. 8. HTTPS (X.509) Certificate a. Import Xirrus Authority into Browser: This feature imports the Xirrus Certificate Authority (CA) into your browser (for a discussion, please see Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI on page 212). Click the link (xirrus-ca.crt), and then click Open to view or install the current Xirrus CA certificate. Click Install Certificate to start your browsers Certificate Install Wizard. We recommend that you use this process to install Xirrus as a root authority in your browser. When you assign a Host Name to your Array using the Express Setup window, then the next time you reboot the Array it Configuring the Wireless Array 225 Wireless Array automatically creates a security certificate for that host name. That certificate uses Xirrus as the signing authority. Thus, in order to avoid having certificate errors on your browser when using WMI:

You must have assigned a host name to the Array and rebooted at some time after that.

Use Import Xirrus Authority into Browser

Access WMI by using the host name of the Array rather than its IP address. b. HTTPS (X.509) Certificate Signed By: This read-only field shows the signing authority for the current certificate. 9. External Certification Authority This Step and Step 10 allow you to obtain a certificate from an external authority and install it on an Array. Using an External Certificate Authority on page 213 discusses reasons for using an external CA. For example, to obtain and install a certificate from VeriSign on the Array, follow these steps:

If you dont already have the certificate from the external (non-

Xirrus) Certificate Authority, see Step 10 to create a request for a certificate.

Use Step 9a to review the request and copy its text to send to VeriSign.

When you receive the new certificate from VeriSign, upload it to the Array using Step 9b. External Certification Authority has the following fields:

a. Download Certificate Signing Request: After creating a certificate signing request (.csr file Step 10), click the View button to review it. If it is satisfactory, click the name of the .csr file to display the text of the request. You can then copy this text and use it as required by the CA. You may also click on the filename of the .csr file to download it to your local computer. 226 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array b. Upload Signed Certificate: To use a custom certificate signed by an authority other than Xirrus, use the Browse button to locate the certificate file, then click Upload to copy it to the Array. The Arrays web server will be restarted and will pick up the new certificate. This will terminate any current web sessions, and you will need to reconnect and re-login to the Array. 10. To create a Certificate Signing Request a. Fill in the fields in this section: Common Name, Organization Name, Organizational Unit Name, Locality (City), State or Province, Country Name, and Email Address. Spaces may be used in any of the fields, except for Common Name, Country Name, or Email Address. Click the Create button to create the certificate signing request. See Step 9 above to use this request. 11. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Network Interfaces - to enable/disable management over an Ethernet interface Global Settings (IAP) - to enable/disable management over IAPs Admin Management External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Access Control List Security Access Control List This window allows you to enable or disable the use of the global Access Control List (ACL), which controls whether a station with a particular MAC address may associate to the Array. You may create station access control list entries and delete existing entries, and control the type of list. There is only one global ACL, and you may select whether its type is an Allow List or a Deny List, or whether use of the list is disabled. Configuring the Wireless Array 227 There is also a per-SSID ACL (see Per-SSID Access Control List on page 262). If the same MAC address is listed in both the global ACL and in an SSIDs ACL, and if either ACL would deny that station access to that SSID, then access will be denied. Wireless Array Figure 128. Access Control List Procedure for Configuring Access Control Lists 1. Access Control List Type: Select Disabled to disable use of the Access Control List, or select the ACL type either Allow List or Deny List.

Allow List: Only allows the listed MAC addresses to associate to the Array. All others are denied.

Deny List: Denies the listed MAC addresses permission to associate to the Array. All others are allowed. In addition to these lists, other authentication methods (for example, RADIUS) are still enforced for users. 2. MAC Address: If you want to add a MAC address to the ACL, enter the new MAC address here, then click on the Add button. The MAC address is added to the ACL. You may use a wildcard (*) for one or more digits to match a range of addresses. You may create up to 1000 entries. 228 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 3. Delete: You can delete selected MAC addresses from this list by clicking their Delete buttons. 4. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Management Control Security Station Status Windows (list of stations that have been detected by the Array) Configuring the Wireless Array 229 Wireless Array Global Settings This window allows you to establish the security parameters for your wireless network, including WEP, WPA, WPA2 and RADIUS authentication. When finished, click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. For additional information about wireless network security, refer to Security Planning on page 46 and Understanding Security on page 209. Figure 129. Global Settings (Security) 230 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Configuring Network Security 1. RADIUS Server Mode: Choose the RADIUS server mode you want to use, either Internal or External. Parameters for these modes are configured in External Radius on page 234 and Internal Radius on page 238. WPA Settings These settings are used if the WPA or WPA2 encryption type is selected on the SSIDs >SSID Management window or the Express Setup window (on this window, encryption type is set in the SSID Settings: Wireless Security field). 2. TKIP Enabled: Choose Yes to enable TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol), or choose No to disable TKIP. TKIP encryption does not support high throughput rates (see Improved MAC Throughput), per the IEEE 802.11n specification. TKIP should never be used for WDS links on XR or XN Arrays. 3. AES Enabled: Choose Yes to enable AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), or choose No to disable AES. If both AES and TKIP are enabled, the station determines which will be used. 4. WPA Group Rekey Time (seconds): Enter a value to specify the group rekey time (in seconds). The default is Never. 5. WPA Preshared Key / Verify Key: If you enabled PSK, enter a passphrase here, then re-enter the passphrase to verify that you typed it correctly. Configuring the Wireless Array 231 Wireless Array WEP Settings These settings are used if the WEP encryption type is selected on the SSIDs >

SSID Management window or the Express Setup window (on this window, encryption type is set in the SSID Settings: Wireless Security field). Click the Show Cleartext button to make the text that you type in to the Key fields visible. WEP encryption does not support high throughput rates or features like frame aggregation or block acknowledgements (see Improved MAC Throughput), per the IEEE 802.11n specification. WEP should never be used for WDS links on Arrays. 6. Encryption Key 1 / Verify Key 1:

Key Size: Key length is automatically computed based on the Encryption Key that you enter

5 ASCII characters (10 hex) for 40 bits (WEP-64)

13 ASCII characters for (26 hex) 104 bits (WEP-128) Encryption Key 1 / Verify Key 1: Enter an encryption key in ASCII or hexadecimal. The ASCII and translated hexadecimal values will appear to the right if you selected the Show Cleartext button. Re-enter the key to verify that you typed it correctly. You may include special ASCII characters, except for the double quote symbol (). 7. Encryption Key 2 to 4/ Verify Key 2 to 4/ Key Mode/Length (optional): If desired, enter up to four encryption keys, in the same way that you entered the first key. 8. Default Key: Choose which key you want to assign as the default key. Make your selection from the pull-down list. 232 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 9. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. After configuring network security, the configuration must be applied to an SSID for the new functionality to take effect. See Also Admin Management External Radius Internal Radius Access Control List Management Control Security Security Planning SSID Management Configuring the Wireless Array 233 Wireless Array External Radius This window allows you to define the parameters of an external RADIUS server for user authentication. To set up an external RADIUS server, you must choose External as the RADIUS server mode in Global Settings. Refer to Global Settings on page 230. Figure 130. External RADIUS Server If you want to include user group membership in the RADIUS account information for users, see Understanding Groups on page 264. User groups allow you to easily apply a uniform configuration to a user on the Array. About Creating User Accounts on the RADIUS Server A number of attributes of user (wireless client) accounts are controlled by RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs) defined by Xirrus. For example, you would use the VSA named Xirrus-User-VLAN if you wish to set the VLAN for a user account in RADIUS. For more information about the RADIUS VSAs used by Xirrus, see RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus on page 463. 234 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server 1. Primary Server: This is the external RADIUS server that you intend to use as your primary server. a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this external RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this external RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. The shared secret that you define must match the secret used by the external RADIUS server. 2. Secondary Server (optional): If desired, enter an alternative external RADIUS server. If the primary RADIUS server becomes unreachable, the Array will failover to the secondary RADIUS server (defined here). a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server. b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this external RADIUS server. The default is 1812. c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this external RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. 3. Settings: Define the session timeout, the NAS Identifier, and whether accounting will be used. a. Timeout (seconds): Define the maximum idle time (in seconds) before the external RADIUS servers session times out. The default is 600 seconds. b. DAS Port: RADIUS Dynamic Authorization port. Some RADIUS servers have the ability to contact the Array (referred to as an NAS, Configuring the Wireless Array 235 Wireless Array see below) to terminate a user with a Disconnect Message (DM). Or RADIUS may send a Change-of-Authorization (CoA) Message to the Array to change a users privileges due to dynamically changing session authorizations. RADIUS will use the DAS port on the Array for this purpose. The default is port 3799. c. NAS Identifier: From the point of view of a RADIUS server, the Array is a client, also called a network access server (NAS). Enter the NAS Identifier (IP address) that the RADIUS servers expect the Array to use this is normally the IP address of the Arrays Gigabit1 port. d. Accounting: If you would like the Array to send RADIUS Start, Stop, and Interim records to a RADIUS accounting server, click the On button. The account settings appear, and must be configured. 4. Accounting Settings:

Note that RADIUS accounting start packets sent by the Array will include the client station's Framed-IP-Address attribute. a. Accounting Interval (seconds): Specify how often Interim records are to be sent to the server. The default is 300 seconds. b. Primary Server Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of the primary RADIUS accounting server that you intend to use. c. Primary Port Number: Enter the port number of the primary RADIUS accounting server. The default is 1813. d. Primary Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that the primary RADIUS accounting server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. e. Secondary Server Host Name / IP Address (optional): If desired, enter an IP address or domain name for an alternative RADIUS accounting server. If the primary server becomes unreachable, the Array will failover to this secondary server (defined here). 236 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array f. Secondary Port Number: If using a secondary accounting server, enter its port number. The default is 1813. g. Secondary Shared Secret / Verify Secret: If using a secondary accounting server, enter the shared secret that it will be using, then re-

enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly. 5. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Admin Management Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Access Control List Management Control Security Understanding Groups Configuring the Wireless Array 237 Wireless Array Internal Radius This window allows you to define the parameters for the Arrays internal RADIUS server for user authentication. However, the internal RADIUS server will only authenticate wireless clients that want to associate to the Array. This can be useful if an external RADIUS server is not available. To set up the internal RADIUS server, you must choose Internal as the RADIUS server mode in Global Settings. Refer to Global Settings on page 230. Figure 131. Internal RADIUS Server Clients using PEAP may have difficulty authenticating to the Array using the Internal RADIUS server due to invalid security certificate errors. To prevent this problem, the user may disable the Validate Server Certificate option on the station. Do this by displaying the stations wireless devices and then displaying the properties of the desired wireless interface. In the security properties, disable Validate server certificate. In some systems, this may be found by setting the authentication method to PEAP and changing the associated settings. 238 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Creating a New User 1. User Name: Enter the name of the user that you want to authenticate to the internal RADIUS server. 2. SSID Restriction: (Optional) If you want to restrict this user to associating to a particular SSID, choose an SSID from the pull-down list. 3. User Group: (Optional) If you want to make this user a member of a previously defined user group, choose a group from the pull-down list. This will apply all of the user groups settings to the user. See Understanding Groups on page 264. 4. Password: (Optional) Enter a password for the user. 5. Verify: (Optional) Retype the user password to verify that you typed it correctly. 6. Click on the Create button to add the new user to the list. Procedure for Managing Existing Users 1. SSID Restriction: (Optional) If you want to restrict a user to associating to a particular SSID, choose an SSID from its pull-down list. 2. User Group: (Optional) If you want to change the users group, choose a group from the pull-down list. This will apply all of the user groups settings to the user. See Understanding Groups on page 264. 3. Password: (Optional) Enter a new password for the selected user. 4. Verify Password: (Optional) Retype the user password to verify that you typed it correctly. If you want to delete one or more users, click their Delete buttons. 5. 6. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Admin Management External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Configuring the Wireless Array 239 Wireless Array Access Control List Management Control Security Understanding Groups Rogue Control List This window allows you to set up a control list for rogue APs, based on a type that you define. You may classify rogue APs as blocked, so that the Array will take steps to prevent stations from associating with the blocked AP. See About Blocking Rogue APs on page 331. The Array can keep up to 5000 entries in this list. The RF Monitor > Intrusion Detection window provides an alternate method for classifying rogues. You can list all Unknown stations and select all the rogues that youd like to set to Known or Approved, rather than entering the SSID/BSSID as described below. See Intrusion Detection on page 119. Figure 132. Rogue Control List 240 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Establishing Rogue AP Control 1. Rogue BSSID/SSID: Enter the BSSID, SSID, or manufacturer string to match for the new rogue control entry. The Match Only radio buttons specify what to match (e.g., the MAC address, SSID, or manufacturer). You may use the * character as a wildcard to match any string at this position. For example, 00:0f:7d:* matches any string that starts with 00:0f:7d:. Xirrus Arrays start with 00:0f:7d: or 50:60:28:. By default, the Rogue Control List contains two entries that match 00:0f:7d:* and 50:60:28:* and apply the classification Known to all Xirrus Arrays. 2. Rogue Control Classification: Enter the classification for the specified rogue AP(s), either Blocked, Known or Approved. 3. Match Only: Select the match criterion to compare the Rogue BSSID/

SSID string against: BSSID, Manufacturer, or SSID. The BSSID field contains the MAC address. 4. Click Create to add this rogue AP to the Rogue Control List. 5. Rogue Control List: If you want to edit the control type for a rogue AP, just click the radio button for the new type for the entry: Blocked, Known or Approved. 6. To delete rogue APs from the list, click their Delete buttons. 7. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Network Map Intrusion Detection SSIDs SSID Management Configuring the Wireless Array 241 Wireless Array SSIDs This status-only window allows you to review SSID (Service Set IDentifier) assignments. It includes the SSID name, whether or not an SSID is visible on the network, any security and QoS parameters defined for each SSID, associated VLAN IDs, radio availability, and DHCP pools defined per SSID. Click on an SSIDs name to jump to the edit page for the SSID. There are no configuration options available on this page, but if you are experiencing problems or reviewing SSID management parameters, you may want to print this page for your records. For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the Array, see the Xirrus Voice over Wireless Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. Figure 133. SSIDs The read-only Limits section of the SSIDs window allows you to review any limitations associated with your defined SSIDs. For example, this window shows the current state of an SSID (enabled or not), how much SSID and station traffic is allowed, time on and time off, days on and off, and whether each SSID is currently active or inactive. For information to help you understand SSIDs and how multiple SSIDs are managed by the Wireless Array, go to Understanding SSIDs on page 243 and the Multiple SSIDs section of Frequently Asked Questions on page 452. For a description of how QoS operates on the Array, see Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array on page 244. 242 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array SSIDs are managed with the following windows:

SSID Management on page 249 Active IAPs on page 261 Per-SSID Access Control List on page 262 SSIDs are discussed in the following topics:

Understanding SSIDs on page 243 Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array on page 244 Understanding SSIDs The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a unique identifier that wireless networking devices use to establish and maintain wireless connectivity. Multiple access points on a network or sub-network can use the same SSIDs. SSIDs are case-sensitive and can contain up to 32 alphanumeric characters (do not include spaces when defining SSIDs). Multiple SSIDs A BSSID (Basic SSID) refers to an individual access point radio and its associated clients. The identifier is the MAC address of the access point radio that forms the BSS. A group of BSSs can be formed to allow stations in one BSS to communicate to stations in another BSS via a backbone that interconnects each access point. The Extended Service Set (ESS) refers to the group of BSSIDs that are grouped together to form one ESS. The ESSID (often referred to as SSID or wireless network name) identifies the Extended Service Set. Clients must associate to a single ESS at any given time. Clients ignore traffic from other Extended Service Sets that do not have the same SSID. Legacy access points typically support one SSID per access point. Wireless Arrays support the ability to define and use multiple SSIDs simultaneously. Using SSIDs The creation of different wireless network names allows system administrators to separate types of users with different requirements. The following policies can be tied to an SSID:

Configuring the Wireless Array 243 Wireless Array The wireless security mode needed to join this SSID. The wireless Quality of Service (QoS) desired for this SSID. The wired VLAN associated with this SSID. As an example, one SSID named accounting might require the highest level of security, while another named guests might have low security requirements. Another example may define an SSID named voice that supports voice over Wireless LAN phones with the highest Quality of Service (QoS) definition. This SSID might also forward traffic to specific VLANs on the wired network. See Also SSID Management SSIDs Understanding SSIDs Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the Array, see the Xirrus Voice over Wireless Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. Application Data Voice Data Video Data Background Data Best Effort Data Mapping to Traffic Class Four Transmit Queues Per queue channel access IAP (Transmit) Highest Priority Lowest Priority Figure 134. Four Traffic Classes 244 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array The Wireless Arrays Quality of Service Priority feature (QoS) allows traffic to be prioritized according to your requirements. For example, you typically assign the highest priority to voice traffic, since this type of traffic requires delay to be under 10 ms. The Array has four separate queues for handling wireless traffic at different priorities, and thus it supports four traffic classes (QoS levels). Figure 135. Priority LevelIEEE 802.1p (Layer 2) IEEE802.1p uses three bits in an Ethernet frame header to define eight priority levels at the MAC level (Layer 2) for wired networks. Each data packet may be tagged with a priority level, i.e., a user priority tag. Since there are eight possible user priority levels and the Array implements four wireless QoS levels, user priorities are mapped to QoS as described below. Figure 136. Priority LevelDSCP (DiffServ - Layer 3) DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point or DiffServ) uses 6 bits in the IPv4 or IPv6 packet header, defined in RFC2474 and RFC2475. The DSCP value classifies Configuring the Wireless Array 245 a Layer 3 packet to determine the Quality of Service (QoS) required. DSCP replaces the outdated Type of Service (TOS) field. The description below describes how both of these priority levels are mapped to the Arrays four traffic classes. Wireless Array End-to-End QoS Handling Wired QoS - Ethernet Port:

Ingress: Incoming wired packets are assigned QoS priority based on their SSID and 802.1p tag (if any), as shown in the table below. This table follows the mapping recommended by IEEE802.11e. FROM Priority Tag 802.1p (Wired) TO Array QoS

(Wireless) Typical Use 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 (Lowest priority) Best Effort 1 1 0 2 2 3 Background explicitly designated as low-priority and non-delay sensitive Spare Excellent Effort Controlled Load Video Voice - requires delay <10ms 7 (Highest priority) 3 (Highest priority) Network control 246 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Egress: Outgoing wired packets are IEEE 802.1p tagged at the Ethernet port for upstream traffic, thus enabling QoS at the edge of the network. TO Priority Tag 802.1p (Wired) FROM Array QoS (Wireless) 1 (Lowest priority) 0 2 (Default) 3 (Highest priority) 1 0 5 6 Wireless QoS - Radios:

Each SSID can be assigned a separate QoS priority (i.e., traffic class) from 0 to 3, where 3 is highest priority and 2 is the default. See SSID Management on page 249. If multiple SSIDs are used, packets from the SSID with higher priority are transmitted first. The Array supports IEEE802.11e Wireless QoS for downstream traffic. Higher priority packets wait a shorter time before gaining access to the air and contend less with all other 802.11 devices on a channel. How QoS is set for a packet in case of conflicting values:

a. b. If an SSID has a QoS setting, and an incoming wired packets user priority tag is mapped to a higher QoS value, then the higher QoS value is used. If a group or filter has a QoS setting, this overrides the QoS value above. See Groups on page 264, and Filters on page 344. c. Voice packets have the highest priority (see Voice Support, below). d. If DSCP to QoS Mapping Mode is enabled, the IP packet is mapped to QoS level 0 to 3 as specified in the DSCP Mappings table. This value overrides any of the settings in cases a to c above. In particular, by default:

DSCP 8 is set to QoS level 1. Configuring the Wireless Array 247 Wireless Array

DSCP 40 is typically used for video traffic and is set to QoS level 2.

DSCP 48 is typically used for voice traffic and is set to QoS level 3the highest level

All other DSCP values are set to QoS level 0 (the lowest level Best Effort). Packet Filtering QoS classification Filter rules can be used to redefine the QoS priority level to override defaults. See Filter Management on page 347. This allows the QoS priority level to be assigned based on protocol, source, or destination. Voice Support The QoS priority implementation on the Array give voice packets the highest priority to support voice applications. High Density 2.4G EnhancementHoneypot SSID Some situations pose problems for all wireless APs. For example, iPhones will remember every SSID and flood the airwaves with probes, even when the user doesnt request or desire this behavior. In very high density deployments, these probes can consume a significant amount of the available wireless bandwidth. The Array offers a feature targeting this problema honeypot SSID. Simply create an SSID named honeypot on the Array. Once this SSID is created and enabled, it will respond to any station probe looking for an open (unencrypted) SSID that is not configured on the Array. Traffic for a station connected to the honeypot SSID may be handled in a various ways:

it may be directed to WPR to display a splash page or offer the user the opportunity to sign in to your service (see Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 255);

it may be filtered;

or it may be dead-ended by defining a specific dead-end VLAN on the honeypot SSID to trap stations. 248 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Use the honeypot feature carefully as it could interfere with legitimate SSIDs and prevent clients from associating to another available network. SSID Management This window allows you to manage SSIDs (create, edit and delete), assign security parameters and VLANs on a per SSID basis, and configure the Web Page Redirect functionality. Create new SSID Configure parameters Set traffic limits / usage schedule Configure encryption/authentication Configure RADIUS server Figure 137. SSID Management Configuring the Wireless Array 249 Wireless Array Procedure for Managing SSIDs 1. New SSID Name: To create a new SSID, enter a new SSID name to the left of the Create button (Figure 137), then click Create. The SSID name may only consist of the characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9, dash, and underscore. You may create up to 16 SSIDs. SSID List (top of page) 2. SSID: Shows all currently assigned SSIDs. When you create a new SSID, the SSID name appears in this table. Click any SSID in this list to select it. 3. On: Check this box to activate this SSID or clear it to deactivate it. 4. Brdcast: Check this box to make the selected SSID visible to all clients on the network. Although the Wireless Array will not broadcast SSIDs that are hidden, clients can still associate to a hidden SSID if they know the SSID name to connect to it. Clear this box if you do not want this SSID to be visible on the network. 5. Band: Choose which wireless band the SSID will be beaconed on. Select either 5 GHz 802.11an, 2.4 GHz 802.11bgn or Both. 6. VLAN ID / Number: From the pull-down list, select a VLAN that you want this traffic to be forwarded to on the wired network. Select numeric to enter the number of a previously defined VLAN in the Number field

(see VLANs on page 199). This step is optional. 7. QoS: (Optional) Select a value in this field for QoS (Quality of Service) priority filtering. The QoS value must be one of the following:

0 The lowest QoS priority setting, where QoS makes its best effort at filtering and prioritizing data, video and voice traffic without compromising the performance of the network. Use this setting in environments where traffic prioritization is not a concern.

1 Medium, with QoS prioritization aggregated across all traffic types.

2 High, normally used to give priority to video traffic. 250 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array

3 The highest QoS priority setting, normally used to give priority to voice traffic. The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this SSID over other SSID traffic, as described in Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array on page 244. The default value for this field is 2. 8. DHCP Pool: If you want to associate an internal DHCP pool to this SSID, choose the pool from the pull--down list. An internal DHCP pool must be created before it can be assigned. To create an internal DHCP pool, go to DHCP Server on page 197. 9. Filter List: If you wish to apply a set a filters to this SSIDs traffic, select the desired Filter List. See Filters on page 344. 10. Authentication: The following authentication options are available:

Open: This option provides no authentication and is not recommended.

RADIUS MAC: Uses an external RADIUS server to authenticate stations onto the wireless network, based on the users MAC address. Accounting for these stations is performed according to the accounting options that you have configured specifically for this SSID or globally (see Step 12 below). If this SSID is on a VLAN, the VLAN must have management turned on in order to pass CHAP authentication challenges from the client station to the RADIUS server.

802.1x: Authenticates stations onto the wireless network via a RADIUS server using 802.1x with EAP. The RADIUS server can be internal (provided by the Wireless Array) or external. 11. Encryption: From the pull-down list, choose the encryption that will be required specific to this SSID either None, WEP, WPA, WPA2 or WPA-Both. The None option provides no security and is not recommended; WPA2 provides the best practice Wi-Fi security. Configuring the Wireless Array 251 Wireless Array Each SSID supports only one encryption type at a time (except that WPA and WPA2 are both supported on an SSID if you select WPA-Both). If you need to support other encryption types, you must define additional SSIDs. The encryption standard used with WPA or WPA2 is selected in the Security>Global Settings window (page 230). For an overview of the security options, see Security Planning on page 46 and Understanding Security on page 209. XN model Arrays cannot use the SSID-specific WEP keys specified in this step. They can only use the global WEP keys specified in the Global Settings window. 12. Global: Check the checkbox if you want this SSID to use the security settings established at the global level (refer to Global Settings on page 230). Clear the checkbox if you want the settings established here to take precedence. Additional sections will be displayed to allow you to configure encryption, RADIUS, and RADIUS accounting settings. The WPA Configuration encryption settings have the same parameters as those described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 231. The external RADIUS and accounting settings are configured in the same way as for an external RADIUS server (see Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server on page 235). Note that external RADIUS servers may be specified using IP addresses or domain names. 252 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array

. Set Encryption Configure Radius, Accounting Figure 138. SSID Management 13. Roaming: For this SSID, select whether to enable fast roaming between IAPs or Arrays at L2&L3 (Layer 2 and Layer 3), at L2 (Layer 2 only), or disable roaming (Off). You may only select fast roaming at Layers 2 and 3 if this has been selected in Global Settings (IAP). See Understanding Fast Roaming on page 273. 14. WPR (Web Page Redirect): Check the checkbox to enable the Web Page Redirect functionality, or clear it to disable this option. If enabled, WPR configuration fields will be displayed under the SSID Limits section. This feature may be used to provide an alternate mode of authentication, or to simply display a splash screen when a user first associates to the wireless network. After that, it can (optionally) redirect the user to an alternate Configuring the Wireless Array 253 Wireless Array URL. For example, some wireless devices and users may not have a correctly configured 802.1x (RADIUS) supplicant. Utilizing WPRs Web-

based login, users may be authenticated without using an 802.1x supplicant. See Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 255 for details of WPR usage and configuration. When using WPR, it is particularly important to adhere to the SSID naming restrictions detailed in Step 1. 15. Fallback: Network Assurance checks network connectivity for the Array. When Network Assurance detects a failure, perhaps due to a bad link or WDS failure, if Fallback is set to Disable the Array will automatically disable this SSID. This will disassociate current clients, and prevent new clients from associating. Since the Arrays network connectivity has failed, this gives clients a chance to connect to other, operational parts of the wireless network. No changes are made to WDS configuration. See Step a on page 225 for more information on Network Assurance. The lower part of the window contains a few sections of additional settings to configure for the currently selected SSID, depending on the values chosen for the settings described above. SSID Limits on page 254 Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 255 WPA Configuration Settings on page 259 RADIUS Configuration Settings on page 260 SSID Limits See Group Limits on page 268 for a discussion of the interaction of SSID limits and group limits. To eliminate confusion, we recommend that you configure one set of limits or the other, but not both. 16. Stations: Enter the maximum number of stations allowed on this SSID. This step is optional. Note that the IAPs - Global Settings window also has a station limit option Max Station Association per IAP. If both 254 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array station limits are set, both will be enforced. As soon as either limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. 17. Overall Traffic: Choose Unlimited if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic for this SSID, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field to force a traffic restriction. 18. Traffic per Station: Choose Unlimited if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic per station for this SSID, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field or the Kbps field to force a traffic restriction. If you set both values, the Array will enforce the limit it reaches first. 19. Days Active: Choose Everyday if you want this SSID to be active every day of the week, or select only the specific days that you want this SSID to be active. Days that are not checked are considered to be the inactive days. 20. Time Active: Choose Always if you want this SSID active without interruption, or enter values in the Time On and Time Off fields to limit the time that this SSID is active. 21. To delete SSIDs, click their Delete buttons. 22. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings If you enable WPR, the SSID Management window displays additional fields that must be configured. For example configurations and complete examples, please see the Xirrus Web Page Redirect Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. If enabled, WPR displays a splash or login page when a user associates to the wireless network and opens a browser to any URL (provided the URL does not point to a resource directly on the users machine). The user-requested URL is captured, the users browser is redirected to the splash or login page, and then the browser is redirected either to your specified landing page, if any, or else back to the captured URL. The landing page may be specified for a user group as well. Configuring the Wireless Array 255 See Group Management on page 266. Note that if you change the management HTTPS port, WPR uses that port, too. See HTTPS on page 224. Wireless Array Figure 139. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management) Note that when users roam between Arrays, their WPR Authentication will follow them so that re-authentication is not required. You may select among five different modes for use of the Web Page Redirect feature, each displaying a different set of parameters that must be entered:

Internal Login page This option displays a login page (residing on the Array) instead of the first user-requested URL. There is an upload function that allows you to replace the default login page, if you wish. Please see Web Page Redirect on page 368 for more information. To set up internal login, set Server to Internal Login. Set HTTPS to On for a secure login, or select Off to use HTTP. You may also customize the login page with logo and background images and header and footer text. See Customizing an Internal Login or Splash page on page 258. The user name and password are obtained by the login page, and authentication occurs according to your configured authentication information

(starting with Step 10 on page 251 above). These authentication parameters are configured as described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 231. 256 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array After authentication, the browser is redirected back to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. Both the Internal Login and External Login options of WPR perform authentication using your configured RADIUS servers. Internal Splash page This option displays a splash page instead of the first user-requested URL. The splash page files reside on the Array. Note that there is an upload function that allows you to replace the default splash page, if you wish. Please see Web Page Redirect on page 368 for more information. You may also customize the splash page with logo and background images and header and footer text. See Customizing an Internal Login or Splash page on page 258. To use an internal splash page, set Server to Internal Splash. Enter a value in the Timeout field to define how many seconds the splash screen is displayed before timing out, or select Never to prevent the page from timing out automatically. After the splash page, the user is redirected to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. External Login page This option redirects the user to a login page on an external web server for authentication, instead of the first user-requested URL. Login information (user name and password) must be obtained by that page, and returned to the Array for authentication. to your Authentication occurs according configured RADIUS information. These parameters are configured as described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 231, except that the RADIUS Authentication Type is selected here, as described below. After authentication, the browser is redirected back to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. Configuring the Wireless Array 257 Wireless Array To set up external login page usage, set Server to External Login. Enter the URL of the external web server in Redirect URL, and enter that servers shared secret in Redirect Secret. Select the RADIUS Authentication Type. This is the protocol used for authentication of users, CHAP or PAP (the default).

PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), is a simple protocol. PAP transmits ASCII passwords over the network in the clear

(unencrypted) and is therefore considered insecure.

CHAP (Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol) is a more secure Protocol. The login request is sent using a one-way hash function. External Splash page This option displays a splash page instead of the first user-requested URL. The splash page files reside on an external web server. To set up external splash page usage, set Server to External Splash. Enter the URL of the external web server in Redirect URL, and enter that servers shared secret in Redirect Secret. After the splash page, the user is redirected to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. Landing Page Only This option redirects the user to a specific landing page. If you select this option, enter the desired address in Landing Page URL. Customizing an Internal Login or Splash page You may customize these pages with a logo and/or background image, and header and/or footer text, as shown below in Figure 140. 258 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Logo Header Internal Login Page Background Footer Figure 140. Customizing an Internal Login or Splash Page Background Image specify an optional jpg, gif, or png file to display in the background of the page. Other customizations (logo, header, footer) will overlay the background, so that it will not be visible in those areas. Logo Image specify an optional jpg, gif, or png file to display at the top of the page. Header Text File specify an optional .txt file to display at the top of the page (beneath the logo, if any). Footer Text File specify an optional .txt file to display at the bottom of the page. WPA Configuration Settings If you set Encryption for this SSID to one of the WPA selections (Step 11 on page 251) and you did not check the Global checkbox (Step 12), this section will be displayed. The WPA Configuration encryption settings have the same Configuring the Wireless Array 259 Wireless Array parameters as those described in Procedure for Configuring Network Security on page 231 RADIUS Configuration Settings The RADIUS settings section will be displayed if you set Authentication (Step 10 on page 251) to RADIUS MAC and you did not check the Global checkbox (Step 12). This means that you wish to set up a RADIUS server to be used for this particular SSID. If Global is checked, then the security settings (including the RADIUS server, if any) established at the global level are used instead (see Global Settings on page 230). The RADIUS and accounting settings are configured in the same way as for an external RADIUS server (see Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server on page 235). See Also DHCP Server External Radius Global Settings (IAP) Internal Radius Security Planning SSIDs Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array 260 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Active IAPs By default, when a new SSID is created, that SSID is active on all IAPs. This window allows you to specify which IAPs will offer that SSID. Put differently, you can specify which SSIDs are active on each IAP. This feature is useful in conjunction with WDS. You may use this window to configure the WDS link IAPs so that only the WDS link SSIDs are active on them. Figure 141. Setting Active IAPs per SSID Procedure for Specifying Active IAPs 1. SSID: For a given SSID row, check off the IAPs on which that SSID is to be active. Uncheck any IAPs which should not offer that SSID. 2. All IAPs: This button, in the last column, may be used to deny this SSID on all IAPs. Click again to activate the SSID on all IAPs. 3. All SSIDs: This button, in the bottom row, may be used to activate all SSIDs on this IAP. Click again to deny all SSIDs on this IAP. 4. Toggle All: This button, on the lower left, may be used to deny all SSIDs on all IAPs. Click again to activate all SSIDs on all IAPs. 5. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. Configuring the Wireless Array 261 Wireless Array Per-SSID Access Control List This window allows you to enable or disable the use of the per-SSID Access Control List (ACL), which controls whether a station with a particular MAC address may associate to this SSID. You may create access control list entries and delete existing entries, and control the type of list. There is one ACL per SSID, and you may select whether its type is an Allow List or a Deny List, or whether use of this list is disabled. You may create up to 1000 entries per SSID. There is also a global ACL (see Access Control List on page 227). If the same MAC address is listed in both the global ACL and in an SSIDs ACL, and if either ACL would deny that station access to that SSID, then access will be denied. Figure 142. Per-SSID Access Control List Procedure for Configuring Access Control Lists 1. SSID: Select the SSID whose ACL you wish to manage. 2. Access Control List Type: Select Disabled to disable use of the Access Control List for this SSID, or select the ACL type either Allow List or Deny List.

Allow List: Only allows the listed MAC addresses to associate to the Array. All others are denied. 262 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array

Deny List: Denies the listed MAC addresses permission to associate to the Array. All others are allowed. In addition to these lists, other authentication methods (for example, RADIUS) are still enforced for users. 3. MAC Address: If you want to add a MAC address to the ACL, enter the new MAC address here, then click the Add button. The MAC address is added to the ACL. You may use a wildcard (*) for one or more digits to match a range of addresses. Delete: You may delete selected MAC addresses from this list by clicking their Delete buttons. 4. Delete All: This button, on the upper left, may be used to delete all the MAC entries in an ACL. 5. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. Configuring the Wireless Array 263 Wireless Array Groups This is a status-only window that allows you to review user (i.e., wireless client) Group assignments. It includes the group name, Radius ID, Device ID, VLAN IDs and QoS parameters and roaming layer defined for each group, and DHCP pools and web page redirect information defined for the group. You may click on a groups name to jump to the edit page for the group. There are no configuration options available on this page, but if you are experiencing problems or reviewing group management parameters, you may want to print this page for your records. The Limits section of this window shows any limitations configured for your defined groups. For example, this window shows the current state of a group

(enabled or disabled), how much group and per-station traffic is allowed, time on and time off, and days on and off. For information to help you understand groups, see Understanding Groups below. For an in-depth discussion, please see the Xirrus User Groups Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. Figure 143. Groups Understanding Groups User groups allow administrators to assign specific network parameters to users

(wireless clients) through RADIUS privileges rather than having to map users to an SSID tailored for that set of privileges. Groups provide flexible control over user privileges without the need to create large numbers of SSIDs. 264 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array A group allows you to define a set of parameter values to be applied to selected users. For example, you might define the user group Students, and set its VLAN, security parameters, web page redirect (WPR), and traffic limits. When a new user is created, you can apply all of these settings just by making the user a member of the group. The group allows you to apply a uniform configuration to a set of users in one step. In addition, you can restrict the group so that it only applies its settings to group members who are connecting using a specific device type, such as iPad or phone. Thus, you could define a group named Student-Phone with Device ID set to Phone, and set the groups VLAN Number to 100. This groups settings will only be applied to group members who connect using a phone, and they will all use VLAN 100. Note that settings for the group in the RADIUS server will override any settings on this WMI page. Almost all of the parameters that can be set for a group are the same as SSID parameters. This allows you to configure features at the user group level, rather than for an entire SSID. If you set parameter values for an SSID, and then enter different values for the same parameters for a user group, the user group values have priority (i.e., group settings will override SSID settings). Group names are case-sensitive and can contain up to 32 alphanumeric characters

(do not include spaces when defining Groups). Using Groups User accounts are used to authenticate wireless clients that want to associate to the Array. These accounts are established in one of two ways, using the Security>

Internal Radius window or the Security> External Radius window. In either case, you may select a user group for the user, and that user groups settings will apply to the user:

Internal Radius when you add or modify a user entry, select a user group to which the user will belong. External Radius when you add or modify a user account, specify the Radius ID for the user group to which the user will belong. This must be the same Radius ID that was entered in the Group Management window. When the user is authenticated, the external Radius server will send the Configuring the Wireless Array 265 Radius ID to the Array. This will allow the Array to identify the group to which the user belongs. Wireless Array See Also External Radius Internal Radius SSIDs Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings Understanding Fast Roaming Group Management This window allows you to manage groups (create, edit and delete), assign usage limits and other parameters on a per group basis, and configure the Web Page Redirect functionality. Figure 144. Group Management Procedure for Managing Groups 1. New Group Name: To create a new group, enter a new group name next to the Create button, then click Create. You may create up to 16 groups. To configure and enable this group, proceed with the following steps. 2. Group: This column lists currently defined groups. When you create a new group, the group name appears in this list. Click on any group to select it, and then proceed to modify it as desired. 266 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 3. Enabled: Check this box to enable this group or leave it blank to disable it. When a group is disabled, users that are members of the group will behave as if the group did not exist. In other words, the options configured for the SSID will apply to the users, rather than the options configured for the group. 4. Radius ID: Enter a unique Radius ID for the group, to be used on an external Radius server. When adding a user account to the external server, this Radius ID value should be entered for the user. When the user is authenticated, Radius sends this value to the Array. This tells the Array that the user is a member of the group having this Radius ID. 5. Device ID: You may select a device type from this drop-down list, for example, Notebook, phone, iPhone, or Android. This allows you to apply the group settings only if a station authenticates as a user that is a member of the group and the stations device type matches Device ID. Select none if you do not want to consider the device type. If you have a Radius ID you should not enter a Device ID. 6. VLAN ID: (Optional) From the pull-down list, select a VLAN for this users traffic to use. Select numeric and enter the number of a previously defined VLAN (see VLANs on page 199). This user groups VLAN settings supersede Dynamic VLAN settings (which are passed to the Array by the Radius server). To avoid confusion, we recommend that you avoid specifying the VLAN for a user in two places. 7. QoS Priority: (Optional) Select a value in this field for QoS (Quality of Service) priority filtering. The QoS value must be one of the following:

0 The lowest QoS priority setting, where QoS makes its best effort at filtering and prioritizing data, video and voice traffic without compromising the performance of the network. Use this setting in environments where traffic prioritization is not a concern.

1 Medium; QoS prioritization is aggregated across all traffic types.

2 High, normally used to give priority to video traffic.

3 The highest QoS priority setting, normally used to give priority to voice traffic. Configuring the Wireless Array 267 Wireless Array The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this group versus other traffic, as described in Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array on page 244. The default value for this field is 2. 8. DHCP Pool: (Optional) To associate an internal DHCP pool to this group, select it from the pull--down list. Only one pool may be assigned. An internal DHCP pool must be created before it can be assigned. To create a DHCP pool, go to DHCP Server on page 197. 9. Filter List: (Optional) If you wish to apply a set of filters to this user groups traffic, select the desired Filter List. See Filters on page 344. 10. Xirrus Roaming: (Optional) For this group, select roaming behavior. Select L2&L3 to enable fast roaming between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and Layer 3. If you select L2, then roaming uses Layer 2 only. You may only select fast roaming at Layers 2 and 3 if this has been selected in Global Settings (IAP). You may select Off to disable fast roaming. See Understanding Fast Roaming on page 273. 11. WPR (Web Page Redirect): (Optional) Check this box if you wish to enable the Web Page Redirect functionality. This will open a Web Page Redirect details section in the window, where your WPR parameters may be entered. This feature may be used to display a splash screen when a user first associates to the wireless network. After that, it can (optionally) redirect the user to an alternate URL. See Web Page Redirect Configuration Settings on page 255 for details of WPR usage and configuration. Note that the Group Management window only allows you to set up an Internal Splash page and a Landing Page URL. The authentication options that are offered on the SSID Management page are not offered here. Since the group membership of a user is provided to the Array by a Radius server, this means the user has already been authenticated. Group Limits The Limits section allows you to limit the traffic or connection times allowed for this user group. Note that the IAPs Global Settings window and the SSID management windows also have options to limit the number of stations, limit 268 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array traffic, and/or limit connection times. If limits are set in more than one place, all limits will be enforced:

As soon as any station limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. As soon as any traffic limit is reached, it is enforced. If any connection date/time restriction applies, it is enforced. You can picture this as a logical AND of all restrictions. For example, suppose that a stations SSID is available MTWTF between 8:00am and 5:00pm, and the User Group is available MWF between 6:00am and 8:00pm, then the station will be allowed on MWF between 8:00am and 5:00pm. To eliminate confusion, we recommend that you configure one set of limits or the other, but not both. 12. Stations: Enter the maximum number of stations allowed on this group. The default is 1536. 13. Overall Traffic: Check the Unlimited checkbox if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic for this group, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field and make sure that the Unlimited box is unchecked to force a traffic restriction. 14. Traffic per Station: Check the Unlimited checkbox if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic per station for this group, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec or Kbps field and make sure that the Unlimited box is unchecked to force a traffic restriction. 15. Days Active: Choose Everyday if you want this group to be active every day of the week, or select only the specific days that you want this group to be active. Days that are not checked are considered to be the inactive days. 16. Time Active: Choose Always if you want this group active without interruption, or enter values in the Time On and Time Off fields to limit the time that group members may associate. 17. To delete an entry, click its Delete button. Configuring the Wireless Array 269 18. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes Wireless Array permanent. See Also DHCP Server External Radius Internal Radius Security Planning SSIDs 270 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array IAPs This status-only window summarizes the status of the Integrated Access Points

(radios). For each IAP, it shows whether it is up or down, the channel and wireless mode, the antenna that it is currently using, its cell size and transmit and receive power, how many users (stations) are currently associated to it, whether it is part of a WDS link, and its MAC address. Figure 145. IAPs The Channel column displays some status information that is not found elsewhere: the source of a channel setting. (Figure 146) If you set a channel manually (via IAP Settings), it will be labeled as manual next to the channel number (Figure 146). If an autochannel operation changed a channel, then it is labeled as auto. If the channel is set to the current factory default setting, the source will be default. This column also shows whether the channel selection is locked, or whether the IAP was automatically switched to this channel because the Array detected the signature of radar in operation on a conflicting channel

(see also, Step 8 on page 282). There are no configuration options in this window, but if you are experiencing problems or simply reviewing the IAP assignments, you may print this window for your records. Click any IAP name to open the associated configuration page. Configuring the Wireless Array 271 Wireless Array Figure 146. Source of Channel Setting Arrays have a fast roaming feature, allowing them to maintain sessions for applications such as voice, even while users cross boundaries between Arrays. Fast roaming is set up in the Global Settings (IAP) window and is discussed in:

Understanding Fast Roaming on page 273 IAPs are configured using the following windows:

IAP Settings on page 274 Global Settings (IAP) on page 280 Global Settings .11an on page 293 Global Settings .11bgn on page 298 Global Settings .11n on page 304 Advanced RF Settings on page 313 LED Settings on page 334 DSCP Mappings on page 335 Roaming Assist on page 336 See Also IAP Statistics Summary 272 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Understanding Fast Roaming To maintain sessions for real-time data traffic, such as voice and video, users must be able to maintain the same IP address through the entire session. With traditional networks, if a user crosses VLAN or subnet boundaries (i.e., roaming between domains), a new IP address must be obtained. Mobile wireless users are likely to cross multiple roaming domains during a single session (especially wireless users of VoIP phones). Layer 3 roaming allows a user to maintain the same IP address through an entire real-time data session. The user may be associated to any of the VLANs defined on the Array. The Layer 3 session is maintained by establishing a tunnel back to the originating Array. You should decide whether or not to use Layer 3 roaming based on your wired network design. Layer 3 roaming incurs extra overhead and may result in additional traffic delays. Fast Roaming is configured on two pages. To enable the fast roaming options that you want to make available on your Array, see Step 28 to Step 30 in Global Settings (IAP) on page 280. To choose which of the enabled options are used by an SSID or Group, see Procedure for Managing SSIDs on page 250 (Step 13) or Procedure for Managing Groups on page 266. Configuring the Wireless Array 273 Wireless Array IAP Settings This window allows you to enable/disable IAPs, define the wireless mode for each IAP, specify the channel to be used and the cell size for each IAP, lock the channel selection, establish transmit/receive parameters, select antennas, and reset channels. Buttons at the bottom of the list allow you to Reset Channels, Enable All IAPs, or Disable All IAPs. When finished, click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. Figure 147. IAP Settings You may also access this window by clicking on the Array image at the lower left of the WMI window click the orange Xirrus logo in the center of the Array. See User Interface on page 88. Procedure for Auto Configuring IAPs You can auto-configure channel and cell size of radios by clicking on the Auto Configure buttons on the relevant WMI page (auto configuration only applies to enabled radios):

For all radios, go to Advanced RF Settings on page 313. For all 802.11a settings, go to Global Settings .11an on page 293. For all 802.11bg settings, go to Global Settings .11bgn on page 298. For all 802.11n settings, go to Global Settings .11n on page 304. 274 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Manually Configuring IAPs 1. In the Enabled column, check the box for an IAP to enable it, or uncheck the box if you want to disable the IAP. In the Band column, select the wireless band for this IAP from the choices available in the pull-down menu, either 2.4GHz or 5 GHz. Choosing the 5GHz band will automatically select an adjacent channel for bonding. If the band displayed is auto, the Band is about to be changed based on a new Channel selection that you made that requires the change. One of the IAPs must be set to monitor mode to support Spectrum Analyzer, Radio Assurance (loopback testing), and Intrusion Detection features. For XN16 Arrays only The XN16 allows up to 12 IAPs to operate as 5 GHz 802.11an radios concurrently using internal antennas. Do not set Mode to 5 GHz for more than 12 IAPs unless you are using external antennas. Please contact Xirrus Customer Support for details. 2. In the WiFi Mode column, select the IEEE 802.11 wireless mode (or combination) that you want to allow on this IAP. The drop-down list will only display the appropriate choices for the selected Band. For example, the 5 GHz band allows you to select an, a-only, or n-only, while 2.4GHz also includes 802.11b and 802.11g choices. When you select a WiFi Mode for an IAP, your selection in the Channel column will be checked to ensure that it is a valid choice for that WiFi Mode. By selecting appropriate WiFi Modes for the radios on your Arrays, you can greatly improve wireless network performance. For example, if you have 802.11b and 802.11n stations using the same IAP, throughput on that radio is reduced greatly for the 802.11n stations. By supporting 802.11b stations only on selected radios in your network, the rest of your 802.11a or 11n radios will have greatly improved performance. Take care to ensure that your network provides adequate coverage for the types of stations that you need to support. Configuring the Wireless Array 275 Wireless Array 3. In the Channel column, select the channel you want this IAP to use from the channels available in the pull-down list. The list shows the channels available for the IAP selected (depending on which band the IAP is using). Channels that are shown in color indicate conditions that you need to keep in mind:

RED Usage is not recommended, for example, because of overlap with neighboring radios.

YELLOW The channel has less than optimum separation (some degree of overlap with neighboring radios).

GRAY The channel is already in use. The channels that are available for assignment to an IAP will differ, depending on the country of operation. If Country is set to United States in the Global Settings (IAP) window, then 21 channels are available to 802.11an radios. As mandated by FCC/IC law, Arrays continually scan for signatures of radar. If such a signature is detected, the Array will switch operation from conflicting channels to new ones. The Array will switch back to the original channel after 30 minutes if the channel is clear. If a radio was turned off because there were no available channels not affected by radar, the Array will now bring that radio back up after 30 minutes if that channel is clear. The 30 minute time frame complies with FCC/IC regulations. 4. The Bond column works together with the channel bonding options selected on the Global Settings .11n page. Also see the discussion of 802.11n bonding in Channel Bonding on page 39.

Channel number If a channel number appears, then this channel is already bonded to the listed channel.

Off Do not bond his channel to another channel.

On Bond this channel to an adjacent channel. The bonded channel is selected automatically by the Array based on the Channel (Step 3). The choice of banded channel is static fixed once the selection is made. 276 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array

+1 Bond this channel to the next higher channel number. Auto Channel bonding does not apply. This option is only available for some of the channels.

-1 Bond this channel to the next lower channel number. Auto Channel bonding does not apply. This option is only available for some of the channels. 5. Click the Lock check box if you want to lock in your channel selection so that an autochannel operation (see Advanced RF Settings) cant change it. 6. In the Cell Size column, select auto to allow the optimal cell size to be automatically computed (see also, RF Power & Sensitivity on page 316). To set the cell size yourself, choose either small, medium, large, or max to use the desired pre-configured cell size, or choose manual to define the wireless cell size manually. If you choose Manual, you must specify the transmit and receive power in dB in the Tx dBm (transmit) and Rx dBm (receive) fields. The default is max. If you select a value other than auto, the cell size will not be affected by cell size auto configuration. Note that ultra low power Tx dBm settings are possible. Values from -15dB to 5dB are provided specifically to help in high density 2.4 GHz environments. When other Arrays are within listening range of this one, setting cell sizes to Auto allows the Array to change cell sizes so that coverage between cells is maintained. Each cell size is optimized to limit interference between sectors of other Arrays on the same channel. This eliminates the need for a network administrator to manually tune the size of each cell when installing multiple Arrays. In the event that an Array or a radio goes offline, an adjacent Array can increase its cell size to help compensate. The number of users and their applications are major drivers of bandwidth requirements. The network architect must account for the number of users within the Arrays cell diameter. In a large office, or if multiple Arrays are in use, you may choose Small cells to achieve a higher data rate, since walls and other objects will not define the cells naturally. Configuring the Wireless Array 277 Wireless Array For additional information about cell sizes, go to Coverage and Capacity Planning on page 28. 7. 8. If you are using WDS to provide backhaul over an extended distance, use WDS Dist. (Miles) to prevent timeout problems associated with long transmission times. Set the approximate distance in miles between this IAP and the connected Array in this column. This increases the wait time for frame transmission accordingly. In the Antenna Select column, choose the antenna you want this radio to use from the pull-down list. The list of available antennas will be different

(or no choices will be available), depending on the Array model and on the wireless mode you selected for the IAP. 9. If desired, enter a description for this IAP in the Description field. 10. You may reset all of the enabled IAPs by clicking the Reset Channels button at the bottom of the list. A message will inform you that all enabled radios have been taken down and brought back up. 11. Buttons at the bottom of the list allow you to Enable All IAPs or Disable All IAPs. 12. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an 278 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Global Settings .11bgn Global Settings .11n IAPs IAP Statistics Summary LED Settings Configuring the Wireless Array 279 Global Settings (IAP) Wireless Array Figure 148. Global Settings (IAPs) 280 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array This window allows you to establish global IAP settings. Global IAP settings include enabling or disabling all IAPs (regardless of their operating mode), and changing settings for beacons, station management, and advanced traffic optimization including multicast processing, load balancing, and roaming. Changes you make on this page are applied to all IAPs, without exception. Procedure for Configuring Global IAP Settings Some of the features below, such as Load Balancing, are only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager

(RPM). If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. 1. Country: This is a display-only value. Once a country has been set, it may not be changed. The channels that are available for assignment to an IAP will differ, depending on the country of operation. If Country is set to United States, then 21 channels are available for 802.11a/n. If no country is displayed, the channel set defaults to channels and power levels that are legal worldwide this set only includes the lower eight 5 GHz channels. 2. IAP Control: Click on the Enable All IAPs button to enable all IAPs for this Array, or click on the Disable All IAPs button to disable all IAPs. 3. Short Retries: This sets the maximum number of transmission attempts for a frame, the length of which is less than or equal to the RTS Threshold, before a failure condition is indicated. The default value is 7. Enter a new value (1 to 128) in the Short Retry Limit field if you want to increase or decrease this attribute. 4. Long Retries: This sets the maximum number of transmission attempts for a frame, the length of which is greater than the RTS Threshold, before a failure condition is indicated. The default value is 4. Enter a new value

(1 to 128) in the Long Retry Limit field if you want to increase or decrease this attribute. Configuring the Wireless Array 281 5. Wi-Fi Alliance Mode: Set this On if you need Array behavior to conform completely to Wi-Fi Alliance standards. This mode is normally set to Off. Wireless Array Beacon Configuration 6. Beacon Interval: When the Array sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval, which specifies the period of time before it will send the beacon again. Enter the desired value in the Beacon Interval field, between 20 and 1000 Kusecs. A Kusec is 1000 microseconds =

1 millisecond. The value you enter here is applied to all IAPs. 7. DTIM Period: A DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message) is a signal sent as part of a beacon by the Array to a client device in sleep mode, alerting the device to broadcast traffic awaiting delivery. The DTIM Period is a multiple of the Beacon Interval, and it determines how often DTIMs are sent out. By default, the DTIM period is 1, which means that it is the same as the beacon interval. Enter the desired multiple, between 1 and 255. The value you enter here is applied to all IAPs. 8. 802.11h Beacon Support: This option enables beacons on all of the Arrays radios to conform to 802.11h requirements, supporting dynamic frequency selection (DFS) and transmit power control (TPC) to satisfy regulatory requirements for operation in Europe. 9. WMM Power Save: Click On to enable Wireless Multimedia Power Save support, as defined in IEEE802.11e. This option saves power and increases battery life by allowing the client device to doze between packets to save power, while the Array buffers downlink frames. The default setting is On. 10. WMM ACM Video: Click On to enable Wireless Multimedia Admission Control for video traffic. When admission control for video is enabled, the Array evaluates a video request from a client device against the network load and channel conditions. If the network is not congested, it accepts the request and grants the client the medium time for its traffic stream. Otherwise, it rejects the request. Some clients contain sufficient 282 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array intelligence to decide to either delay the traffic stream, associate with a different AP, or establish a best-effort traffic stream outside the operation of WMM-Admission Control. The default setting is Off. 11. WMM ACM Voice: Click On to enable Wireless Multimedia Admission Control for voice calls. When admission control for voice is enabled, the Array evaluates a voice request from a client device against the network load and channel conditions. If the network is not congested, it accepts the request and grants the client the medium time for its call. Otherwise, it rejects the request. Some clients contain sufficient intelligence to decide to either delay the traffic stream, associate with a different AP, or establish a best-effort traffic stream outside the operation of WMM-Admission Control. The default setting is Off. Station Management 12. Station Re-Authentication Period: This specifies an interval (in seconds) for station reauthentications. This is the minimum time period between station authentication attempts, enforced by the Array. This feature is part of the Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM). 13. Station Timeout Period: Specify a time (in seconds) in this field to define the timeout period for station associations. 14. Max Station Association per Array: This option allows you to define how many station associations are allowed per Array (up to 1280 stations per Array). Note that the Max Station Association per IAP limit (below) may not be exceeded. If you have an unlicensed Array, this value is set to 1, which simply allows you to test the ability to connect to the Array. 15. Max Station Association per IAP: This defines how many station the SSIDs SSID associations are allowed per Management window also has a station limit option Station Limit

(page 254). If both station limits are set, both will be enforced. As soon as either limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. IAP. Note that Configuring the Wireless Array 283 Wireless Array 16. Max Phones per IAP: This option allows you to control the maximum number of phones that are allowed per IAP. The default is set to a maximum of 16 but you can reduce this number, as desired. Enter a value in this field between 0 (no phones allowed) and 16. This admission control feature applies only to Spectralink phones. It does not apply to all VoIP phones in general. 17. Block Inter-Station Traffic: This option allows you to block or allow traffic between wireless clients that are associated to the Array. Choose either Yes (to block traffic) or No (to allow traffic). 18. Allow Over Air Management: Choose Yes to enable management of the Array via the IAPs, or choose No (recommended) to disable this feature. Advanced Traffic Optimization 19. Multicast Processing: This sets how multicast traffic is handled. Multicast traffic can be received by a number of subscribing stations at the same time, thus saving a great deal of bandwidth. In some of the options below, the Array uses IGMP snooping to determine the stations that are subscribed to the multicast traffic. IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is used to establish and manage the membership of multicast groups. Multicast handling options are only applicable to traffic transmitted from the Array to wireless stations. Select one of the following options:

Send multicasts unmodified. This is useful when multicast is not needed because no video or audio streaming is required or when it is used only for discovering services in the network. Some situations where you might use this option are:

for compatibility with ordinary operation, i.e., there is no optimization or modification of multicast traffic.

if you have an application where many subscribers need to see the multicasta large enough number that it would be less efficient to convert to unicast and better just to send out multicast 284 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array even though it must be sent out at the speed of the slowest connected station. An example of a situation that might benefit from the use of this mode is ghosting all the laptops in a classroom using multicast. One multicast stream at, say, 6 Mbps is probably more efficient than thirty unicast streams. The next three options convert multicast to unicast. Packets are sent directly to the stations at the best possible data rates. This approach significantly improves the quality of the voice and video multicast streams.

Convert to unicast and send unicast packets to all stations. This may be useful in link-local multicast situations.

Convert to unicast, snoop IGMP, and only send to stations subscribed (send as multicast if no subscription). This option is useful when you need to stream voice or video multicast traffic to all stations, but some stations are capable of subscribing to multicast groups while other stations are not. The stations that do not subscribe will not benefit from conversion to unicast; their video or voice quality may be compromised.

Convert to unicast, snoop IGMP, and only send to stations subscribed (don't send packet if no subscription). This option is useful in well controlled environments when you need to stream voice or video multicast traffic only to stations that are capable of subscribing to multicast groups and there is no need for the rest of the stations to receive the data stream. 20. Multicast Exclude: This is a list of multicast IP addresses that will not be subject to multicast-to-unicast conversion. This list is useful on networks where applications such as those using multicast Domain Name System

(mDNS) are in use. For example, Apple Bonjour finds local network devices such as printers or other computers using mDNS. By default, the list contains the IPv4 multicast address for Apple Bonjour mDNS:

224.0.0.251. Configuring the Wireless Array 285 Wireless Array To add a new IP address to the list, type it in the top field and click the Add button to its right. You may only enter IP addresseshost names are not allowed. This is because mDNS is a link local multicast address, and does not require IGMP to the gateway. To remove an entry, select it in the list and click Delete. To remove all entries from the list, click Reset. 21. Multicast Forwarding Multicast Forwarding is a Xirrus feature that forwards selected multicast traffic between wired VLANs and wireless SSIDs. For example, Apple devices use mDNS to advertise and find services, using local network multicasts that are not routed. This creates an issue when you are using Apple devices on the Wireless LAN, and have other devices that provide services connected on the wired infrastructure in a different VLAN, for example, printers and AppleTV devices. One way to address this issue is to set up multicast forwarding between the wireless SSID and the wired VLAN. This requires the wired VLAN to be trunked to the Array. Once configured correctly, mDNS traffic will be forwarded from the specified wireless network(s) to the specified wired VLANs and vice-versa, subject to any mDNS service filtering defined (Step 23). Use multicast forwarding together with multicast VLAN forwarding

(Step 22) and mDNS filtering (Step 23) to make services available across VLANs as follows:

In Multicast Forwarding Addresses, enter a list of multicast addresses that you want forwarded, for example, 224.0.0.251 (the multicast address for Bonjour).

In Multicast VLAN Forwarding, enter a list of VLANs that participate in the multicast forwarding.

In MDNS Filter, specify the mDNS service types that are allowed to be forwarded.

If you leave this field blank, then there is no filter, and mDNS packets for all service types are passed. 286 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array

If you enter service types, then this acts as an allow filter, and mDNS packets are passed only for the listed service types. Note that mDNS filtering may be used to filter the mDNS packet types that are forwarded within the same VLAN. Also, in conjunction with multicast forwarding, it may be used to filter the mDNS packet types that are forwarded across configured VLANs. After you have entered these settings, when multicast packets arrive from the wired network from one of the Multicast Forwarding Addresses on any VLAN specified in Multicast VLAN Forwarding, they are forwarded to the corresponding wireless SSID for that VLAN. Multicast packets coming in from the wireless network on an SSID tied to one of the specified VLANs and matching one of the Multicast Forwarding Addresses are forwarded to the specified VLANs on the wired network. No modifications are made to the forwarded packets they are just forwarded between specified VLANs and associated SSIDs. Xirrus strongly recommends the use of MDNS Filters (Step 23) when using multicast forwarding. Only allow required services to be forwarded. Carefully monitor results, as forwarding may flood your network with multicast traffic. Experience has shown Bonjour devices to be very chatty. Also note that since this is link local multicast traffic, it will be sent to every wired port in the VLAN, as IGMP snooping does not work with link local multicast addresses. To specify Multicast Forwarding Addresses: enter each IP address in the top field and click the Add button to its right. You may only enter IPv4 multicast addresses - host names are not allowed. To remove an entry, select it in the list and click Delete. To remove all entries from the list, click Reset. Configuring the Wireless Array 287 Wireless Array 22. Multicast VLAN Forwarding: This is a list of VLANs that participate in the multicast forwarding. Please see the description of multicast forwarding in Step 21 above. The VLANs you enter must be explicitly defined (see VLANs on page 199) in order to participate in multicast forwarding. In fact, the Array discards packets from undefined VLANs. To add a new VLAN to the list, enter its number or name in the top field and click the Add button to its right. You may enter multiple VLANs at once, separated by a space. To remove an entry, select it in the list and click Delete. To remove all entries from the list, click Reset. These VLANs must be trunked to the Array from the LAN switch, and be defined on the Array. See VLAN Management on page 201 and SSID Management on page 249. Note that Multicast Forwarding and mDNS Filtering capabilities also work if both devices are wireless. For example, lets say that AppleTV is using wireless to connect to an SSID that is associated with VLAN 56, and the wireless client is on an SSID that is associated with VLAN 58. Normally the wireless client would not be able to use Bonjour to discover the AppleTV because they are on separate VLANs. But if you add 224.0.0.251 to the Multicast Forwarding Addresses, then add VLANs 56 and 58 to the Multicast VLAN Forwarding list, then the wireless client will be able to discover the AppleTV. In this same scenario you could add AppleTV to the MDNS Filter list so that only MDNS packets for the AppleTV service type would be forwarded between VLANs 56 and 58. Note that all the VLANs that you add to this list do not have to be associated with SSIDs. As an example, say that AppleTV is on the wired network on VLAN 56, while the wireless device is connected to an SSID that is associated to VLAN 58. In this case, VLAN 56 and 58 need to be defined on the Array but only VLAN 58 needs to be associated to a SSID. 288 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 23. MDNS Filter: There are many different types of services that may be specified in multicast query and response packets. The mDNS filters let you restrict forwarding, so that multicast packets are forwarded only for the services that you explicitly specify. This list may be used to restrict the amount of Apple Bonjour multicast traffic forwarding. For example, you may restrict forwarding to just AppleTV and printing services. Please see the description of multicast forwarding in Step 21 above. The MDNS Filter operates as follows:

If you leave this field blank, then there is no filter, and mDNS packets for all service types are passed.

If you enter service types, then this acts as an allow filter, and mDNS packets are passed only for the listed service types. To add an mDNS packet type to the list of packets that may be forwarded, select it from the drop-down list in the top field and click the Add button to its right. The drop-down list offers packet types such as AirTunes, Apple-TV, iChat, iPhoto, iTunes, iTunes-Home-Sharing, Internet-

Printing, Mobile-Device-Sync, and Secure-Telnet. For example, to allow mirroring of an iPad on an Apple-TV, select Apple-

TV. You may define your own type if you do not see the service you want in the drop-down list. Simply enter the mDNS service name that you would like to allow through. Custom mDNS packet types must be prefixed with an underscore, e.g., _airvideoserver. To remove an entry, select it in the list and click Delete. To remove all entries from the list, click Reset. 24. Broadcast Rates: This changes the rates of broadcast traffic sent by the Array (including beacons). When set to Optimized, each broadcast or multicast packet that is transmitted on each radio is sent at the lowest transmit rate used by any client associated to that radio at that time. This results in each IAP broadcasting at the highest Array TX data rate that can be heard by all associated stations, improving system performance. The rate is determined dynamically to ensure the best broadcast/multicast Configuring the Wireless Array 289 Wireless Array performance possible. The benefit is dramatic. Consider a properly designed network (having -70db or better everywhere), where virtually every client should have a 54Mbps connection. In this case, broadcasts and multicasts will all go out at 54Mbps vs. the standard rate. Thus, with broadcast rate optimization on, broadcasts and multicasts use between 2% and 10% of the bandwidth that they would in Standard mode. When set to Standard (the default), broadcasts are sent out at the lowest basic rate only 6 Mbps for 5GHz clients, or 1 Mbps for 2.4GHz clients. The option you select here is applied to all IAPs. 25. Load Balancing: The Xirrus Wireless Array supports an automatic load balancing feature designed to distribute wireless stations across multiple radios rather than having stations associate to the closest radios with the strongest signal strength, as they normally would. In wireless networks, the station decides to which radio it will associate. The Array cannot actually force load balancing, however the Array can encourage stations to associate in a more uniform fashion across all of the radios of the Array. This option enables or disables active load balancing between the Array IAPs. For an in-depth discussion, see the Xirrus Station Load Balancing Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. If you select On and an IAP is overloaded, that IAP will send an AP Full message in response to Probe, Association, or Authentication requests. This prevents determined clients from forcing their way onto overloaded IAPs. Note that some clients are so determined to associate to a particular IAP that they will not try to associate to another IAP, and thus they never get on the network. Choose Off to disable load balancing. 26. ARP Filtering: Address Resolution Protocol finds the MAC address of a device with a given IP address by sending out a broadcast message requesting this information. ARP filtering allows you to reduce the proliferation of ARP messages by restricting how they are forwarded across the network. You may select from the following options for handling ARP requests:

290 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array

Off: ARP filtering is disabled. ARP requests are broadcast to radios that have stations associated to them.

Pass-thru: The Array forwards the ARP request. It passes along only ARP messages that target the stations that are associated to it. This is the default value.

Proxy: The Array replies on behalf of the stations that are associated to it. The ARP request is not broadcast to the stations. Note that the Array has a broadcast optimization feature that is always on

(it is not configurable). Broadcast optimization restricts all broadcast packets (not just ARP broadcasts) to only those radios that need to forward them. For instance, if a broadcast comes in from VLAN 10, and there are no VLAN 10 users on a radio, then that radio will not send out that broadcast. This increases available air time for other traffic. 27. IPv6 Filtering: this setting allows blocking of IPv6 traffic which may be a concern for IT managers. The Xirrus Array currently bridges IPv6 traffic. Set IPv6 filtering On if you wish to prevent the forwarding of IPv6 packets through the Array in both directionswired network to wireless and wireless network to wired. The default is Off. 28. Xirrus Roaming Layer: Select whether to enable roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and 3, or at Layer 2 only. Depending on your wired network, you may wish to allow fast roaming at Layer 3. This may result in delayed traffic. 29. Xirrus Roaming Mode: This feature utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol

(XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or Arrays at Layer 2 and Layer 3 (as specified in Step 30), while maintaining security. Fast roaming eliminates long delays for re-authentication, thus supporting time-sensitive applications such as Voice over Wi-Fi (see Understanding Fast Roaming on page 273 for a discussion of this feature). XRP uses a discovery process to identify other Xirrus Arrays as fast roaming targets. This process has two modes:

Broadcast the Array uses a broadcast technique to discover other Arrays that may be targets for fast roaming. Configuring the Wireless Array 291 Wireless Array

Tunneled in this Layer 3 technique, fast roaming target Arrays must be explicitly specified. To enable fast roaming, choose Broadcast or Tunneled, and set additional fast roaming attributes (Step 30). To disable fast roaming, choose Off. If you enable Fast Roaming, the following ports cannot be blocked:

Port 22610 reserved for Layer 2 roaming using UDP to share PMK information between Arrays.

Ports 15000 to 17999 reserved for Layer 3 roaming (tunneling between subnets). 30. Share Roaming Info With: Three options allow your Array to share roaming information with all Arrays; just with those that are within range; or with specifically targeted Arrays. Choose either All, In Range or Target Only, respectively. a. Xirrus Roaming Targets: If you chose Target Only, use this option to add target MAC addresses. Enter the MAC address of each target Array, then click on Add (add as many targets as you like). To find a targets MAC address, open the Array Info window on the target Array and look for IAP MAC Range, then use the starting address of this range. To delete a target, select it from the list, then click Delete. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn Global Settings .11n Advanced RF Settings IAPs IAP Statistics Summary LED Settings IAP Settings 292 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Global Settings .11an This window allows you to establish global 802.11a IAP settings. These settings include defining which 802.11a data rates are supported, enabling or disabling all 802.11an IAPs, auto-configuration of channel allocations for all 802.11an IAPs, and specifying the fragmentation and RTS thresholds for all 802.11an IAPs. Figure 149. Global Settings .11an Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11an IAP Settings 1. 802.11a Data Rates: The Array allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11an radios. Select (or deselect) data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.

Basic Rate a wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate.

Supported Rate data rates that can be used to transmit to clients. 2. Data Rate Presets: The Wireless Array can optimize your 802.11a data rates automatically, based on range or throughput. Click Optimize Range Configuring the Wireless Array 293 Wireless Array to optimize data rates based on range, or click Optimize Throughput to optimize data rates based on throughput. The Restore Defaults button will take you back to the factory default rate settings. 3. 802.11a IAP Control: Click Enable 802.11a IAPs to enable all 802.11an IAPs for this Array, or click Disable 802.11a IAPs to disable all 802.11an IAPs. Some of the features below, such as Auto Configure for Cell Size and Channel Configuration, are only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM). If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. 4. Channel Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each 802.11an IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for 802.11a channel allocation (see RF Spectrum Management on page 318). Click Factory Defaults if you wish to instruct the Array to return all IAPs to their factory preset channels. As of release 6.3, Arrays no longer all use the same factory preset values for channel assignments. Instead, if the Array has been deployed for a while and already has data from the spectrum analyzer and Xirrus Roaming Protocol about channel usage on neighboring arrays, it performs a quick auto channel using that information (without doing a full RF scan) to make an intelligent choice of channel assignments. If the Array has been rebooted and has no saved configuration or is just being deployed for the first time, it has no prior data about its RF environment. In this case, it will pick a set of compatible channel assignments at random. On the XR500 and XR-1000 Series Arrays, the Factory Defaults button will not restore iap1 to monitor mode. You will need to restore this setting manually. Also, you may need to set Timeshare Mode again - see RF Monitor on page 314. 294 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array The following options may be selected for auto configuration:

Non-Radar: give preference to channels that are not required to use dynamic frequency selection (DFS) to avoid communicating in the same frequency range as some radar (also see Step 8 on page 282). Channels Required to Use DFS Radar Avoidance in USA 36+40 44+48 52+56 60+64 Non-radar Non-radar DFS required 116+120 DFS required 124+128 132+136 DFS required DFS required DFS required 149+153 Non-radar 100+104 DFS required 157+161 Non-radar 108+112 DFS required

Negotiate: negotiate air-time with other Arrays before performing a full scan.

Full Scan: perform a full traffic scan on all channels on all IAPs to determine the best channel allocation.

Include WDS: automatically assign 5GHz to WDS client links. To use the Auto Cell Size feature, the following additional settings are required:

RF Monitor Mode must be turned On. See RF Monitor on page 314 One of the radios must be in monitor mode with the default RxdBm setting of -95, and all other IAPs that will use Auto Cell must have Cell Size set to auto. See Procedure for Manually Configuring IAPs on page 275. 5. Set Cell Size: Cell Size may be set globally for all 802.11an IAPs to Auto, Large, Medium, Small, or Max using the buttons. Configuring the Wireless Array 295 Wireless Array For an overview of RF power and cell size settings, please see RF Power

& Sensitivity on page 316, Capacity and Cell Sizes on page 30, and Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 31. 6. Auto Cell Period (seconds): You may set up auto-configuration to run periodically, readjusting optimal cell sizes for the current conditions. Enter a number of seconds to specify how often auto-configuration will run. If you select None, then auto-configuration of cell sizing will not be run periodically. You do not need to run Auto Cell often unless there are a lot of changes in the environment. If the RF environment is changing often, running Auto Cell every twenty-four hours (86400 seconds) should be sufficient). The default value is None. 7. Auto Cell Size Overlap (%): Enter the percentage of cell overlap that will be allowed when the Array is determining automatic cell sizes. For 100%

overlap, the power is adjusted such that neighboring Arrays that hear each other best will hear each other at -70dB. For 0% overlap, that number is -90dB. The default value is 50%. 8. Auto Cell Min Cell Size: Use this setting if you wish to set the minimum cell size that Auto Cell may assign. The values are Default, Large, Medium, or Small. 9. Auto Cell Min Tx Power (dBm): Enter the minimum transmit power that the Array can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. The default value is 10. 10. Auto Cell Configuration: Click this button to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each 802.11an IAP whose Cell Size is auto on the IAP Settings window, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. You may look at the Tx and Rx values on the IAP Settings window to view the cell size settings that were applied. 11. Fragmentation Threshold: This is the maximum size for directed data packets transmitted over the 802.11an radio. Larger frames fragment into several packets, their maximum size defined by the value you enter here. 296 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Smaller fragmentation numbers can help to squeeze packets through in noisy environments. Enter the desired Fragmentation Threshold value in this field, between 256 and 2346. 12. RTS Threshold: The RTS (Request To Send) Threshold specifies the packet size. Packets larger than the RTS threshold will use CTS/RTS prior to transmitting the packet useful for larger packets to help ensure the success of their transmission. Enter a value between 1 and 2347. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11bgn Global Settings .11n IAPs IAP Statistics Summary Advanced RF Settings IAP Settings Configuring the Wireless Array 297 Wireless Array Global Settings .11bgn This window allows you to establish global 802.11b/g IAP settings. These settings include defining which 802.11b and 802.11g data rates are supported, enabling or disabling all 802.11b/g IAPs, auto-configuring 802.11b/g IAP channel allocations, and specifying the fragmentation and RTS thresholds for all 802.11b/g IAPs. Figure 150. Global Settings .11bgn Some of the features below, such as Auto Configure for Cell Size and Channel Configuration, are only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM). If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. 298 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11b/g IAP Settings 1. 802.11g Data Rates: The Array allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11g radios. Select (or deselect) 11g data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.

Basic Rate a wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate.

Supported Rate data rates that can be used to transmit to clients. 2. 802.11b Data Rates: This task is similar to Step 1, but these data rates apply only to 802.11b IAPs. 3. Data Rate Presets: The Wireless Array can optimize your 802.11b/g data rates automatically, based on range or throughput. Click Optimize Range button to optimize data rates based on range, or click on the Optimize Throughput to optimize data rates based on throughput. Restore Defaults will take you back to the factory default rate settings. 4. 802.11b/g IAP Control: Click Enable All 802.11b/g IAPs to enable all 802.11b/g IAPs for this Array, or click Disable All 802.11b/g IAPs to disable them. 5. Channel Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each 802.11b/g IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for channel allocation (see RF Spectrum Management on page 318). Click Factory Defaults if you wish to instruct the Array to return all IAPs to their factory preset channels. As of release 6.3, Arrays no longer all use the same factory preset values for channel assignments. Instead, if the Array has been deployed for a while and already has data from the spectrum analyzer and Xirrus Roaming Protocol about channel usage on neighboring arrays, it performs a quick auto channel using that information (without doing a full RF scan) to make an intelligent choice of channel assignments. If the Array has been rebooted and has no saved configuration or is just being deployed for the first time, it has no prior Configuring the Wireless Array 299 Wireless Array data about its RF environment. In this case, it will pick a set of compatible channel assignments at random. On the XR500 and XR-1000 Series Arrays, the Factory Defaults button will not restore iap1 to monitor mode. You will need to restore this setting manually. Also, you may need to set Timeshare Mode again - see RF Monitor on page 314. The following options may be selected for auto configuration:

Negotiate: negotiate air-time with other Arrays before performing a full scan.

Full Scan: perform a full traffic scan on all channels on all IAPs to determine the best channel allocation.

Non-Radar: give preference to channels without radar-detect. See table in Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11an IAP Settings on page 293.

Include WDS: automatically assign 5GHz to WDS client links. To use the Auto Cell Size feature, the following additional settings are required:

RF Monitor Mode must be turned On. See RF Monitor on page 314 One of the radios must be in monitor mode with the default RxdBm setting of -95, and all other IAPs that will use Auto Cell must have Cell Size set to auto. See Procedure for Manually Configuring IAPs on page 275. 6. Set Cell Size/ Autoconfigure: Cell Size may be set globally for all 802.11b/g IAPs to auto, large, medium, small, or max using the drop down menu. For an overview of RF power and cell size settings, please see RF Power

& Sensitivity on page 316, Capacity and Cell Sizes on page 30, and Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 31. 300 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 7. Auto Cell Period (seconds): You may set up auto-configuration to run periodically, readjusting optimal cell sizes for the current conditions. Enter a number of seconds to specify how often auto-configuration will run. If you select None, then auto-configuration of cell sizing will not be run periodically. You do not need to run Auto Cell often unless there are a lot of changes in the environment. If the RF environment is changing often, running Auto Cell every twenty-four hours (86400 seconds) should be sufficient). The default value is None. 8. Auto Cell Size Overlap (%): Enter the percentage of cell overlap that will be allowed when the Array is determining automatic cell sizes. For 100%

overlap, the power is adjusted such that neighboring Arrays that hear each other best will hear each other at -70dB. For 0% overlap, that number is -90dB. The default value is 50%. 9. Auto Cell Min Cell Size: Use this setting if you wish to set the minimum cell size that Auto Cell may assign. The values are Default, Large, Medium, or Small. 10. Auto Cell Min Tx Power (dBm): Enter the minimum transmit power that the Array can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. The default value is 10. 11. Auto Cell Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled 802.11b/g IAP whose Cell Size is auto on the IAP Settings window, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. You may look at the Tx and Rx values on the IAP Settings window to view the cell size settings that were applied. 12. 802.11g Only: Choose On to restrict use to 802.11g mode only. In this mode, no 802.11b rates are transmitted. Stations that only support 802.11b will not be able to associate. 13. 802.11g Protection: You should select Auto CTS or Auto RTS to provide automatic protection for all 802.11g radios in mixed networks (802.11 b and g). You may select Off to disable this feature, but this is not recommended. Protection allows 802.11g stations to share an IAP with Configuring the Wireless Array 301 Wireless Array older, slower 802.11b stations. Protection avoids collisions by preventing 802.11b and 802.11g stations from transmitting simultaneously. When Auto CTS or Auto RTS is enabled and any 802.11b station is associated to the IAP, additional frames are sent to gain access to the wireless network.

Auto CTS requires 802.11g stations to send a slow Clear To Send frame that locks out other stations. Automatic protection reduces 802.11g throughput when 802.11b stations are present Auto CTS adds less overhead than Auto RTS. The default value is Auto CTS.

With Auto RTS, 802.11g stations reserve the wireless media using a Request To Send/Clear To Send cycle. This mode is useful when you have dispersed nodes. It was originally used in 802.11b only networks to avoid collisions from hidden nodes nodes that are so widely dispersed that they can hear the Array, but not each other. When there are no 11b stations associated and an auto-protection mode is enabled, the Array will not send the extra frames, thus avoiding unnecessary overhead. 14. 802.11g Slot: Choose Auto to instruct the Array to manage the 802.11g slot times automatically, or choose Short Only. Xirrus recommends using Auto for this setting, especially if 802.11b devices are present. 15. 802.11b Preamble: The preamble contains information that the Array and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. All compliant 802.11b systems have to support the long preamble. A short preamble improves the efficiency of a network's throughput when transmitting special data, such as voice, VoIP (Voice-over IP) and streaming video. Select Auto to instruct the Array to manage the preamble (long and short) automatically, or choose Long Only. 16. Fragmentation Threshold: This is the maximum size for directed data packets transmitted over the 802.11b/g IAP. Larger frames fragment into several packets, their maximum size defined by the value you enter here. Enter the desired Fragmentation Threshold value, between 256 and 2346. 302 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 17. RTS Threshold: The RTS (Request To Send) Threshold specifies the packet size. Packets larger than the RTS threshold will use CTS/RTS prior to transmitting the packet useful for larger packets to help ensure the success of their transmission. Enter a value between 1 and 2347. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11n Advanced RF Settings LED Settings IAP Settings IAP Statistics Summary Configuring the Wireless Array 303 Wireless Array Global Settings .11n This window allows you to establish global 802.11n IAP settings. These settings include enabling or disabling 802.11n mode for the entire Array, specifying the number of transmit and receive chains (data stream) used for spatial multiplexing, setting a short or standard guard interval, auto-configuring channel bonding, and specifying whether auto-configured channel bonding will be static or dynamic. Before changing your settings for 802.11n, please read the discussion in IEEE 802.11n Deployment Considerations on page 35. Figure 151. Global Settings .11n 304 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11n IAP Settings 802.11n operation is allowed only if the Arrays license includes this feature. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. 1. 802.11n Data Rates: The Array allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11n radios. Select (or deselect) 11n data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.

Basic Rate a wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate.

Supported Rate data rates that can be used to transmit to clients. 2. 802.11n Mode: Select Enabled to allow the Array to operate in 802.11n mode. Use of this mode is controlled by the Arrays license key. The key must include 802.11n capability, or you will not be able to enable this mode. See License on page 107 to view the features supported by your license key. Contact Xirrus Customer support for questions about your license. If you select Disabled, then 802.11n operation is disabled on the Array. For XN Arrays, IAPs abgn1 though abgn4 will operate in 802.11abg mode; the 802.11a/n IAPs will operate in 802.11a mode. 3. TX Chains: Select the number of separate data streams transmitted by the antennas of each IAP. The default is 3. See Multiple Data Streams Spatial Multiplexing on page 38. 4. RX Chains: Select the number of separate data streams received by the antennas of each IAP. This number should be greater than or equal to TX Chains. The default is 3. See Multiple Data Streams Spatial Multiplexing on page 38. 5. Guard interval: Select Short to increase the data transmission rate by decreasing wait intervals in signal transmission. Select Long to use the standard interval. The default is Short. See Short Guard Interval on page 40. Configuring the Wireless Array 305 Wireless Array 6. Auto bond 5 GHz channels: Select Enabled to use Channel Bonding on 5 GHz channels and automatically select the best channels for bonding. The default is Enabled. See Channel Bonding on page 39. 7. 8. 5 GHz channel bonding: Select Dynamic to have auto-configuration for bonded 5 GHz channels be automatically updated as conditions change. For example, if there are too many clients to be supported by a bonded channel, dynamic mode will automatically break the bonded channel into two channels. Select Static to have the bonded channels remain the same once they are selected. The Dynamic option is only available when Auto bond 5 GHz channels is enabled. The default is Dynamic. See Channel Bonding on page 39. 2.4 GHz channel bonding: Select Dynamic to have auto-configuration for bonded 2.4 GHz channels be automatically updated as conditions change. Select Static to have the bonded channels remain the same once they are selected. The default is Dynamic. See Channel Bonding on page 39. 9. Global channel bonding: These buttons allow you to turn channel bonding on or off for all IAPs in one step. The effect of using one of these buttons will be shown if you go to the IAP Settings window and look at the Bond column. Clicking Enable bonding on all IAPs causes all IAPs to be bonded to their auto-bonding channel immediately, if appropriate. For example, an IAP will not be bonded if it is set to monitor mode, and 2.4 GHz radios will not be bonded. Click Disable bonding on all IAPs to turn off bonding on all IAPs immediately. See Channel Bonding on page 39. Settings in Step 7 and Step 8 are independent of global channel bonding. 306 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Global Settings .11u Understanding 802.11u As the number of access points available in public venues increases, mobile devices users have a harder time distinguishing usable SSIDs from the tens, if not hundreds of access points visible. Using the 802.11u protocol, access points may broadcast information about the services and access that they offer and to respond to queries for additional information related to the facilities that the downstream service network provides. The type of information broadcast or available from 802.11u-compliant access points includes:

Access Network Type. Indicates the type of network available. For example: public or private, free or charged, etc. Internet Connectivity. Indicates whether the network provides Internet connectivity. Authentication. Indicates whether additional authentication steps will be required to use the network as well as the network authentication types that are in use. Venue Information. The type and name of the location where the access point is found. Identification. A globally unique identification for the access point. IPv4/IPv6 Addressing. Indicate the type of IP addressing (IPv4 and/or IPv6) and NATing that is performed by the network. Roaming Consortium. The service network may be connected to one or more roaming providers, called consortia, that allow access points from multiple service providers to be used transparently through a single paid service. The access point may advertise multiple consortia to mobile devices. Domain Names. A list of domain names to which the mobile user may end up belonging based on authentication credentials used. Configuring the Wireless Array 307 Cellular Networks. The service network may have arrangements with one or more cellular service providers who can transparently provide wireless and Internet connectivity. Wireless Array Figure 152. 802.11u Global Settings Procedure for Configuring 802.11u Settings Use this window to establish the 802.11u configuration. 1. 802.11u Internetworking. Click On to enable 802.11u protocol operation. 2. Access Network Type: This indicates the type of network supported by the access point. The choices are:

308 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array a. Chargeable public network b. Emergency services only network c. Free public network d. Personal device network e. Private network with guest access f. Test or experimental network g. Wildcard 3. Internet Connectivity. Click Provided if Internet connectivity is available through the access point from the back end provider to which the mobile user ends up belonging. Click Unspecified otherwisefor example, depending on the SLAs (service level agreements) of the mobile user, Internet access may or may not be provided. 4. Additional Step Required for Access. Click Disabled if no additional authentication steps will be required to complete the connection and Enabled otherwise. The available authentication techniques are described in the Network Authentication Types field (Step 13). 5. Venue Group. Select the general type of venue that the access point is located in. Various choices are available, including Business, Residential, and Outdoor. For each Venue Group, a further set of sub-choices are available in the Venue Type field below. The particular name of the venue is specified in the Venue Names field (Step 14). 6. Venue Type. For each of the Venue Group choices, a further set of sub-

choices are available. For example, if you set Venue Group to Assembly, the choices include Amphitheater, Area, Library, and Theatre. 7. HESSID. Enter the globally unique homogeneous ESS ID. This SSID is marked as being HotSpot 2.0 capable. This SSID attribute is globalif 802.11u is enabled and HotSpot 2.0 is enabled, then all SSIDs will have HotSpot 2.0 capability. Configuring the Wireless Array 309 Wireless Array 8. IPv4 Availability. Select the type of IPv4 addressing that will be assigned by the network upon connection. NATed addresses are IP addresses that have been changed by mapping the IP address and port number to IP addresses and new port numbers routable by other networks. Double NATed addresses go through two levels of NATing. Port restricted IPv4 addresses refer to specific UDP and TCP port numbers associated with standard Internet services; for example, port 80 for web pages. The choices for this field are:

a. Double NATed private IPv4 address available b. c. IPv4 address not available IPv4 address availability not known d. Port-restricted IPv4 address available e. Port-restricted IPv4 address and double NATed IPv4 address available f. Port-restricted IPv4 address and single NATed IPv4 address available g. Public IPv4 address available h. Single NATed private IPv4 address available 9. IPv6 Availability. Select the type of IPv6 addressing that is available from the network upon connection. a. b. c. IPv6 address not available IPv6 address availability not known IPv6 address available 10. Roaming Consortium. Each of the roaming consortia has an organizational identifier (OI) obtained from IEEE that unique identifies the organization. This is similar to the OUI part of a MAC address. Use this control to build up a list of OIs for the consortia available. Enter the OI as a hexadecimal string of between 6 and 30 characters in the Add field 310 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array and click Add. The OI will appear in the list. An OI may be deleted by selecting it in the list and clicking Delete. All OIs may be deleted by clicking Reset. 11. Domain Names. Use this control to build up a list of domain names. Enter the name in the Add field and click Add, and it will appear in the list. A name may be deleted by selecting it in the list and clicking Delete. All names may be deleted by clicking Reset. 12. Cell Network. Each of the cell networks is identified by a mobile country code (MCC) and mobile network code (MNC). Use this control to build up a list of cell networks. Enter the MCC as a three digit number and the MNC as a two or three digit number and click Add. The cell network will appear in the list. A cell network may be deleted by selecting it in the list and clicking Delete. All networks may be deleted by clicking Reset. 13. Network Authentication Types. Each network authentication that is in use on the network should be specified in this list. The choices are:

a. Acceptance of terms and conditions. This choice displays a web page asking for the users acceptance of terms and conditions of use. The URL should be specified in the URL field before clicking Add. b. DNS redirection. c. HTTP/HTTPS redirection. This choice causes the users first web page reference to be redirected to a different URL for login or other information. The URL should be specified in the URL field before clicking Add. d. On-line enrollment supported. This choice indicates that the user may sign up for network access as part of the authentication process. When Add is clicked the authentication type and optional URL will appear in the list. An authentication type may be deleted by selecting it in the list and clicking Delete. All authentication types may be deleted by clicking Reset. Configuring the Wireless Array 311 Wireless Array 14. Venue Names. The list of names associated with the venue are specified here. A venue name may be added to the list in English or Chinese. Enter the name in the appropriate field and click Add. The name will appear in the list. A name may be deleted by selecting it in the list and clicking Delete. All names may be deleted by clicking Reset. 312 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Advanced RF Settings This window allows you to establish RF settings, including automatically configuring channel allocation and cell size, and configuring radio assurance and standby modes. Changes you make on this page are applied to all IAPs, without exception. Figure 153. Advanced RF Settings Configuring the Wireless Array 313 Wireless Array About Standby Mode Standby Mode supports the Array-to-Array fail-over capability. When you enable Standby Mode, the Array functions as a backup unit, and it enables its radios if it detects that its designated target Array has failed. The use of redundant Arrays to provide this fail-over capability allows Arrays to be used in mission-critical applications. In Standby Mode, an Array monitors beacons from the target Array. When the target has not been heard from for 40 seconds, the standby Array enables its radios until it detects that the target Array has come back online. Standby Mode is off by default. Note that you must ensure that the configuration of the standby Array is correct. This window allows you to enable or disable Standby Mode and specify the primary Array that is the target of the backup unit. See also, Failover Planning on page 42. Procedure for Configuring Advanced RF Settings Some of the features below, such as Auto Configure for Cell Size and Channel Configuration, are only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM). If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. Other features below, such as RF Intrusion Detection, are only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager

(RSM). RF Monitor 1. RF Monitor Mode: RF monitoring permits the operation of features like intrusion detection. The monitor may operate in Dedicated mode, or in Timeshare mode which allows the radio to divide its time between monitoring and acting as a standard radio that allows stations to associate to it. Timeshare mode is especially useful for small Arrays with two IAPs, such as the XR500 and XR-1000 Series, allowing one IAP to be shared between monitoring the airwaves for problems and providing services to stations. Settings allow you to give priority to monitoring or wireless services, depending on your needs. 314 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array If Timeshare mode is selected, you may adjust the following settings:

Timeshare Scanning Interval (6-600): number of seconds between monitor (off-channel) scans.

Timeshare Station Threshold (0-240): when the number of stations associated to the monitor radio exceeds this threshold, scanning is halted.

Timeshare Traffic Threshold (0-50000): when the number of packets per second handled by the monitor radio exceeds this threshold, scanning is halted. RF Resilience 2. Radio Assurance Mode: When this mode is enabled, the monitor radio performs loopback tests on the Array. This mode requires RF Monitor Mode to be enabled (Step 1) to enable self-monitoring functions. It also requires a radio to be set to monitoring mode (see Enabling Monitoring on the Array on page 460). Operation of Radio Assurance mode is described in detail in Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities on page 460. The Radio Assurance mode scans and sends out probe requests on each channel, in turn. It listens for all probe responses and beacons. These tests are performed continuously (24/7). If no beacons or probe responses are observed from a radio for a predetermined period, Radio Assurance mode will take action according to the preference that you have specified:

Failure alerts only The Array will issue alerts in the Syslog, but will not initiate repairs or reboots.

Failure alerts & repairs, but no reboots The Array will issue alerts and perform resets of one or all of the radios if needed.

Failure alerts & repairs & reboots if needed The Array will issue alerts, perform resets, and schedule reboots if needed.

Disabled Disable IAP radio assurance tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Loopback tests are disabled by default. Configuring the Wireless Array 315 Wireless Array 3. Enable Standby Mode: Choose Yes to enable this Array to function as a backup unit for the target Array, or choose No to disable this feature. See About Standby Mode on page 314. 4. Standby Target Address: If you enabled the Standby Mode, enter the MAC address of the target Array (i.e., the address of the primary Array that is being monitored and backed up by this Array). To find this MAC address, open the Array Info window on the target Array, and use the Gigabit1 MAC Address. RF Power & Sensitivity For an overview of RF power and cell size settings, please see Capacity and Cell Sizes on page 30 and Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 31. To use the Auto Cell Size feature, the following additional settings are required:

RF Monitor Mode must be turned On. See RF Monitor on page 314. One of the radios must be in monitor mode, and all other IAPs that will use Auto Cell must have Cell Size set to auto. See Procedure for Manually Configuring IAPs on page 275. 5. Set Cell Size: Cell Size may be set globally for all enabled IAPs to Auto, Large, Medium, Small, or Max using the buttons. 6. Auto Cell Period (seconds): You may set up auto-configuration to run periodically, readjusting optimal cell sizes for the current conditions. Enter a number of seconds to specify how often auto-configuration will run. If you select None, then auto-configuration of cell sizing will not be run periodically. You do not need to run Auto Cell often unless there are a lot of changes in the environment. If the RF environment is changing often, running Auto Cell every twenty-four hours (86400 seconds) should be sufficient). The default value is None. 316 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 7. Auto Cell Size Overlap (%): Enter the percentage of cell overlap that will be allowed when the Array is determining automatic cell sizes. For 100%

overlap, the power is adjusted such that neighboring Arrays that hear each other best will hear each other at -70dB. For 0% overlap, that number is -90dB. The default value is 50%. 8. Auto Cell Min Cell Size: Use this setting if you wish to set the minimum cell size that Auto Cell may assign. The values are Default, Large, Medium, or Small. 9. Auto Cell Min Tx Power (dBm): Enter the minimum transmit power that the Array can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. The default value is 10. 10. Auto Cell Configuration: Click this button to instruct the Array to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled IAP whose Cell Size is auto on the IAP Settings window, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. You may look at the Tx and Rx values on the IAP Settings window to view the cell size settings that were applied. 11. Sharp Cell: This feature reduces interference between neighboring Arrays or other Access Points by limiting to a defined boundary (cell size) the trailing edge bleed of RF energy. Choose On to enable the Sharp Cell functionality, or choose Off to disable this feature. See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 31. The Sharp Cell feature only works when the cell size is Small, Medium, or Large (or Auto) but not Max. If an IAP cell size is set to Max, the Sharp Cell feature will be disabled for that radio. Configuring the Wireless Array 317 Wireless Array RF Spectrum Management 12. Configuration Status: Shows the status of auto channel configuration. If an operation is in progress, the approximate time remaining until completion is displayed; otherwise Idle is displayed. 13. Band Configuration: Automatic band configuration is the recommended method for assigning bands to the abgn IAPs. It runs only on command, assigning IAPs to the 2.4GHz or 5GHz band when you click the Auto Configure button. The Array uses its radios to listen for other APs on the same channel, and it assigns bands based on where it finds the least interference. Auto band assigns as many IAPs to the 5 GHz band as possible when there are other Arrays within earshot. It does this by determining how many Arrays are in range and then picking the number of radios to place in the 2.4 GHz band. Note that for another Array to be considered to be in range, the other Array must be visible via both the wireless and wired networksthe Array must be listed in the Network Map table, its entry must have In Range set to Yes, and it must have at least one active IAP with an SSID that has broadcast enabled. Auto band runs separately from auto channel configuration. If the band is changed for an IAP, associated stations will be disconnected and will then reconnect. 14. Channel Configuration: Automatic channel configuration the recommended method for channel allocation. When the Array performs auto channel configuration, you may optionally instruct it to first negotiate with any other nearby Arrays that have been detected, to determine whether to stagger the start time for the procedure slightly. Thus, nearby Arrays will not run auto channel at the same time. This prevents Arrays from interfering with each others channel assignments. is The Configuration Status field displays whether an Auto Configure cycle is currently running on this Array or not. Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to determine the best channel allocation settings for each enabled IAP and select the channel 318 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for channel allocation (see RF Spectrum Management on page 318). The following options may be selected for auto configuration:

Negotiate: negotiate air-time with other Arrays before performing a full scan. Negotiating is slower, but if multiple Arrays are configuring channels at the same time the Negotiate option ensures that multiple Arrays don't select the same channels. Turning off the Negotiate option allows the Auto Configure button to manually perform auto channel without waiting, and may be used when you know that no other nearby Arrays are configuring their channels.

Full Scan: perform a full traffic scan on all channels on all IAPs to determine the best channel allocation.

Non-Radar: give preference to channels without radar-detect. See table in Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11an IAP Settings on page 293.

Include WDS: automatically assign 5GHz to WDS client links. Click Factory Defaults if you wish to instruct the Array to return all IAPs to their factory preset channels. As of release 6.3, Arrays no longer all use the same factory preset values for channel assignments. Instead, if the Array has been deployed for a while and already has data from the spectrum analyzer and Xirrus Roaming Protocol about channel usage on neighboring arrays, it performs a quick auto channel using that information (without doing a full RF scan) to make an intelligent choice of channel assignments. If the Array has been rebooted and has no saved configuration or is just being deployed for the first time, it has no prior data about its RF environment. In this case, it will pick a set of compatible channel assignments at random. On the XR-1000 Series Arrays, the Factory Defaults button will not restore iap1 to monitor mode. You will need to restore this setting manually. Also, you may need to set RF Monitor Mode to Timeshare Mode again -

see RF Monitor on page 314. Configuring the Wireless Array 319 Wireless Array 15. Auto Channel Configuration Mode: This option allows you to instruct the Array to auto-configure channel selection for each enabled IAP when the Array is powered up. Choose On Array PowerUp to enable this feature, or choose Disabled to disable this feature. 16. Auto Channel Configure on Time: This option allows you to instruct the Array to auto-configure channel selection for each enabled IAP at a time you specify here. Leave this field blank unless you want to specify a time at which the auto-configuration utility is initiated. Time is specified in hours and minutes, using the format: [day]hh:mm [am|pm]. If you omit the optional day specification, channel configuration will run daily at the specified time. If you do not specify am or pm, time is interpreted in 24-

hour military time. For example, Sat 11:00 pm and Saturday 23:00 are both acceptable and specify the same time. 17. Channel List Selection: This list selects which channels are available to the auto channel algorithm. Channels that are not checked are left out of the auto channel selection process. Note that channels that have been locked by the user are also not available to the auto channel algorithm. 18. Auto Channel List: Use All Channels selects all available channels (this does not include locked channels). Use Defaults sets the auto channel list back to the defaults. This omits newer channels (100-140) many wireless NICs dont support these channels. Station Assurance Station assurance monitors the quality of the connections that users are experiencing on the wireless network. You can quickly detect stations that are having problems and take steps to correct them. Use these settings to establish threshold values for errors and other problems. Station assurance is enabled by default, with a set of useful default thresholds that you may adjust as desired. When a connection is experiencing problems and reaches one of these thresholds in the specified period of time, the Array responds with several actions: an event is triggered, a trap is generated, and a Syslog message is logged. For example, if a client falls below the threshold for Min Average Associated Time, this bouncing behavior might indicate roaming problems with the networks RF 320 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array design, causing the client to bounce between multiple arrays and not stay connected longer than the time to re-associate and then jump again. This can be corrected with RF adjustments. Station assurance alerts you to the fact that this station is encountering problems. Figure 154. Station Assurance (Advanced RF Settings) 19. Enable Station Assurance: This is enabled by default. Click No if you wish to disable it, and click Yes to re-enable it. When station assurance is enabled, the Array will monitor connection quality indicators listed below and will display associated information on the Station Assurance Status page. When a threshold is reached, an event is triggered, a trap is generated, and a Syslog message is logged. 20. Period: In seconds, the period of time for a threshold to be reached. For example, the Array will check whether Max Authentication Failures has been reached in this number of seconds. 21. Min Average Associated Time: (seconds) Station assurance detects whether the average length of station associations falls below this threshold during a period. 22. Max Authentication Failures: Station assurance detects whether the number of failed login attempts reaches this threshold during a period. 23. Max Packet Error Rate: (%) Station assurance detects whether the packet error rate percentage reaches this threshold during a period. Configuring the Wireless Array 321 Wireless Array 24. Max Packet Retry Rate: (%) Station assurance detects whether the packet retry rate percentage reaches this threshold during a period. 25. Min Packet Data Rate: (Mbps) Station assurance detects whether the packet data rate falls below this threshold during a period. 26. Min Received Signal Strength: (dB) Station assurance detects whether the strength of the signal received from the station falls below this threshold during a period. 27. Min Signal to Noise Ratio: (dB) Station assurance detects whether the ratio of signal to noise received from the station falls below this threshold during a period. 28. Max Distance from Array: Min Received Signal Strength: (feet) Station assurance detects whether the distance of the station from the Array reaches this threshold during a period. See Also Coverage and Capacity Planning Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn Global Settings .11n IAPs IAP Settings Radio Assurance Hotspot 2.0 Understanding Hotspot 2.0 Hotspot 2.0 is a part of the Wi-Fi Alliances Passpoint certification program. It specifies additional information above and beyond that found in 802.11u, which allows mobile clients to automatically discover, select, and connect to networks based on preferences and network optimization. Mobile clients that support Hotspot 2.0 are informed of an access points support via its beacon message. Hotspot 2.0 messages forward several types of information to clients, including:

322 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Uplink and Downlink Speeds Link Status Friendly Name Connection Capabilities The access point will restrict the protocols that can be used by a specification of protocol and port numbers. Procedure for Hotspot 2.0 Settings Use this window to establish the Hotspot 2.0 configuration. 1. Hotspot 2.0. Click Enabled to enable Hotspot 2.0 operation. 2. Downstream Group-addressed Forwarding. Click Enabled to allow the access point to forward group-addressed traffic (broadcast and multicast) to all connected devices. Click Disabled to cause the access point to convert group-addressed traffic to unicast messages. 3. WAN Downlink Speed. Enter the WAN downlink speed in kbps into the field. 4. WAN Uplink Speed. Enter the WAN uplink speed in kbps into the field. Configuring the Wireless Array 323 Wireless Array Figure 155. Hotspot 2.0 Settings 5. English/Chinese Operator Friendly Name. Enter an English or Chinese name into one of the fields. An incorrectly entered name can be deleted by clicking the corresponding Delete. 6. Connection Capabilities. A Hotspot 2.0 access point limits the particular protocols that clients may use. The set of default protocols is shown initially. This table specifies the protocols in terms of:

a. A common Name, such as FTP or HTTP. b. A Protocol number. For example 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP, 17 for UDP, and 50 for Encapsulated Security Protocol in IPsec VPN connections. c. Port number for UDP/TCP connection. 324 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array d. Status: one of open, closed or unknown. Any of the entries may be deleted by clicking the corresponding Delete button. New entries may be created by entering the name of the protocol in the box beside the Create button, and then clicking Create. The new protocol will be added to the list with zeros in the protocol fields and unknown for the status. Enter the appropriate Protocol and Port values before setting the Status field to open. NAI Realms Understanding NAI Realm Authentication A network access identifier (NAI) is a specification of a particular user. A NAI takes the general form of e-mail addresses. Examples of NAIs are:

joe@example.com fred@foo-9.example.com jack@3rd.depts.example.com fred.smith@example.com Figure 156. NAI Realms the realms The NAI Realm is the part of the NAI following the @ sign. In the examples above, and foo-9.example.com. Use the NAI Realms page, in conjunction with the NAI EAP page, to specify the authentication techniques to be used to access that realm with appropriate parameters. 3rd.depts.example.com, example.com, are:

Procedure for NAI Realms Settings Use this window to establish the names of the supported realms. Configuring the Wireless Array 325 Wireless Array 1. Enter the realm name. Enter the name of a realm in the box to the left of the Create button and click Create. The realm will be added to the NAI Realms list. Any of the realms may be deleted by clicking the corresponding Delete button. 2. Enter Authentication Information. The NAI EAP page is used to specify authentication for a realm. Click on the name of a realm to go to the NAI EAP page for that realm. See NAI EAP on page 326. NAI EAP This window allows specification of the authentication techniques for a realm. Figure 157. NAI EAP Procedure for NAI Realms Settings 1. 2. Select the realm to be configured in the NAI Realm drop down. Select EAP Methods. Each realm may support up to five EAP authentication methods. Beside each of the five numbers (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) select the method from the drop down. The choices are:

EAP-AKA

EAP-AKA (EAP-AKA prime) 326 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array

EAP-FAST

EAP-MSCHAP-V2

EAP-SIM

EAP-TLS

EAP-TTLS

GTC

MD5-Challenge

None

PEAP 3. Specify Authentication Parameters. Each of the authentication methods may specify up to five authentication parameters. To specify the parameters click on the number corresponding to the authentication method; i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. This displays the EAP n Auth Parameter Configuration below the list of EAP Methods. For up to five of the parameters, select the Type and Value or Vendor ID / Type. The choices for the Type are:

Credential Type

Expanded EAP Method

Expanded Inner EAP Method

Inner Authentication EAP Method Type

Non-EAP Inner Authentication Type

None

Tunneled EAP Method Credential Type For each type, a value or a vendor ID and type must be specified, as applicable. Configuring the Wireless Array 327 Intrusion Detection The Xirrus Array employs a number of IDS/IPS (Intrusion Detection System/

Intrusion Prevention System) strategies to detect and prevent malicious attacks on the wireless network. Use this window to adjust intrusion detection settings. Wireless Array Figure 158. Intrusion Detection Settings The Array provides a suite of intrusion detection and prevention options to improve network security. You can separately enable detection of the following types of problems:

Rogue Access Point Detection and Blocking Unknown APs are detected, and may be automatically blocked based on a number of criteria. See About Blocking Rogue APs on page 331. 328 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Denial of Service (DoS) or Availability Attack Detection A DoS attack attempts to flood an Array with communications requests so that it cannot respond to legitimate traffic, or responds so slowly that it becomes effectively unavailable. The Array can detect a number of types of DoS attacks, as described in the table below. Impersonation Detection These malicious attacks use various techniques to impersonate a legitimate AP or station, often in order to eavesdrop on wireless communications. The Array detects a number of types of impersonation attacks, as described in the table below. Type of Attack DoS Attacks Beacon Flood Description Generating thousands of counterfeit 802.11 beacons to make it hard for stations to find a legitimate AP. Probe Request Flood Generating thousands of counterfeit 802.11 probe requests to overburden the Array. Authentication Flood Sending forged Authenticates from random MAC addresses to fill the Array's association table. Association Flood Disassociation Flood Deauthentication Flood Sending forged Associates from random MAC addresses to fill the Array's association table. Flooding the Array with forged Disassociation packets. Flooding the Array with forged Deauthenticates. EAP Handshake Flood Flooding an AP with EAP-Start messages to consume resources or crash the target. Null Probe Response Answering a station probe-request frame with a null SSID. Many types of popular NIC cards cannot handle this situation, and will freeze up. Configuring the Wireless Array 329 Wireless Array Type of Attack Description MIC Error Attack Generating invalid TKIP data to exceed the Array's MIC error threshold, suspending WLAN service. Disassociation Attack (Omerta) Sending forged disassociation frames to all stations on a channel in response to data frames. Deauthentication Attack Sending forged deauthentication frames to all stations on a channel in response to data frames. Duration Attack

(Duration Field Spoofing) Injecting packets into the WLAN with huge duration values. This forces the other nodes in the WLAN to keep quiet, since they cannot send any packet until this value counts down to zero. If the attacker sends such frames continuously it silences other nodes in the WLAN for long periods, thereby disrupting the entire wireless service. Impersonation Attacks AP impersonation Station impersonation Reconfiguring an attacker's MAC address to pose as an authorized AP. Administrators should take immediate steps to prevent the attacker from entering the WLAN. Reconfiguring an attacker's MAC address to pose as an authorized station. Administrators should take immediate steps to prevent the attacker from entering the WLAN. Evil twin attack Masquerading as an authorized AP by beaconing the WLAN's service set identifier (SSID) to lure users. Sequence number anomaly A sender may use an Add Block Address request (ADDBA

- part of the Block ACK mechanism) to specify a sequence number range for packets that the receiver can accept. An attacker spoofs an ADDBA request, asking the receiver to reset its sequence number window to a new range. This causes the receiver to drop legitimate frames, since their sequence numbers will not fall in that range. 330 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array About Blocking Rogue APs If you classify a rogue AP as blocked (see Rogue Control List on page 240), then the Array will take measures to prevent stations from staying associated to the rogue. When the monitor radio is scanning, any time it hears a beacon from a blocked rogue it sends out a broadcast deauth signal using the rogue's BSSID and source address. This has the effect of disconnecting all of a rogue APs clients approximately every 5 to 10 seconds, which is enough to make the rogue frustratingly unusable. The Advanced RF Settings window allows you to set up Auto Block parameters so that unknown APs get the same treatment as explicitly blocked APs. This is basically a shoot first and ask questions later mode. By default, auto blocking is turned off. Auto blocking provides two parameters for qualifying blocking so that APs must meet certain criteria before being blocked. This keeps the Array from blocking every AP that it detects. You may:

Set a minimum RSSI value for the AP for example, if an AP has an RSSI value of -90, it is probably a harmless AP belonging to a neighbor and not in your building. Block based on encryption level. Block based on whether the AP is part of an ad hoc network or infrastructure network. Procedure for Configuring Intrusion Detection RF Intrusion Detection and Auto Block Mode 1. Intrusion Detection Mode: This option allows you to choose the Standard intrusion detection method, or you can choose Off to disable this feature. See Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities on page 460 for more information.

Standard enables the monitor radio to collect Rogue AP information.

Off intrusion detection is disabled. Configuring the Wireless Array 331 Wireless Array 2. Auto Block Unknown Rogue APs: Enable or disable auto blocking (see About Blocking Rogue APs on page 331). Note that in order to set Auto Block RSSI and Auto Block Level, you must set Auto Block Unknown Rogue APs to On. Then the remaining Auto Block fields will be active. 3. Auto Block RSSI: Set the minimum RSSI for rogue APs to be blocked. APs with lower RSSI values will not be blocked. They are assumed to be farther away, and probably belonging to neighbors and posing a minimal threat. 4. Auto Block Level: Select rogue APs to block based on the level of encryption that they are using. The choices are:

Automatically block unknown rogue APs regardless of encryption.

Automatically block unknown rogue APs with no encryption.

Automatically block unknown rogue APs with WEP or no encryption. 5. Auto Block Network Types: Select rogues to automatically block by applying the criteria above only to networks of the type specified below. The choices are:

All the unknown rogues may be part of any wireless network.

IBSS/AD Hoc only only consider auto blocking rogues if they belong to an ad hoc wireless network (a network of client devices without a controlling Access Point, also called an Independent Basic Service Set IBSS).

ESS/Infrastructure only only consider auto blocking rogue APs if they are in infrastructure mode rather than ad hoc mode. DoS Attack Detection Settings 6. Attack/Event: The types of DoS attack that you may detect are described in the Type of Attack Table on page 329. Detection of each attack type may be separately enabled or disabled. For each attack, a default Threshold and Period (seconds) are specified. If the number of occurrences of the type of packet being detected exceeds the threshold in 332 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array the specified number of seconds, then the Array declares that an attack has been detected. You may modify the Threshold and Period. For the Flood attack settings, you also have a choice of Auto or Manual.

Manual mode threshold and period settings are used to detect a flood. Packets received are simply counted for the specified time period and compared against the flood threshold. The default for all of the floods is Manual mode.

Auto mode the Array analyzes current traffic for packets of a given type versus traffic over the past hour to determine whether a packet flood should be detected. In this mode, threshold and period settings are ignored. This mode is useful for floods like beacon or probe floods, where the numbers of such packets detected in the air can vary greatly from installation to installation. 7. Duration Attack NAV (ms): For the duration attack, you may also modify the default duration value that is used to determine whether a packet may be part of an attack. If the number of packets having at least this duration value exceeds the Threshold number in the specified Period, an attack is detected. Impersonation Detection Settings 8. Attack/Event: The types of impersonation attack that you may detect are described in Impersonation Attacks on page 330. Detection of each attack type may be turned On or Off separately. For AP or Station Impersonation attacks, a default Threshold and Period (seconds) are specified. If the number of occurrences of the type of packet being detected exceeds the threshold in the specified number of seconds, then the Array declares that an attack has been detected. You may modify the Threshold and Period. 9. Sequence number anomaly: You may specify whether to detect this type of attack in Data traffic or in Management traffic, or turn Off this type of detection. Configuring the Wireless Array 333 LED Settings This window assigns behavior preferences for the Arrays IAP LEDs. Wireless Array Figure 159. LED Settings Procedure for Configuring the IAP LEDs 1. LED State: This option determines which event triggers the LEDs, either when an IAP is enabled or when an IAP first associates with the network. Choose On Radio Enabled or On First Association, as desired. You may also choose Disabled to keep the LEDs from being lit. The LEDs will still light during the boot sequence, then turn off. 2. LED Blink Behavior: This option allows you to select when the IAP LEDs blink, based on the activities you check here. From the choices available, select one or more activities to trigger when the LEDs blink. For default behavior, see Array LED Operating Sequences on page 64. 3. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Global Settings (IAP) Global Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgn IAPs LED Boot Sequence 334 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array DSCP Mappings DSCP is the 6-bit Differentiated Services Code Point (DiffServ) field in the IPv4 or IPv6 packet header, defined in RFC2474 and RFC2475. The DSCP value classifies the packet to determine the Quality of Service (QoS) required. DSCP replaces the outdated Type of Service (TOS) field. The DSCP Mappings page shows the default mapping of each of the 64 DSCP values to one of the Arrays four QoS levels, and allows you to change these mappings. For a detailed discussion of the operation of QoS and DSCP mappings on the Array, please see Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array on page 244. Figure 160. DSCP Mappings Procedure for Configuring DSCP Mappings 1. DSCP to QoS Mapping Mode: Use the On and Off buttons to enable or disable the use of the DSCP mapping table to determine the QoS level applied to each packet. 2. DSCP to QoS Mapping: The radio buttons in this table show all DSCP values (0 to 63), and the QoS level to which each is mapped. To change the QoS level applied to a DSCP value, click the desired QoS level (0 to 3) underneath it. Configuring the Wireless Array 335 Wireless Array Roaming Assist Roaming assist is a Xirrus feature that helps clients roam to Arrays that will give them high quality connections. Some smart phones and tablets will stay connected to a radio with poor signal quality, even when theres a radio with better signal strength within range. When roaming assist is enabled, the Array assists the device by deauthenticating it when certain parameters are met. This encourages a client with a high roaming threshold (i.e., a device that may not roam until signal quality has seriously dropped) to move to an Array that gives it a better signal. The deauthentication is meant to cause the client to choose a different radio. You can specify the device types that will be assisted in roaming. The roaming threshold is the difference in signal strength between radios that will trigger a deauthentication. If the clients signal is lower than the sum of the threshold and the stronger neighbor radios RSSI, then we assist the client. For example:

Threshold = -5 RSSI of neighbor Array = -65 RSSI of client = -75

-75 < (-5 + -65) : Client will roam Another example:

Threshold = -15 RSSI of neighbor array = -60 RSSI of station = -70

-70 > (-15 + -60) : Client will not roam Procedure for Configuring Roaming Assist 1. Enable Roaming Assist: Use the Yes and No buttons to enable or disable this feature. 2. Backoff Period: After deauthenticating a station, it may re-associate to the same radio. To prevent the Array from repeatedly deauthenticating the station when it comes back, there is a backoff period. This is the number of seconds the station is allowed to stay connected before another deauthentication. 336 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 3. Roaming Threshold: This is the difference in signal strength between radios that will trigger a deauthentication, as described in the discussion above. In most cases, this will be a negative number. Figure 161. Roaming Assist 4. Minimum Data Rate: If the stations data rate (either Tx or Rx) falls below this rate, it will trigger a deauthentication. 5. Device Classes and Device Types: You can configure the device classes or types that will be assisted in roaming. Many small, embedded devices

(such as the default device types: phones, tablets, music players) are stickythey have high roaming thresholds that tend to keep them attached to the same radio despite the presence of radios with better signal strength. You may check off one or more entries, but use care since roaming assist may cause poor results in some cases. Configuring the Wireless Array 337 Wireless Array WDS This is a status-only window that provides an overview of all WDS links that have been defined. WDS (Wireless Distribution System) is a system that enables the interconnection of access points wirelessly, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple access points without the need for a wired backbone to link them. The Summary of WDS Client Links shows the WDS links that you have defined on this Array and identifies the target Array for each by its base MAC address. The Summary of WDS Host Links shows the WDS links that have been established on this Array as a result of client Arrays associating to this Array

(i.e., the client Arrays have this Array as their target). The summary identifies the source (client) Array for each link. Both summaries identify the IAPs that are part of the link and whether the connection for each is up or down. See WDS Planning on page 53 for an overview. Figure 162. WDS About Configuring WDS Links A WDS link connects a client Array and a host Array (see Figure 163 on page 339). The host must be the Array that has a wired connection to the LAN. Client links from one or more Arrays may be connected to the host, and the host may also have client links. See WDS Planning on page 53 for more illustrations. The configuration for WDS is performed on the client Array only, as described in WDS Client Links on page 340. No WDS configuration is performed on the host Array. First you will set up a client link, defining the target (host) Array and SSID, 338 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array and the maximum number of IAPs in the link. Then you will select the IAPs to be used in the link. When the client link is created, each member IAP will associate to an IAP on the host Array. You may wish to consider configuring the WDS link IAPs so that only the WDS link SSIDs are active on them. See Active IAPs on page 261. Client Link a2(52) a3(149) a4(40) a10(52) a9(149) a8(40) Wired LAN CLIENT HOST Figure 163. Configuring a WDS Link Once an IAP has been selected to act as a WDS client link, you will not be allowed to use auto-configured cell sizing on that IAP (since the cell must extend all the way to the other Array). When configuring WDS, if you use WPA-PSK (Pre-Shared Key) as a security mechanism, ensure that EAP is disabled. Communication between two Arrays in WDS mode will not succeed if the client Array has both PSK and EAP enabled on the SSID used by WDS. See SSID Management. TKIP encryption does not support high throughput rates, per IEEE 802.11n. TKIP should never be used for WDS links on XR and XN arrays. Long Distance Links If you are using WDS to provide backhaul over an extended distance, use the WDS Dist. (Miles) setting to prevent timeout problems associated with long transmission times. (See IAP Settings on page 274) Set the approximate distance Configuring the Wireless Array 339 in miles between this IAP and the connected Array in the WDS Dist. (Miles) column. This will increase the wait time for frame transmission accordingly. Wireless Array See Also SSID Management Active IAPs WDS Client Link IAP Assignments:

WDS Client Links WDS Statistics WDS Client Links This window allows you to set up a maximum of four WDS client links. Figure 164. WDS Client Links 340 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Procedure for Setting Up WDS Client Links WDS Client Link Settings:

1. Host Link Stations: Check the Allow checkbox to instruct the Array to allow stations to associate to IAPs on a host Array that participates in a WDS link. The WDS host IAP will send beacons announcing its availability to wireless clients. This is disabled by default. Once an IAP has been selected to act as a WDS client link, no other association will be allowed on that IAP. However, wireless associations will be allowed on the WDS host side of the WDS session. 2. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP): Check the Enable checkbox to instruct the Array to enforce the Spanning Tree Protocol on all WDS links. This is enabled by default. Use of STP is strongly recommended in most situations. However, in situations like the one in the next step, where WDS is used by an Array mounted on a high speed train, STP can add significant delay (often on the order of 30 to 60 seconds) while initially analyzing network topology. In such a situation, it may be desirable to disable STP. Caution: If STP is disabled and a network connection is made on the WDS Client Arrays Gigabit link that can reach the WDS Host Array, broadcast and multicast packets will not be blocked. A broadcast storm may cause a network outage. 3. Roaming RSSI Threshold: If an Array is deployed on a mobile site (on a train, for example), you can use WDS to implement a wireless backhaul that will roam between Arrays at fixed locations. When another candidate Array for WDS host target is found, the client link will roam to the new Array if its RSSI is stronger than the RSSI of the current host connection by at least the Roaming RSSI Threshold. The default is 6 dB. 4. Roaming RSSI Averaging Weight: This weight changes how much the latest RSSI reading influences the cumulative weighted RSSI value utilized in checking the threshold (above) to make a roaming decision. Configuring the Wireless Array 341 Wireless Array The higher the weight, the lower the influence of a new RSSI reading. This is not exactly a percentage, but a factor in the formula for computing the current RSSI value based on new readings:

StoredRSSI = (StoredRSSI * RoamingAvgWeight

+ NewRSSIReading * (100 - RoamingAvgWeight)) / 100 This prevents erroneous or out-of-line RSSI readings from causing the WDS link to jump to a new array. Such readings can result from temporary obstructions, external interference, etc. 5. Click Save changes to flash after you are finished making changes on this page if you wish to make your changes permanent. WDS Client Link IAP Setting:

6. Enable/Disable/Reset All Links: Click the appropriate button to:

Enable All Linksthis command activates all WDS links configured on the Array.

Disable All Linksthis command deactivates all WDS links configured on the Array. It leaves all your settings unchanged, ready to re-enable.

Reset All Linksthis command tears down all links configured on the Array and sets them back to their factory defaults, effective immediately. 7. Client Link: Shows the ID (1 to 4) of each of the four possible WDS links. 8. Enabled: Check this box if you want to enable this WDS link, or uncheck the box to disable the link. 9. Max IAPs Allowed (1-3): Enter the maximum number of IAPs for this link, between 1 and 3. 10. Target Array Base MAC Address: Enter the base MAC address of the target Array (the host Array at the other side of this link). To find this MAC address, open the WDS window on the target Array, and use This Array Address located on the right under the Summary of WDS Host 342 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Links. To allow any Xirrus Array to be accepted as a WDS target, enter the Xirrus OUI: 00:0f:7d:00:00:00 (this is useful for roaming in a mobile deployment, as described in Step 3 on page 341. 11. Target SSID: Enter the SSID that the target Array is using. 12. Username: Enter a username for this WDS link. A username and password is required if the SSID is using PEAP for WDS authentication from the internal RADIUS server. 13. Password: Enter a password for this WDS link. 14. Clear Settings: Click on the Clear button to reset all of the fields on this line. WDS Client Link IAP Assignments:

15. For each desired client link, select the IAPs that are part of that link. The IAP channel assignments are shown in the column headers. 16. IAP Channel Assignment: Click Auto Configure to instruct the Array to automatically determine the best channel allocation settings for each IAP that participates in a WDS link, based on changes in the environment. These changes are executed immediately, and are automatically applied. See Also SSID Management WDS Planning WDS WDS Statistics Configuring the Wireless Array 343 Wireless Array Filters This feature is only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM). If a setting is unavailable

(grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. Please see About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. The Wireless Arrays integrated firewall uses stateful inspection to speed the decision of whether to allow or deny traffic. Filters are used to define the rules used for blocking or passing traffic. Filters can also set the VLAN and QoS level for selected traffic. The air cleaner feature offers a number of predetermined filter rules that eliminate a great deal of unnecessary wireless traffic. See Air Cleaner on page 403. Orange arrow expands/collapses display Figure 165. Filters User connections managed by the firewall are maintained statefully once a user flow is established through the Array, it is recognized and passed through 344 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array without application of all defined filtering rules. Stateful inspection runs automatically on the Array. The rest of this section describes how to view and manage filters. Filters are organized in groups, called Filter Lists. A filter list allows you to apply a uniform set of filters to SSIDs or Groups very easily. The read-only Filters window provides you with an overview of all filter lists that have been defined for this Array, and the filters that have been created in each list. Filters are listed in the left side column by name under the filter list to which they belong. Each filter entry is a link that takes you to its Filter Management entry, and the list includes information about the type of filter, the protocol it is filtering, which port it applies to, source and destination addresses, and QoS and VLAN assignments. Filter Lists This window allows you to create filter lists. The Array comes with one predefined list, named Global, which cannot be deleted. Filter lists (including Global) may be applied to SSIDs or to Groups. Only one filter list at a time may be applied to a group or SSID (although the filter list may contain a number of filters). All filters are created within filter lists. Figure 166. Filter Lists Configuring the Wireless Array 345 Wireless Array Procedure for Managing Filter Lists 1. Stateful Filtering: Stateful operation of the integrated firewall can be Enabled or Disabled. If you have a large number of filters and you dont want to apply them in a stateful manner, you may use this option to turn the firewall off. 2. Application Control: Operation of the Application Control feature may be Enabled or Disabled. See Application Control Windows on page 150. The Application Control feature is only available if the Array license includes Application Control. If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. Application Control data is only available from XR Series Array models. It is not available on XN Arrays. 3. New Filter List Name: Enter a name for the new filter list in this field, then click on the Create button to create the list. All new filters are disabled when they are created. The new filter list is added to the Filter List table in the window. Click on the filter list name, and you will be taken to the Filter Management window for that filter list. 4. On: Check this box to enable this filter list, or leave it blank to disable the list. If the list is disabled, you may still add filters to it or modify it, but none of the filters will be applied to data traffic. 5. Filters: This read-only field displays the number of filters that belong to this filter list. 6. SSIDs: This read-only field lists the SSIDs that use this filter list. 7. User Groups: This read-only field lists the Groups that use this filter list. 8. Delete: Click this button to delete this filter list. The Global filter list may not be deleted. 346 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 9. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. 10. Click a filter list to go to the Filter Management window to create and manage the filters that belong to this list. Filter Management This window allows you to create and manage filters that belong to a selected filter list, based on the filter criteria you specify. Filters are an especially powerful feature when combined with the intelligence provided by the Application Control Windows on page 150. Filters are applied in order, from top to bottom. Click here to change the order. Figure 167. Filter Management Configuring the Wireless Array 347 Wireless Array Based on Application Controls analysis of your wireless traffic, you can create filters to enhance wireless usage for your business needs:

Usage of non-productive and risky applications like BitTorrent can be restricted. Traffic for mission-critical applications like VoIP and WebEx may be given higher priority (QoS). Non- critical traffic from applications like YouTube may be given lower priority (QoS). Traffic flows for specific applications may be controlled by sending them into VLANs that are designated for that type of traffic. Note that filtering is secondary to the stateful inspection performed by the integrated firewall. Traffic for established connections is passed through without the application of these filtering rules. Procedure for Managing Filters 1. Filter List: Select the filter list to display and manage on this window. All of the filters already defined for this list are shown, and you may create additional filters for this list. 2. Add Preset Filter: A number of predefined Air Cleaner filters are available using these buttons. You can use these rules to eliminate a great deal of unnecessary wireless traffic, resulting in improved performance. For more information, please see Air Cleaner on page 403. 3. New Filter Name: To add a new filter, enter its name in the field next to the Create button at the bottom of the list, then click Create . All new filters are added to the table of filters in the window. The filter name must be unique within the list, but it may have the same name as a filter in a different filter list. Two filters with the same name in different filter lists will be completely unrelated to each other they may be defined with different parameter values. 348 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Viewing or modifying existing filter entries:

4. Filter: Select a filter entry if you wish to modify it. Source and destination details are displayed below the bottom of the list. 5. On: Use this field to enable or disable this filter. 6. Log: Log usage of this filter to Syslog. 7. Type: Choose whether this filter will be an Allow filter or a Deny filter. If you define the filter as an Allow filter, then any associations that meet the filter criteria will be allowed. If you define the filter as a Deny filter, any associations that meet the filter criteria will be denied. 8. Layer: Select network layer 2 or 3 for operation of this filter. 9. Protocol/Number: Choose a specific filter protocol from the pull-down list, or choose numeric and enter a Number, or choose any to instruct the Array to use the best filter. This is a match criterion. 10. Port/Number: This is a match criterion. From the pull-down list, choose the target port type for this filter. Choose any to instruct the Array to apply the filter to any port, or choose 1-65534 and enter a Number. To enter a Range of port numbers, separate the start and end numbers with a colon as shown: Start # : End #. 11. QoS: (Optional) Set packets that match the filter criteria to this QoS level

(0 to 3), selected from the pull-down list. Level 0 has the lowest priority;

level 3 has the highest priority. By default, this field is blank and the filter does not modify QoS level. See Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array on page 244. 12. VLAN/Number: (Optional) Set packets that match the filter criteria to this VLAN. Select a VLAN from the pull-down list, or select numeric and enter the number of a previously defined VLAN (see VLANs on page 199). Configuring the Wireless Array 349 Wireless Array 13. Move Up/Down: The filters are applied in the order in which they are displayed in the list, with filters on the top applied first. To change an entrys position in the list, just click its Up or Down button. 14. To delete a filter, click its Delete button. Select an existing filter entry in the list to view or modify the following, shown below the list of filters:

15. Source Address: Define a source address to match as a filter criterion. Click the radio button for the desired type of address (or other attribute) to match. Then specify the value to match in the field to the right of the button. Choose Any to use any source address. Check Not to match any address except for the specified address. 16. Destination Address: Define a destination address to match as a filter criterion. Click the radio button for the desired type of address (or other attribute) to match. Then specify the value to match in the field to the right of the button. Choose any to use any source address. Check Not to match any address except for the specified address. Below the Source and Destination Addresses, you may enter a Category or an Application to be matched by the filter:

17. Category: If you wish this filter to apply to a particular category of application, such as File-Transfer or Database, select it from the listed options. Figure 168. Filter Category or Application 350 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array 18. Applications: If you wish this filter to apply to a specific application, such as WebEx, click the letter or number that it starts with. Then select the desired application. You may select a Category or an Application, but not both. 19. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. See Also Filters Filter Statistics Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless Array VLANs Configuring the Wireless Array 351 Wireless Array Clusters This feature is not avialable on XR500 Series Arrays. Clusters allow you to configure multiple Arrays at the same time. Using WMI (or CLI), you may define a set of Arrays that are members of the cluster. Then you may enter Cluster mode for a selected cluster, which sends all successive configuration commands issued via CLI or WMI to all of the member Arrays. When you exit cluster mode, configuration commands revert to applying only to the Array to which you are connected. The read-only Clusters window provides you with an overview of all clusters that have been defined for this Array, and the Arrays that have been added to each. Arrays are listed in the left hand column by name under the cluster to which they belong. Each Array entry displays its IP Address, Username, and Password. Figure 169. Clusters Clusters are discussed in the following topics:

Cluster Definition Cluster Management Cluster Operation 352 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Cluster Definition This window allows you to create clusters. All existing clusters are shown, along with the number of Arrays currently in each. Up to 16 clusters may be created, with up to 50 Arrays in each. Figure 170. Cluster Definition Procedure for Managing Cluster Definition 1. New Cluster Name: Enter a name for the new cluster in the field to the left of the Create button, then click Create to add this entry. The new cluster is added to the list in the window. Click on the cluster name, and you will be taken to the Cluster Management window for that cluster. 2. Delete: To delete a cluster, click its Delete button. 3. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. 4. Click a cluster to go to the Cluster Management window to add or remove Arrays in the cluster. Configuring the Wireless Array 353 Wireless Array Cluster Management This window allows you to add Arrays to or delete them from a selected cluster. A cluster may include a maximum of 50 Arrays. Note that the Array on which you are currently running WMI is not automatically a member of the cluster. If you would like it to be a member, you must add it explicitly. Figure 171. Cluster Management Procedure for Managing Clusters 1. Edit Cluster: Select the cluster to display and manage on this window. All of the Arrays already defined for this cluster are shown, and you may add additional Arrays to this list. 2. Array: Enter the hostname or IP address of the Array that you wish to add to this cluster. 3. Username/Password: In these columns, enter the administrator name and password for access to the Array. 4. Click the Add Array button to enter the Array. 5. To delete an Array, click its Delete button. 6. Click Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. 354 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Cluster Operation This window puts WMI into Cluster Mode. In this mode, all configuration operations that you execute in WMI or CLI are performed on the members of the cluster. They are not performed on the Array where you are running WMI, unless it is a member of the cluster. An XR-1000 Series Array cannot act as the Cluster controller. It will operate correctly as a member of a cluster. You must use the Save changes to flash button at the top of configuration windows to permanently save your changes in Cluster Mode, just as you would in normal operation. When you are done configuring Arrays in the cluster, return to this window and click the Exit button to leave Cluster Mode. Figure 172. Cluster Mode Operation Procedure for Operating in Cluster Mode 1. Operate: Click the Operate button to the right of the desired cluster. A message informs you that you are operating in cluster mode. Click OK. The Operate button is replaced with an Exit button. Figure 173. Cluster Mode Activation Configuring the Wireless Array 355 Wireless Array 2. Select a WMI window for settings that you wish to configure for the cluster, and proceed to make the desired changes. 3. Proceed to any additional pages where you wish to make changes. 4. Some Status and Statistics windows will present information for all Arrays in the cluster. 5. Click the Save button when done if you wish to save changes on the cluster member Arrays. 6. Exit: Click the Exit button to the right of the operating cluster to terminate Cluster Mode. The WMI returns to normal operation managing only the Array to which it is connected. Status and Statistics Windows in Cluster Mode In Cluster Mode, many of the Status and Statistics windows will display information for all of the members of the cluster. You can tell whether a window displays cluster information if so, it will display the Cluster Name near the top, as shown in Figure 174. Specify Grouping Cluster Name Exit Cluster Mode Figure 174. Viewing Statistics in Cluster Mode 356 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array You have the option to show aggregate information for the cluster members, or click the Group by Array check box to separate it out for each Array. You may terminate cluster mode operation by clicking the Exit button to the right of the Group by Array check box. Configuring the Wireless Array 357 Wireless Array 358 Configuring the Wireless Array Wireless Array Using Tools on the Wireless Array These WMI windows allow you to perform administrative tasks on your Array, such as upgrading software, rebooting, uploading and downloading configuration files, and other utility tasks. Tools are described in the following sections:

System Tools on page 360 CLI on page 371 Options on page 373 Logout on page 376 Note that the Tools menu section may be collapsed down to hide the headings under it by clicking it. Click again to display the headings. (See Figure 43 on page 89) This section does not discuss using status or configuration windows. For information on those windows, please see:

Viewing Status on the Wireless Array on page 95 Configuring the Wireless Array on page 159 Using Tools on the Wireless Array 359 System Tools This window allows you to manage files for software images, configuration, and Web Page Redirect (WPR), manage the systems configuration parameters, reboot the system, and use diagnostic tools. Wireless Array Status is shown here Progress is shown here Figure 175. System Tools 360 Using Tools on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Some tools, such as Network Tools and Diagnostics, are only available if the Arrays license includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager

(RAM). If a tool is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. About Licensing and Upgrades The Arrays license determines many of the features that are available on the Array. For example, automatic cell sizing and channel allocation require a license that includes the Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM). Also, IEEE 802.11n operation on XN model Arrays is a licensed feature. To check the features supported by your license, see Array Information on page 101. If you are upgrading the Array to add new features that are not supported by your existing license, you must enter the new license key that includes the upgrades features before upgrading. Similarly, if you are upgrading the Array for a new release, you must enter the new license key that enables the operation of that release before upgrading. If you do not enter the new license first, the Array will display a message and revert to the previous software image, rather than trying to run new software for which it is not licensed. Major releases will need a new license key, but minor releases will not. For example, to upgrade from ArrayOS Release 5.0.5 to Release 5.1, you must enter a new license key. To upgrade from ArrayOS Release 5.0.5 to Release 5.0.6, use your existing license key. If you will be entering license keys and performing upgrades on many Arrays, the effort will be streamlined by using the Xirrus Management System (XMS). Procedure for Configuring System Tools These tools are broken down into the following sections:

System Configuration Diagnostics Web Page Redirect Using Tools on the Wireless Array 361 Wireless Array Network Tools Progress and Status Frames System 1. Save & Reboot or Reboot: Use Save & Reboot to save the current configuration and then reboot the Array. The LEDs on the Array indicate the progress of the reboot, as described in Powering Up the Wireless Array on page 63. Alternatively, use the Reboot button to discard any configuration changes which have not been saved since the last reboot. You may specify an optional Delay period in seconds to wait before the reboot starts. 2. Software Upgrade: This feature upgrades the ArrayOS to a newer version provided by Xirrus. Please note that you typically will need to enter a new license key to cover the upgrades features before clicking the Upgrade button. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361 for details. Enter the filename and directory location (or click on the Browse button to locate the software upgrade file), then click on the Upgrade button to upload the new file to the Array. Progress of the operation will be displayed below, in the Progress section. Completion status of the operation is shown in the Status section. This operation does not run the new software or change any configured values. The existing software continues to run on the Array until you reboot, at which time the uploaded software will be used. If you have difficulty upgrading the Array using the WMI, see Upgrading the Array via CLI on page 464 for a lower-level procedure you may use. Software Upgrade always uploads the file in binary mode. If you transfer any image file to your computer to have it available for the Software Upgrade command, it is critical to remember to transfer it (ftp, tftp) in binary mode!

362 Using Tools on the Wireless Array Wireless Array 3. License Key: If Xirrus provides you with a new license key for your Array, use this field to enter it, then click the Apply button to the right. A valid license is required for Array operation, and it controls the features available on the Array. If you upgrade your Array for additional features, you will be provided with a license key to activate those capabilities. If you attempt to enter an invalid key, you will receive an error message and the current key will not be replaced. Automatic Updates from Remote Image or Configuration File The Array software image or configuration file can be downloaded from an external server. In large deployments, all Arrays can be pointed to one TFTP server instead of explicitly initiating software image uploads to all Arrays. When the Array boots, the Array will download the software image from the specified TFTP server. Similarly, if you decide to change a setting in the Arrays, you can simply modify a single configuration file. After the Arrays are rebooted, they will automatically download the new configuration file from a single location on the specified TFTP server. 4. Remote TFTP Server: This field defines the path to a TFTP server to be used for automated remote update of software image and configuration files when rebooting. You may specify the server using an IP address or host name. 5. Remote Boot Image: When the Array boots up, it fetches the software image file specified here from the TFTP server defined above, and upgrades to this image before booting. This must be an Array image file with a .bin extension. Make sure to place the file on the TFTP server. If you disable the remote boot image (by blanking out this field) or if the image can't be transferred, the Array will fall back to booting whatever image is on the compact flash. Using Tools on the Wireless Array 363 Wireless Array The Remote Boot Image or Configuration update happens every time that the Array reboots. If you only want to fetch the remote image or configuration file one time, be sure to turn off the remote option (blank out the field on the System Tools page) after the initial download. When a remote boot image is used, the image is transferred directly into memory and is never written to the compact flash. 6. Remote Configuration: When the Array boots up, it fetches the specified configuration file from the TFTP server defined above, and applies this configuration after the local configuration is applied. The remote configuration must be an Array configuration file with a .conf extension. Make sure to place the file on the TFTP server. A partial configuration file may be used. For instance, if you wish to use a single configuration file for all of your Arrays but don't want to have the same IP address for each Array, you may remove the ipaddr line from the file. You can then load the file on each Array and the local IP addresses will not change. A remote configuration is never saved to the compact flash unless you issue a Save command. Configuration 7. Update from Remote File: This field allows you to define the path to a configuration file (one that you previously saved see Step 9 and Step 10 below). Click on the Browse button if you need to browse for the location of the file, then click Update to update your configuration settings. 8. Update from Local File: This field updates Array settings from a local configuration file on the Array. Select one of the following files from the drop-down list:

factory.conf: The factory default settings.

lastboot.conf: The setting values from just before the last reboot.

saved.conf: The last settings that were explicitly saved using the Save changes to flash button at the top of each window. 364 Using Tools on the Wireless Array Wireless Array

history/saved-yyyymmdd-pre-update.conf:

history/saved-yyyymmdd-post-update.conf:

Two files are saved for an upgrade: the setting values from just before an upgrade was performed, and the initial values afterward. The filename includes the upgrade date.

history/saved-yyyymmdd-auto.conf: Each time you use the Save changes to flash button, an auto file is saved with the settings current at that time.

history/saved-yyyymmdd-pre-reset.conf:

history/saved-yyyymmdd-post-reset.conf:

Each time you use one of the Reset to Factory Default buttons, two files are saved: the setting values from just before the reset, and the initial values afterward. The filename includes the reset date.

history/saved-yyyymmdd-hhmm.conf: The setting values that were explicitly saved using the Set Restore Point button (see Step 9 below). Click Update to update your configuration settings. Note that the History folder allows a maximum of 16 files. The oldest file is automatically deleted to make room for each new file. 9. Save to Local File: There are a few options for explicitly requesting the Array to save your current configuration to a file on the Array:

To view the list of configuration files currently on the Array, click the down arrow to the right of this field. If you wish to replace one of these files (i.e., save the current configuration under an existing file name), select the file, then click Save. Note that you cannot save to the file names factory.conf, lastboot.conf, and saved.conf - these files are write-protected.

You may enter the desired file name, then click Save.

Click Set Restore Point to save a copy of the current configuration, basing the file name on the current date and time. For example:

history/saved-20100318-1842.conf Using Tools on the Wireless Array 365 Note that the configuration is automatically saved to a file in a few situations, as described in Step 8 above. Wireless Array Important! When you have initially configured your Array, or have made significant changes to its configuration, we strongly recommend that you save the configuration to a file in order to have a safe backup of your working configuration. 10. Download Current Configuration: Click on titled xs_current.conf to download the Arrays current configuration settings to a file (that you can upload back to the Array at a later date). The system will prompt you for a destination for the file. The file will contain the Arrays current configuration values. link the 11. Reset to Factory Defaults: Click on the Reset/Preserve IP Settings button to reset the systems current configuration settings to the factory default values, except for the Arrays management IP address which is left unchanged. This function allows you to maintain management connectivity to the Array even after the reset. This will retain the Gigabit Ethernet ports IP address (see Network Interfaces on page 171), or if you have configured management over a VLAN it will maintain the management VLANs IP address (see VLAN Management on page 201). All other previous configuration settings will be lost. Click Reset to reset all of the systems current configuration settings to the factory default values, including the management IP address all previous configuration settings will be lost. The Arrays Gigabit Ethernet ports default to using DHCP to obtain an IP address. If the IP settings change, the connection to the WMI may be lost. Diagnostics 12. Diagnostic Log: Click the Create button to save a snapshot of Array information for use by Xirrus Customer Support personnel. The Progress and Status Frames show the progress of this operation. When the process 366 Using Tools on the Wireless Array Wireless Array is complete, the filename xs_diagnostic.log will be displayed in blue and provides a link to the newly created log file. Click the link to download this file to the C:\ folder on your local computer. (Figure 176) Click Create to create log Then click this link to save log file to local computer Figure 176. Saving the Diagnostic Log This feature is only used at the request of Customer Support. It saves all of the information regarding your Array, including status, configuration, statistics, log files, and recently performed actions. The diagnostic log is always saved as a file named xs_diagnostic.log on your C:\ drive, so you should immediately rename the file to save it. This way, it will not be lost the next time you save a diagnostic log. Often, Customer Support will instruct you to save two diagnostic logs about ten minutes apart so that they can examine the difference in statistics between the two snapshots (for example, to see traffic and error statistics for the interval). Thus, you must rename the first diagnostic log file. All passwords are stored on the array in an encrypted form and will not be exposed in the diagnostic log. Using Tools on the Wireless Array 367 Wireless Array Web Page Redirect The Array uses a Perl script and a cascading style sheet to define the default splash/login Web page that the Array delivers for WPR. You may replace these files with files for one or more custom pages of your own. See Step 15 below to view the default files. See Step 14 on page 253 for more information about WPR and how the splash/login page is used. Each SSID that has WPR enabled may have its own page. Custom files for a specific SSID must be named based on the SSID name. For example, if the SSID is named Public, the default wpr.pl and hs.css files should be modified as desired and renamed to wpr-Public.pl and hs-Public.css before uploading to the Array. If you modify and upload files named wpr.pl and hs.css, they will replace the factory default files and will be used for any SSID that does not have its own custom files, per the naming convention just described. Be careful not to replace the default files unintentionally. Figure 177. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files 13. Upload File: Use this to install files for your own custom WPR splash/

login page (as described above) on the Array. Note that uploaded files are not immediately used - you must reboot the Array first. At that time, the Array looks for and uses these files, if found. Enter the filename and directory location (or click Browse to locate the splash/login page files), then click on the Upload button to upload the new files to the Array. You must reboot to make your changes take effect. 368 Using Tools on the Wireless Array Wireless Array 14. Remove File: Enter the name of the WPR file you want to remove, then click on the Delete button. You can use the List Files button to show you a list of files that have been saved on the Array for WPR. The list is displayed in the Status section at the bottom of the WMI window. You must reboot to make your changes take effect. 15. Download Sample Files: Click on a link to access the corresponding sample WPR files:

wpr.pl a sample Perl script.

hs.css a sample cascading style sheet. Network Tools Figure 178. System Command (Ping) 16. System Command: Choose Trace Route, Ping., or RADIUS Ping. For Trace Route and Ping, fill in IP Address and Timeout. Then click the Execute button to run the command. The RADIUS Ping command is a simple utility that tests connectivity to a RADIUS server by attempting to log in with the specified Username and Password. When using a RADIUS server, this command allows you to verify that the server configuration is correct and whether a particular Username and Password are set up properly. If a client is having trouble Using Tools on the Wireless Array 369 Wireless Array accessing the network, you can quickly determine if there is a basic RADIUS problem by using the RADIUS Ping tool. For example, in Figure 179 (A), RADIUS Ping is unable to contact the server. In Figure 179

(B), RADIUS Ping verifies that the host information and secret for a RADIUS server are correct, but that the user account information is not. Select RADIUS allows you to select a RADIUS server that you have already configured. When you make a choice in this field, additional fields will be displayed. Set Select RADIUS to External Radius, Internal Radius, or a server specified for a particular SSID, or select Other Server to specify another server by entering its Host name or IP address, Port, and shared Secret. Enter the RADIUS Credentials: Username and Password. Select the Authentication Type, PAP or CHAP. Click the Execute button to run the command. The message Testing RADIUS connection appears. Click OK to proceed. A B Figure 179. Radius Ping Output 17. IP Address: For Ping or Trace Route, enter the IP address of the target device. 18. Timeout: For Ping or Trace Route, enter a value (in seconds) before the action times out. 370 Using Tools on the Wireless Array Wireless Array 19. Execute System Command: Click Execute to start the specified command. Progress of command execution is displayed in the Progress frame. Results are displayed in the Status frame. Progress and Status Frames The Progress frame displays a progress bar for commands such as Software Upgrade and Ping. The Status frame presents the output from system commands (Ping and Trace Route), as well as other information, such as the results of software upgrade. 20. If you want to save the parameters you established in this window for future sessions, click on the Save changes to flash button. CLI The WMI provides this window to allow you to use the Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI). You can enter commands to configure the Array, or display information using show commands. You will not need to log in - you already logged in to the Array when you started the WMI. Figure 180. CLI Window Using Tools on the Wireless Array 371 Wireless Array To enter a command, simply type it in. The command is echoed and output is shown in the normal way that is, the same way it would be if you were using the CLI directly. You may use the extra scroll bar inside the right edge of the window to scroll through your output. If output runs past the right edge of the screen, there is also a horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the page. This window has some minor differences, compared to direct use of the CLI via the console or an SSH connection:

The CLI starts in config mode. All configuration and show commands are available in this mode. You can drill down the mode further in the usual way. For example, you can type interface iap to change the mode to config-iap. The prompt will indicate the current command mode, for example:

My-Array(config-iap) #

You can abbreviate a command and it will be executed if you have typed enough of the command to be unambiguous. The command will not auto-complete, however. Only the abbreviated command that you actually typed will be shown. You can type a partial command and press Tab to have the command auto-complete. If the partial command is ambiguous a list of legal endings is displayed. Entering quit will return you to the previously viewed WMI page. Most, but not all, CLI commands can be run in this window. Specifically the run-test menu of commands is not available in this window. To use the run-test command, please connect using SSH and use CLI directly, or use the System Tools described in this chapter, such as Trace Route, Ping, and RADIUS Ping. Help commands (the ? character) are available, either at the prompt or after you have typed part of a command. 372 Using Tools on the Wireless Array Wireless Array Options This window allows you to customize the behavior and appearance of the WMI. By default, the Array uses the New style option, shown below. Figure 181. WMI Display Options Procedure for Configuring Options 1. Style: This option allows you to change the appearance and operation of the user interface. Select one of the available styles from the drop-down list. Click the Apply button to view the WMI with the selected style. Note that some styles just change the display appearance (the skin) of WMI, in much the same way as changing the display theme used in Windows 7. Other styles include more extensive changes to the interface. Using Tools on the Wireless Array 373 Wireless Array Figure 182. iPhone Style Option For example, the iPhone style option (Figure 182) has a more compact display, suitable for use on smart phones. It shows the main menu in the orange bar at the top, rather than as a tree in its own frame on the left. Clicking one of the menu choices at the top in Figure 182 will display a drop-down menu with the options for that menu choice. Menus may be toggled on and off by clicking on the headers (Status, Configuration, etc.). 2. Refresh Interval in Seconds: Many of the windows in the Status section of the WMI have an Auto Refresh option. You may use this setting to change how often a status or statistics window is refreshed, if its auto refresh option is enabled. Enter the desired number of seconds between refreshes. The default refresh interval is 30 seconds. 374 Using Tools on the Wireless Array Wireless Array 3. Close Menu Section when Deselected: When you click a main section such as SSIDs in the left frame of the WMI (the navigation tree), the section is expanded to show submenu choices. Click Yes to automatically close any open submenus when you select a different section. If you click No, all menu sections will remain expanded once opened. No is the default. Note that if you enable this feature and you expand a section by clicking its orange arrow, the section will stay open as you select windows in other menu sections. 4. Clear Screen When Loading New Page: When this option is enabled and you click on a page that takes a long time to load for any reason, the main area of the screen is blanked out and displays a Loading message. If this option is disabled, WMI simply shows the page you were viewing until the new page loads. Using Tools on the Wireless Array 375 Logout Click on the Logout button to terminate your session. When the session is terminated, you are presented with the Arrays login window. Wireless Array Figure 183. Login Window 376 Using Tools on the Wireless Array

 

 

Wireless Array The Command Line Interface This section covers the commands and the command structure used by the Wireless Arrays Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing an SSH connection to the Array. Topics discussed include:

Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection on page 377. Getting Started with the CLI on page 379. Top Level Commands on page 381. Configuration Commands on page 390. Sample Configuration Tasks on page 426. Some commands are only available if the Arrays license includes appropriate Xirrus Advanced Feature Sets. If a command is unavailable, an error message will notify you that your license does not support the feature. See About Licensing and Upgrades on page 361. See Also Establishing Communication with the Array Network Map System Tools Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection Use this procedure to initialize the system and log in to the Command Line Interface (CLI) via a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY. When connecting to the units Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell version 2 (SSH-2) utility. Make sure that your SSH utility is set up to use SSH-2. 1. Start your SSH session and communicate with the Array via its IP address.

If the Array is connected to a network that uses DHCP, use the address assigned by DHCP. We recommend that you have the The Command Line Interface 377 Wireless Array network administrator assign a reserved address to the Array for ease of access in the future.

If the network does not use DHCP, use the factory default address 10.0.2.1 to access either the Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2 Ethernet port. You may need to change the IP address of the port on your computer that is connected to the Array change that ports IP address so that it is on the same 10.0.2.xx subnet as the Array port.

If your Array is an 8-, 12-, or 16-port model, it has a 10/100Mb Ethernet port called Ethernet0. This management port has a default IP address of 10.0.1.1. You may connect your computer directly to this port, but you will need to set the IP address of the connected port on your computer to the 10.0.1.xx subnet. 2. At the login prompt, enter your user name and password (the default for both is admin). Login names and passwords are case-sensitive. You are now logged in to the Arrays Command Line Interface. Figure 184. Logging In 378 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Getting Started with the CLI The root command prompt (Root Command Prompt) is the first prompt you see after logging in to the CLI. If you are at a level other than the root command prompt you can return to this prompt at any time by using the exit command to step back through each command prompt level. The root command prompt you see in the CLI window is determined by the host name you assigned to your Array. The prompt Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array is displayed throughout this document simply because this is the host name assigned to the Array used for development. To terminate your session at any time, use the quit command. Inputting Commands When inputting commands you need only type as many characters as the system requires before it recognizes your input. For example, you can type the abbreviated term config to access the configure prompt. Getting Help The CLI offers the following two levels of assistance:

help Command The help command is only available at the root command prompt. Initiating this command generates a window that provides information about the types of help that are available with the CLI. Figure 185. Help Window The Command Line Interface 379 Wireless Array

? Command This command is available at any prompt and provides either FULL or PARTIAL help. Using the ? (question mark) command when you are ready to enter an argument will display all the possible arguments (full help). Partial help is provided when you enter an abbreviated argument and you want to know what arguments will match your input. Figure 186. Full Help Figure 187 shows an example of how the Help system can provide the argument and format when specifying the time zone under the date-time command. Figure 187. Partial Help 380 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Top Level Commands This section offers an at-a-glance view of all top level commands organized alphabetically. Top level commands are defined here as commands that are directly accessible from the root command prompt (Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array#). The root command prompt is based on the host name assigned to your Array. When inputting commands, be aware that all commands are case-sensitive. All other commands are considered second level configuration commands these are the commands you use to configure specific elements of the Arrays features and functionality. For a listing of these commands with examples of command formats and structure, go to Configuration Commands on page 390. Root Command Prompt The following table shows the top level commands that are available from the root command prompt [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array]. Command

configure exit help history more quit search Description Type @n to execute command n (as shown by the history command). Enter the configuration mode. See Configuration Commands on page 390. Exit the CLI and terminate your session if this command is used at any level other than the root command prompt you will simply exit the current level (step back) and return to the previous level. Show a description of the interactive help system. See also, Getting Help on page 379. List history of commands that have been executed. Turn terminal pagination ON or OFF. Exit the Command Line Interface (from any level). Search for pattern in show command output. The Command Line Interface 381 Wireless Array Command show statistics Description Display information about the selected item. See show Commands on page 385. Display statistical data about the Array. See statistics Commands on page 388. uptime Display the elapsed time since the last boot. configure Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level configure command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)#]. Command Description

acl Type @n to execute command n (as shown by the history command). Configure the Access Control List. admin Define administrator access parameters. cdp clear Configure Cisco Discovery Protocol settings. Remove/clear the requested elements. cluster Make configuration changes to multiple Arrays. contact-info Contact information for assistance on this Array. date-time Configure date and time settings. dhcp-server Configure the DHCP Server. dns end exit file Configure the DNS settings. Exit the configuration mode. Go UP one mode level. Manage the file system. 382 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command filter group help history Description Define protocol filter parameters. Define user groups with parameter settings Description of the interactive Help system. List history of commands that have been executed. hostname Host name for this Array. interface Select the interface to configure. load Load running configuration from flash location Location name for this Array. management Configure array management parameters more Turn ON or OFF terminal pagination. netflow Configure NetFlow data collector. no quit Disable (if enabled) or set to default value. Exit the Command Line Interface. radius-server Configure the RADIUS server parameters. reboot reset restore Reboot the Array. Reset all settings to their factory default values and reboot. Reset all settings to their factory default values and reboot. run-tests Run selective tests. save search Save the running configuration to FLASH. Search for pattern in show command output. security Set the security parameters for the Array. The Command Line Interface 383 Wireless Array Command Description show snmp ssid Display current information about the selected item. Enable, disable or configure SNMP. Configure the SSID parameters. statistics Display statistics. syslog uptime vlan Enable, disable or configure the Syslog Server. Display time since the last boot. Configure VLAN parameters. wifi-tag Configure VLAN parameters. 384 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array show Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level show command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array# show]. Command acl admin Description Display the Access Control List. Display the administrator list or login information. array-info Display system information. associated-

stations Display stations that have associated to the Array. boot-env Display Boot loader environment variables. capabilities Display detailed station capabilities. cdp Display Cisco Discovery Protocol settings. channel-list Display list of Arrays 802.11an and bgn channels. clear-text Display and enter passwords and secrets in the clear. conntrack Display the Connection Tracking table. console Display terminal settings. contact-info Display contact information. date-time Display date and time settings summary. dhcp-leases dhcp-pool diff dns Display IP addresses (leases) assigned to stations by the DHCP server. Display internal DHCP server settings summary information. Display the difference between configurations. Display DNS summary information. The Command Line Interface 385 Wireless Array Command error-numbers Description Display the detailed error number in error messages. ethernet Display Ethernet interface summary information. external-radius Display summary information for the external RADIUS server settings. factory-config Display the Array factory configuration information. filters iap Display filter information. Display IAP configuration information. internal-radius Display the users defined for the embedded RADIUS server. lastboot-config Display Array configuration at the time of the last boot-up. management Display settings for managing the Array, plus Standby, FIPS, and other information. network-map Display network map information. realtime-monitor Display realtime statistics for all IAPs. rogue-ap Display rogue AP information. route Display the routing table. rssi-map Display RSSI map by IAP for station. running-config Display configuration information for the Array currently running. saved-config Display the last saved Array configuration. security self-test Display security settings summary information. Display self test results. snmp Display SNMP summary information. 386 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command Description spanning-tree Display spanning tree information. spectrum-

analyzer Display spectrum analyzer measurements. ssid Display SSID summary information. stations statistics syslog Display station information. Display statistics. Display the system log. syslog-settings Display the system log (Syslog) settings. temperature Display the current board temperatures. unassociated-

stations Display unassociated station information. vlan wds

<cr>

Display VLAN information. Display WDS information. Display configuration or status information. The Command Line Interface 387 statistics Commands The following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level statistics command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array# statistics]. Wireless Array Command Description ethernet Display statistical data for all Ethernet interfaces. Ethernet Name eth0, gig1, gig2 Display statistical data for the defined Ethernet interface (either eth0, gig1 or gig2). FORMAT:

statistics gig1 filter filter-list iap station vlan Display statistics for defined filters (if any). FORMAT:

statistics filter [detail]

Display statistics for defined filter list (if any). FORMAT:

statistics filter <filter-list>

Display statistical data for the defined IAP. FORMAT:

statistics iap iap2 statistics iap abgn4 Display statistical data about associated stations. FORMAT:

statistics station billw Display statistical data for the defined VLAN. You must use the VLAN number (not its name) when defining a VLAN. FORMAT:

statistics vlan 1 388 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command wds Description Display statistical data for the defined active WDS

(Wireless Distribution System) links. FORMAT:

statistics wds 1

<cr>

Display configuration or status information. The Command Line Interface 389 Wireless Array Configuration Commands All configuration commands are accessed by using the configure command at the root command prompt (Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array#). This section provides a brief description of each command and presents sample formats where deemed necessary. The commands are organized alphabetically. When inputting commands, be aware that all commands are case-sensitive. To see examples of some of the key configuration tasks and their associated commands, go to Sample Configuration Tasks on page 426. acl The acl command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# acl] is used to configure the Access Control List. Command add del disable enable reset Description Add a MAC address to the list. FORMAT:

acl add AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF Delete a MAC address from the list. FORMAT:

acl del AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF Disable the Access Control List FORMAT:

acl disable Enable the Access Control List FORMAT:

acl enable Delete all MAC addresses from the list. FORMAT:

acl reset 390 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array admin The admin command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-admin)#] is used to configure the Administrator List. Command add del edit radius Description Add a user to the Administrator List. FORMAT:

admin add [userID]

Delete a user to the Administrator List. FORMAT:

admin del [userID]

Modify user in the Administrator List. FORMAT:

admin edit [userID]

Define a RADIUS server to be used for authenticating administrators. FORMAT:

admin radius [disable | enable | off | on |

timeout <seconds> | auth-type [PAP | CHAP]]

admin radius [primary |secondary]

port <portid> server [<ip-addr> | <host>]

secret <shared-secret>

reset Delete all users and restore the default user. FORMAT:

admin reset The Command Line Interface 391 cdp The cdp command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# cdp] is used to configure the Cisco Discovery Protocol. Wireless Array Command disable enable hold-time interval off on Description Disable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:

cdp disable Enable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:

cdp enable Select CDP message hold time before messages received from neighbors expire. FORMAT:

cdp hold-time [# seconds]

The Array sends out CDP announcements at this interval. FORMAT:

cdp interval [# seconds]

Disable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:

cdp off Enable the Cisco Discovery Protocol FORMAT:

cdp on 392 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array clear The clear command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# clear] is used to clear requested elements. Command authentication Description Deauthenticate a station. FORMAT:

clear station [authenticated station]

history screen statistics syslog Clear the history of CLI commands executed. FORMAT:

clear history Clear the screen where youre viewing CLI output. FORMAT:

clear syslog Clear the statistics for a requested interface. FORMAT:

clear statistics [eth0]

Clear all Syslog messages, but continue to log new messages. FORMAT:

clear syslog The Command Line Interface 393 Wireless Array cluster The cluster command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# cluster] is used to create and operate clusters. Clusters allow you to configure multiple Arrays at the same time. Using CLI (or WMI), you may define a set of Arrays that are members of the cluster. Then you may switch the Array to Cluster operating mode for a selected cluster, which sends all successive configuration commands issued via CLI or WMI to all of the member Arrays. When you exit cluster mode, configuration commands revert to applying only to the Array to which you are connected. For more information, see Clusters on page 352. Command add del edit end Description Create a new Array cluster. Enters edit mode for that cluster to allow you to specify the Arrays that belong to the cluster. FORMAT:

cluster add [cluster-name]

Delete an Array cluster. Type del ? to list the existing clusters. FORMAT:

cluster del [cluster-name]

Enter edit mode for selected cluster to add or delete Arrays that belong to the cluster. FORMAT:

cluster edit [cluster-name]

Exit Cluster configuration mode. Configuration returns to normal operation, affecting this Array only. FORMAT:

cluster end 394 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command operate Description Enter Cluster operation mode. All configuration commands are applied to all of the selected clusters member Arrays until you give the end command (see above). FORMAT:

cluster operate [cluster-name]

reset Delete all clusters. FORMAT:

cluster reset contact-info The contact-info command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# contact-info] is used for managing administrator contact information. Command email name phone Description Add an email address for the contact (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:

contact-info email [contact@mail.com]

Add a contact name (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:

contact-info name [Contact Name]

Add a telephone number for the contact (must be in quotation marks). FORMAT:

contact-info phone [8185550101]

The Command Line Interface 395 Wireless Array date-time The date-time command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-date-time)#] is used to configure the date and time parameters. Your Array supports the Network Time Protocol (NTP) in order to ensure that the Arrays internal time is accurate. NTP is set to UTC time by default; however, you can set the time zone so that your Array will display local time. This is done by defining an offset from the UTC value. For example, Pacific Standard Time is 8 hours behind UTC time, so the offset from UTC time would be -8. Command dst_adjust no ntp offset set Description Enable adjustment for daylight savings. FORMAT:

date-time dst_adjust Disable daylight savings adjustment. FORMAT:

date-time no dst_adjust Enable the NTP server. FORMAT:

date-time ntp on (or off to disable) Set an offset from Greenwich Mean Time. FORMAT:

date-time no dst_adjust Set the date and time for the Array. FORMAT:

date-time set [10:24 10/23/2007]

timezone Configure the time zone. FORMAT:

date-time timezone [-8]

396 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array dhcp-server The dhcp-server command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-dhcp-server)#] is used to add, delete and modify DHCP pools. Command Description add del edit reset Add a DHCP pool. FORMAT:

dhcp-server add [dhcp pool]

Delete a DHCP pool. FORMAT:

dhcp-server del [dhcp pool]

Edit a DHCP pool FORMAT:

dhcp-server edit [dhcp pool]

Delete all DHCP pools. FORMAT:

dhcp-server reset The Command Line Interface 397 dns The dns command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-dns)#] is used to configure your DNS parameters. Wireless Array Command domain server1 server2 server3 Description Enter your domain name. FORMAT:

dns domain [www.mydomain.com]

Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. FORMAT:

dns server1 [1.2.3.4]

Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. FORMAT:

dns server1 [2.3.4.5]

Enter the IP address of the tertiary DNS server. FORMAT:

dns server1 [3.4.5.6]

398 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array file The file command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-file)#] is used to manage files. Command Description active-image Validate and commit a new array software image. backup-image Validate and commit a new backup software image. check-image Validate a new array software image. chkdsk Check flash file system. copy cp dir erase Copy a file to another file. FORMAT:

file copy [sourcefile destinationfile]

List the contents of a directory. FORMAT:

file dir [directory]

Delete a file from the FLASH file system. FORMAT:

file erase [filename]

format Format flash file system. ftp list Open an FTP connection with a remote server. Files will be transferred in binary mode. FORMAT:

file ftp host {<hostname> |<ip>} [port <port_#>]

[user {anonymous | <username> password

<passwd> } ] { put <source_file> [<dest_file>] |

get <source_file> [<dest_file>] }

Note: Any time you transfer any kind of software image file for the Array, it must be transferred in binary mode, or the file may be corrupted. List the contents of a file. FORMAT:

file list [filename]

The Command Line Interface 399 Wireless Array Command Description remote-config When the Array boots up, it fetches the specified configuration file from the TFTP server defined in the file remote-server command, and uses this configuration. This must be an Array configuration file with a .conf extension. A partial configuration file may be used. For instance, if you wish to use a single configuration file for all of your Arrays but don't want to have the same IP address for each Array, you may remove the ipaddr line from the file. You can then load the file on each array and the local IP addresses will not change. FORMAT:

file remote-config <config-file.conf>

Note: If you enter file remote-config ?, the help response suggests possibilities by listing all of the configuration files that are currently in the Arrays flash. remote-image When the Array boots up, it fetches the named image file from the TFTP server defined in the file remote-

server command, and upgrades to this file before booting. This must be an Array image file with a .bin extension. FORMAT:

file remote-image <image-file.bin>

Note: This will happen every time that the Array reboots. If you only want to fetch the remote-image one time be sure to turn off the remote image option after the initial download. remote-server Sets up a TFTP server to be used for automated remote update of software image and configuration files when rebooting. FORMAT:

file remote-server A.B.C.D rename Rename a file. 400 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command Description scp Copy a file to or from a remote system. You may specify the port to use. tftp Open a TFTP connection with a remote server. FORMAT:

file tftp host {<hostname> |<ip>} [port <port_#>]

[user {anonymous | <username> password

<passwd> } ] { put <source_file> [<dest_file>] |

get <source_file> [<dest_file>] }

Note: Any time you transfer any kind of software image file for the Array, it must be transferred in binary mode, or the file may be corrupted. The Command Line Interface 401 filter The filter command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-filter)#] is used to manage protocol filters and filter lists. Wireless Array Command add add-list del del-list edit edit-list enable move Description Add a filter. Details about the air cleaner feature are after the end of this table. FORMAT:

filter add [air-cleaner |name]

Add a filter list. FORMAT:

filter add-list [name]

Delete a filter. FORMAT:

filter del [name]

Delete a filter list. FORMAT:

filter del-list [name]

Edit a filter. FORMAT:

filter edit [name type]

Edit a filter list FORMAT:

filter edit-list [name type]

Enable a filter list. FORMAT:

filter enable Change a filter priority. FORMAT:

filter move [name priority]

402 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command Description off on reset Disable a filter list. FORMAT:

filter off Enable a filter list. FORMAT:

filter on Delete all protocol filters and filter lists. FORMAT:

filter reset stateful Enable or disable stateful filtering (firewall). FORMAT:

Stateful [enable | disable | on |off]

Air Cleaner The air cleaner feature offers a number of predetermined filter rules that eliminate a great deal of unnecessary wireless traffic, resulting in improved performance. You may select all of the air cleaner rules for the greatest effect, or only specific rules, such as broadcast or multicast, to eliminate only a particular source of traffic. The following options are offered:

All air cleaner filters MyArray(config)# filter add air-cleaner all arp Eliminate station to station ARPs over the air broadcast Eliminate broadcast traffic from the air dhcp Eliminate stations serving DHCP addresses from the air multicast Eliminate chatty multicast traffic from the air netbios Eliminate NetBIOS traffic from the air If you select all, the rules shown in Figure 188 are added to the predefined filter list named Global. These rules assume that you have station-to-station blocking enabled, that a DHCP server is on the Arrays wired connection, and that you want to block most all multicast and all broadcast traffic not vital to normal The Command Line Interface 403 Wireless Array operation. If you find that there is a particular type of multicast or broadcast traffic that you want to allow, just add a specific allow filter for it before the deny filter in this list that would normally block it. Add or delete any of the Multicast rules as necessary for a specific site. Remember that the order of the rules is important. Figure 188. Air Cleaner Filter Rules Explanations of some sample rules are below. Air-cleaner-Arp.1 blocks ARPs from one client from being transmitted to clients via all of the radios. The station to station block setting doesn't block this traffic, so this filter eliminates this unnecessary traffic. Air-cleaner-Dhcp.1 drops all DHCP client traffic coming in from the gigabit interface. This traffic doesn't need to be transmitted by the radios since there shouldn't be any DHCP server associated to the radios and offering DHCP addresses. For large subnets the DHCP discover/request broadcast traffic can be significant. Air-cleaner-Dhcp.2 drops all DHCP server traffic coming in from the radio interfaces. There should not be any DHCP server associated to the radios. These rogue DHCP servers are blocked from doing any damage with this filter. There have been quite a few cases in public venues like schools and conventions where such traffic is seen. 404 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Air-cleaner-Mcast.1 drops all multicast traffic with a destination MAC address starting with 01. This filters out a lot of IP multicast traffic that starts with 224. Air-cleaner-Mcast.2 drops all multicast traffic with a destination MAC address starting with 33. A lot of IPv6 traffic and other multicast traffic is blocked by this filter. Air-cleaner-Mcast.3 drops all multicast traffic with a destination MAC address starting with 09. A lot of Appletalk traffic and other multicast traffic is blocked by this filter. Note that for OSX 10.6.* Snow Leopard no longer supports Appletalk. Air-cleaner-Bcast.1 allows all ARP traffic (other than the traffic that was denied by Air-cleaner-Arp.1). This is needed because Air-cleaner-Bcast.5 would drop this valid traffic. Air-cleaner-Bcast.4 allows all XRP traffic from Arrays to be received from the wire. This is needed because Air-cleaner-Bcast.5 would drop this valid traffic. Air-cleaner-Bcast.5 drops all other broadcast traffic that hasn't previously been explicitly allowed. This filter will catch all UDP broadcast traffic as well as all other known and unknown protocol broadcast traffic. The Command Line Interface 405 Wireless Array group The group command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# group] is used to create and configure user groups. User groups allow administrators to assign specific network parameters to users through RADIUS privileges rather than having to map users to a specific SSID. Groups provide flexible control over user privileges without the need to create large numbers of SSIDs. For more information, see Groups on page 264. Command Description add del edit reset Create a new user group. FORMAT:

group add [group-name]

Delete a user group. FORMAT:

group del [group-name]

Set parameters values for a group. FORMAT:

group edit [group-name]

Reset the group. FORMAT:

group reset hostname The hostname command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# hostname] is used to change the hostname used by the Array. Command hostname Description Change the hostname of the Array. FORMAT:

hostname [name]

406 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array interface The interface command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# interface] is used to select the interface that you want to configure. To see a listing of the commands that are available for each interface, use the ? command at the selected interface prompt. For example, using the ? command at the Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-gig1}#

prompt displays a listing of all commands for the gig1 interface. Command console eth0 gig1 gig2 iap Description Select the console interface. The console interface is used for management purposes only. FORMAT:

interface console Select the Fast Ethernet interface. The Fast Ethernet interface is used for management purposes only. FORMAT:

interface eth0 Note: To configure a static route for management traffic, next enter:

static-route addr [ip-addr]

static-route mask [subnet-mask]

Select the Gigabit 1 interface. FORMAT:

interface gig1 Select the Gigabit 2 interface. FORMAT:

interface gig2 Select an IAP. FORMAT:

interface iap The Command Line Interface 407 load The load command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# load] loads a configuration file. Wireless Array Command factory.conf lastboot.conf

[myfile].conf saved.conf Description Load the factory settings configuration file. FORMAT:

load [factory.conf]

Load the configuration file from the last boot-up. FORMAT:

load [lastboot.conf]

If you have saved a configuration, enter its name to load it. FORMAT:

load [myfile.conf]

Load the configuration file with the last saved settings. FORMAT:

load [saved.conf]

location The location command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# location] is used to set the location for the Array. Command

<cr>

Description Set the location for the Array. FORMAT:

location [newlocation]

408 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array management The management command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# management] enters management mode, where you may configure management parameters. Command

<cr>

Description Enter management mode. FORMAT:

management <cr>

The following types of settings may be configured in management mode:

banner console https license load max-auth-attempts Configure login banner messages Configure console management parameters Enable/disable HTTPS access Set array software license key Load running configuration from flash Maximum number of authentication (login) attempts (0 means unlimited) network-assurance reauth-period restore revert Enable/disable network assurance Time between failed CLI login attempts Restore to previous saved config Revert to saved configuration after delay if configuration not saved save ssh standby telnet uptime xircon Save running configuration to flash Enable/disable SSH access Configure standby parameters Enable/disable telnet access Display time since last boot Enable/disable xircon access. See Xircon Users Guide for more information. Not available for XN Arrays. The Command Line Interface 409 more The more command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# more] is used to turn terminal pagination ON or OFF. Wireless Array Command Description off on Turn OFF terminal pagination. FORMAT:

more off Turn ON terminal pagination. FORMAT:

more on 410 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array netflow The netflow command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-netflow)#] is used to enable or disable, or configure sending IP flow information (traffic statistics) to the collector you specify. Command disable enable off on collector Description Disable netflow. FORMAT:

netflow disable Enable netflow. FORMAT:

netflow enable Disable netflow. FORMAT:

netflow off Enable netflow. FORMAT:

netflow on Set the netflow collector IP address or fully qualified domain name (host.domain). Only one collector may be set. If port is not specified, the default is 2055. FORMAT:

netflow collector host {<ip-addr> | <domain>}

[port <port#>]

The Command Line Interface 411 no The no command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# no] is used to disable a selected element or set the element to its default value. Wireless Array Command acl dot11a dot11bg https intrude-detect management Description Disable the Access Control List. FORMAT:

no acl Disable all 802.11an IAPs (radios). FORMAT:

no dot11a Disable all 802.11bgn IAPs (radios). FORMAT:

no dot11bg Disable https access. FORMAT:

no https Disable intrusion detection. FORMAT:

no intrude-detect Disable management on all Ethernet interfaces. FORMAT:

no management more ntp Disable terminal pagination. FORMAT:

no more Disable the NTP server. FORMAT:

no ntp 412 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command snmp ssh syslog telnet Description Disable SNMP features. FORMAT:

no snmp Disable ssh access. FORMAT:

no ssh Disable the Syslog services. FORMAT:

no syslog Disable Telnet access. FORMAT:

no telnet ETH-NAME Disable the selected Ethernet interface (eth0, gig1 or gig2). You cannot disable the console interface. with this command. FORMAT:

no eth0 (gig1 or gig2) The Command Line Interface 413 quit The quit command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# quit] is used to exit the Command Line Interface. Wireless Array Command

<cr>

Description Exit the Command Line Interface. FORMAT:

quit If you have made any configuration changes and your changes have not been saved, you are prompted to save your changes to Flash. At the prompt, answer Yes to save your changes, or answer No to discard your changes. radius-server The radius-server command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-radius-server)#] is used to configure the external and internal RADIUS server parameters. Command external internal use Description Configure an external RADIUS server. FORMAT:

radius-server external To configure a RADIUS server (primary, secondary, or accounting server, by IP address or host name), and the reporting interval use:

radius-server external accounting Configure the external RADIUS server. FORMAT:

radius-server internal Choose the active RADIUS server (either external or internal). FORMAT:

use external (or internal) 414 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array reboot The reboot command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# reboot] is used to reboot the Array. If you have unsaved changes, the command will notify you and give you a chance to cancel the reboot. Command

<cr>

delay Description Reboot the Array. FORMAT:

reboot Reboot the Array after a delay of 1 to 60 seconds. FORMAT:

reboot delay [n]

reset The reset command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# reset] is used to reset all settings to their default values then reboot the Array. Command

<cr>

preserve-ip-

settings Description Reset all configuration parameters to their factory default values. FORMAT:

reset The Array is rebooted automatically. Preserve all ethernet and VLAN settings and reset all other configuration parameters to their factory default values. FORMAT:

reset preserve-ip-settings The Array is rebooted automatically. The Command Line Interface 415 restore The restore command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# restore] is used to restore configuration to a version that was previously saved locally. Wireless Array Command

<filename>

Description Use this to display the list of available config files. FORMAT:

restore ?

Enter the name of the locally saved configuration to restore. FORMAT:

restore <config-filename>

416 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array run-tests The run-tests command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(run-tests)#] is used to enter run-

tests mode, which allows you to perform a range of tests on the Array. Command

<cr>

iperf Description Enter run-tests mode. FORMAT:

run-tests Execute iperf utility. FORMAT:

run-tests iperf kill-beacons Turn off beacons for selected single IAP. FORMAT:

run-tests kill-beacons [off | iap-name]

kill-probe-

responses led memtest ping Turn off probe responses for selected single IAP. FORMAT:

run-tests kill-probe-responses [off | iap-name]

LED test. FORMAT:

run-tests led [flash | rotate]

Execute memory tests. FORMAT:

run-tests memtest Execute ping utility. FORMAT:

run-tests ping [host-name | ip-addr]

The Command Line Interface 417 Wireless Array Command radius-ping rlb self-test site-survey ssh tcpdump Description Special ping utility to test the connection to a RADIUS server. FORMAT:

run-tests radius-ping [external | ssid <ssidnum>]

[primary | secondary] user <raduser> password

<radpasswd> auth-type [CHAP | PAP]

run-tests radius-ping [internal | server

<radserver> port <radport> secret <radsecret> ]

user <raduser> password <radpasswd>

auth-type [CHAP | PAP]

You may select a RADIUS server that you have already configured (ssid or external or internal) or specify another server. Run manufacturing radio loopback test. FORMAT:

run-tests rlb {optional command line switches}

Execute self-test. FORMAT:

run-tests self-test {logfile-name (optional)]

Enable or disable site survey mode. FORMAT:

run-tests site-survey [on | off | enable | disable]

Execute ssh utility. FORMAT:

run-tests ssh [hostname | ip-addr]

[command-line-switches (optional)]

Execute tcpdump utility to dump traffic for selected interface or VLAN. Supports 802.11 headers. FORMAT:

run-tests tcpdump 418 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command telnet traceroute Description Execute telnet utility. FORMAT:

run-tests telnet [hostname | ip-addr]

[command-line-switches (optional)]

Execute traceroute utility. FORMAT:

run-tests traceroute [host-name | ip-addr]

security The security command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-security)#] is used to establish the security parameters for the Array. Command wep wpa Description Set the WEP encryption parameters. FORMAT:

security wep Set the WEP encryption parameters. FORMAT:

security wpa The Command Line Interface 419 Wireless Array snmp The snmp command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-snmp)#] is used to enable, disable, or configure SNMP. Command Description v2 v3 trap Enable SNMP v2. FORMAT:

snmp v2 Enable SNMP v3. FORMAT:

snmp v3 Configure traps for SNMP. Up to four trap destinations may be configured, and you may specify whether to send traps for authentication failure. FORMAT:

snmp trap 420 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array ssid The ssid command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-ssid)#] is used to establish your SSID parameters. Command Description add del edit reset Add an SSID. FORMAT:

ssid add [newssid]

Delete an SSID. FORMAT:

ssid del [oldssid]

Edit an existing SSID. FORMAT:

ssid edit [existingssid]

Delete all SSIDs and restore the default SSID. FORMAT:

ssid reset The Command Line Interface 421 syslog The syslog command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-syslog)#] is used to enable, disable, or configure the Syslog server. Wireless Array Command console disable email enable local-file Description Enable or disable the display of Syslog messages on the console, and set the level to be displayed. All messages at this level and lower (i.e., more severe) will be displayed. FORMAT:

syslog console [on/off] level [0-7]

Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:

syslog disable Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:

syslog email from [email-from-address]

level [0-7]

password [email-acct-password]

server [email-server-IPaddr]

test [test-msg-text]

to-list [recipient-email-addresses]

user [email-acct-username]

Enable the Syslog server. FORMAT:

syslog enable Set the size and/or severity level (all messages at this level and lower will be logged). FORMAT:

syslog local-file size [1-500] level [0-7]

no Disable the selected feature. FORMAT:

syslog no [feature]

422 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Command Description off on primary secondary Disable the Syslog server. FORMAT:

syslog off Enable the Syslog server. FORMAT:

syslog on Set the IP address of the primary Syslog server and/or the severity level of messages to be logged. FORMAT:

syslog primary [1.2.3.4] level [0-7]

Set the IP address of the secondary (backup) Syslog server and/or the severity level of messages to be logged. FORMAT:

syslog primary [1.2.3.4] level [0-7]

uptime The uptime command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config)# uptime] is used to display the elapsed time since you last rebooted the Array. Command

<cr>

Description Display time since last reboot. FORMAT:

uptime The Command Line Interface 423 vlan The vlan command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-vlan)#] is used to establish your VLAN parameters. Wireless Array Command add default-route Description Add a VLAN. FORMAT:

vlan add [newvlan]

Assign a VLAN for the default route (for outbound management traffic). FORMAT:

vlan default-route [defaultroute]

delete edit Delete a VLAN. FORMAT:

vlan delete [oldvlan]

Modify an existing VLAN. FORMAT:

vlan edit [existingvlan]

native-vlan Assign a native VLAN (traffic is untagged). FORMAT:

vlan native-vlan [nativevlan]

no reset Disable the selected feature. FORMAT:

vlan no [feature]

Delete all existing VLANs. FORMAT:

vlan reset 424 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array wifi-tag The wifi-tag command [Xirrus_Wi-Fi_Array(config-wifi-tag)#] is used to enable or disable Wi-Fi tag capabilities. When enabled, the Array listens for and collects information about Wi-Fi RFID tags sent on the designated channels. See also Wi-

Fi Tag on page 188. Description Command disable enable off on Disable wifi-tag. FORMAT:

wifi-tag disable Enable wifi-tag. FORMAT:

wifi-tag enable Disable wifi-tag. FORMAT:

wifi-tag off Enable wifi-tag. FORMAT:

wifi-tag on tag-channel-bg udp-port Set an 802.11b or g channel for listening for tags. FORMAT:

wifi-tag tag-channel-bg <1-255>

Set the UDP port which a tagging server will use to query the Array for tagging information. FORMAT:

wifi-tag udp-port <1025-65535>

The Command Line Interface 425 Sample Configuration Tasks This section provides examples of some of the common configuration tasks used with the Wireless Array, including:

Wireless Array Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID on page 427. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP on page 428. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP on page 429. Enabling Global IAPs on page 430. Disabling Global IAPs on page 431. Enabling a Specific IAP on page 432. Disabling a Specific IAP on page 433. Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs on page 434 Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs on page 435. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP on page 436. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID on page 437. Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Tests) on page 438. To facilitate the accurate and timely management of revisions to this section, the examples shown here are presented as screen images taken from a Secure Shell

(SSH) session (in this case, PuTTY). Depending on the application you are using to access the Command Line Interface, and how your session is set up (for example, font and screen size), the images presented on your screen may be different than the images shown in this section. However, the data displayed will be the same. Some of the screen images shown in this section have been modified for clarity. For example, the image may have been elongated to show all data without the need for additional images or scrolling. We recommend that you use the Adobe PDF version of this Users Guide when reviewing these examples a hard copy document may be difficult to read. As mentioned previously, the root command prompt is determined by the host name assigned to your Array. 426 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID This example shows you how to configure a simple open global SSID. Figure 189. Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID The Command Line Interface 427 Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP This example shows you how to configure a global SSID using WPA-PEAP encryption in conjunction with the Arrays Internal RADIUS server. Wireless Array Figure 190. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP 428 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP This example shows you how to configure an SSID-specific SSID using WPA-

PEAP encryption in conjunction with the Arrays Internal RADIUS server. Figure 191. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP The Command Line Interface 429 Enabling Global IAPs This example shows you how to enable all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Wireless Array Figure 192. Enabling Global IAPs 430 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Disabling Global IAPs This example shows you how to disable all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Figure 193. Disabling Global IAPs The Command Line Interface 431 Enabling a Specific IAP This example shows you how to enable a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the IAP that is being enabled is a1 (the first IAP in the summary list). Wireless Array Figure 194. Enabling a Specific IAP 432 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Disabling a Specific IAP This example shows you how to disable a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the IAP that is being disabled is a2 (the second IAP in the summary list). Figure 195. Disabling a Specific IAP The Command Line Interface 433 Wireless Array Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs This example shows how to set the cell size for all enabled IAPs to be auto-

configured (auto). (See Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 31.) The auto_cell option may be used with global_settings, global_a_settings, or global_bg_settings. It sets the cell size of the specified IAPs to auto, and it launches an auto-

configuration to adjust the sizes. Be aware that if the intrude-detect feature is enabled on the monitor radio, its cell size is unaffected by this command. Also, any IAPs used in WDS links are unaffected. Auto-configuration may be set to run periodically at intervals specified by auto_cell period (in seconds) if period is non-zero. The percentage of overlap allowed between cells in the cell size computation is specified by auto_cell overlap (0 to 100). This example sets auto-configuration to run every 1200 seconds with an allowed overlap of 5%. It sets the cell size of all IAPs to auto, and runs a cell size auto-configure operation which completes successfully. Figure 196. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs 434 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs This example shows you how to establish the cell size for all IAPs (radios), regardless of the wireless technology they use. Be aware that if the intrude-detect feature is enabled on the monitor radio the cell size cannot be set globally you must first disable the intrude-detect feature on the monitor radio. In this example, the cell size is being set to small for all IAPs. You have the option of setting IAP cell sizes to small, medium, large, or max. See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 31. Figure 197. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs The Command Line Interface 435 Wireless Array Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP This example shows you how to establish the cell size for a specific IAP (radio). In this example, the cell size for a2 is being set to medium. You have the option of setting IAP cell sizes to small, medium, large, or max (the default is max). See also, Fine Tuning Cell Sizes on page 31. Figure 198. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP 436 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID This example shows you how to configure VLANs on an Open SSID. Setting the default route enables the Array to send management traffic, such as Syslog messages and SNMP information to a destination behind a router. Figure 199. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID The Command Line Interface 437 Wireless Array Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Tests) The Array uses its built-in monitor radio to monitor other radios in the Array. Tests include sending probes on all channels and checking for a response, and checking whether beacons are received from the other radio. If a problem is detected, corrective actions are taken to recover. Loopback mode operation is described in detail in Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities on page 460. The following actions may be configured:

alert-only the Array will issue an alert in the Syslog. repair-without-reboot the Array will issue an alert and reset radios at the Physical Layer (Layer 1) and possibly at the MAC layer. The reset should not be noticed by users, and they will not need to reassociate. reboot-allowed the Array will issue an alert, reset the radios, and schedule the Array to reboot at midnight (per local Array time) if necessary. All stations will need to reassociate to the Array. off Disable IAP loopback tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Radio Assurance mode is off by default. This is a global IAPs setting the monitor radio will monitor all other radios according to the settings above, and it cannot be set up to monitor particular radios. Radio assurance mode requires Intrusion Detection to be set to Standard. The following example shows you how to configure a loopback test. 438 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Figure 200. Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Testing) The Command Line Interface 439 Wireless Array 440 The Command Line Interface Wireless Array Appendices Appendices 441 Wireless Array Page is intentionally blank 442 Appendices Wireless Array Appendix A: Quick Reference Guide This section contains product reference information. Use this section to locate the information you need quickly and efficiently. Topics include:

Factory Default Settings on page 443. Keyboard Shortcuts on page 449. Factory Default Settings The following tables show the Wireless Arrays factory default settings. Setting Host Name Host name Network Interfaces Serial Default Value Xirrus-WiFi-Array Setting Default Value Baud Rate Word Size Stop Bits Parity Time Out 115200 8 bits 1 No parity 10 seconds 443 Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 Setting Default Value Wireless Array Enabled DHCP Bind Default IP Address Default IP Mask Default Gateway Auto Negotiate Duplex Speed MTU Size Management Enabled Server Settings NTP Enabled Primary Secondary Syslog Enabled 444 Setting Setting Yes Yes 10.0.2.1 255.255.255.0 None On Full 1000 Mbps 1500 Yes Default Value No time.nist.gov pool.ntp.org Default Value Yes Wireless Array Setting Local Syslog Level Maximum Internal Records Primary Server Primary Syslog Level Secondary Server Secondary Syslog Level SNMP Setting Enabled Default Value Information 500 None Information None Information Default Value Yes Read-Only Community String xirrus_read_only Read-Write Community String Trap Host Trap Port Authorization Fail Port DHCP Setting Enabled Maximum Lease Time Default Lease Time IP Start Range IP End Range xirrus null (no setting) 162 On Default Value No 300 minutes 300 minutes 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.254 445 Setting NAT IP Gateway DNS Domain DNS Server (1 to 3) Default SSID Wireless Array Default Value Disabled None None None Setting Default Value ID VLAN Encryption Encryption Type QoS Enabled Broadcast Security Global Settings - Encryption Setting Enabled WEP Keys WEP Key Length Default Key ID 446 xirrus None Off None 2 Yes On Default Value Yes null (all 4 keys) null (all 4 keys) 1 Wireless Array WPA Enabled TKIP Enabled AES Enabled EAP Enabled PSK Enabled Pass Phrase Group Rekey Setting Default Value No Yes Yes Yes No null Disabled External RADIUS (Global) Setting Default Value Enabled Primary Server Primary Port Primary Secret Secondary Server Secondary Port Secondary Secret Time Out (before primary server is retired) Accounting Interval Primary Server Primary Port Yes None 1812 xirrus null (no IP address) 1812 null (no secret) 600 seconds Disabled 300 seconds None 1813 447 Setting Primary Secret Secondary Server Secondary Port Secondary Secret Internal RADIUS Setting Enabled Wireless Array Default Value null (no secret) None 1813 null (no secret) Default Value No The user database is cleared upon reset to the factory defaults. For the Internal RADIUS Server you have a maximum of 1,000 entries. Administrator Account and Password Setting Default Value ID Password Management Setting SSH SSH timeout Telnet Telnet timeout 448 admin admin Default Value On 300 seconds Off 300 seconds Wireless Array Setting Serial Serial timeout Management over IAPs http timeout Default Value On 300 seconds Off 300 seconds Keyboard Shortcuts The following table shows the most common keyboard shortcuts used by the Command Line Interface. Action Cut selected data and place it on the clipboard. Copy selected data to the clipboard. Paste data from the clipboard into a document (at the insertion point). Go to top of screen. Copy the active window to the clipboard. Copy the entire desktop image to the clipboard. Abort an action at any time. Go back to the previous screen. Access the Help screen. Shortcut Ctrl + X Ctrl + C Ctrl + V Ctrl + Z Alt + Print Screen Print Screen Esc b

See Also An Overview 449 Use this Space for Your Notes Wireless Array 450 Wireless Array Appendix B: Technical Support This appendix provides valuable support information that can help you resolve technical difficulties. Before contacting Xirrus, review all topics below and try to determine if your problem resides with the Wireless Array or your network infrastructure. Topics include:

General Hints and Tips on page 451 Frequently Asked Questions on page 452 Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities on page 460 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus on page 463 Upgrading the Array via CLI on page 464 Contact Information on page 469 General Hints and Tips This section provides some useful tips that will optimize the reliability and performance of your Wireless Arrays. The Wireless Array requires careful handling. For best performance, units temperature-controlled in a dust-free and should be mounted environment. If using multiple Arrays in the same area, maintain a distance of at least 100 feet (30m) between Arrays if there is direct line-of-sight between the units, or at least 50 feet (15 m) if a wall or other barrier exists between the units. Keep the Wireless Array away from electrical devices or appliances that generate RF noise. Because the Array is generally mounted on ceilings, be aware of its position relative to lighting (especially fluorescent lighting). If you are deploying multiple units, the Array should be oriented so that the monitor abgn2 radio is oriented in the direction of the least required coverage, because when in monitor mode the radio does not function as an AP servicing stations. 451 The Wireless Array should only be used with Wi-Fi certified client Wireless Array devices. See Also Contact Information Multiple SSIDs Security VLAN Support Frequently Asked Questions This section answers some of the most frequently asked questions, organized by functional area. Multiple SSIDs Q. What Are BSSIDs and SSIDs?

A. BSSID (Basic Service Set Identifier) refers to an individual access point radio and its associated clients. The identifier is the MAC address of the access point radio that forms the BSS. A group of BSSs can be formed to allow stations in one BSS to communicate to stations in another BSS by way of a backbone that interconnects each access point. The Extended Service Set (ESS) refers to the group of BSSIDs that are grouped together to form one ESS. The ESSID (often referred to as SSID or wireless network name) identifies the Extended Service Set. Clients must associate to a single ESS at any given time. Clients ignore traffic from other Extended Service Sets that do not have the same SSID. Legacy access points typically support one SSID per access point. Xirrus Wireless Arrays support the ability for multiple SSIDs to be defined and used simultaneously. Q. What would I use SSIDs for?

452 Wireless Array A. The creation of different wireless network names allows system administrators to separate types of users with different requirements. The following policies can be tied to an SSID:

Minimum security required to join this SSID. The wireless Quality of Service (QoS) desired for this SSID. The wired VLAN associated with this SSID. As an example, one SSID named accounting might require the highest level of security, while another SSID named guests might have low security requirements. Another example may define an SSID named voice that supports voice over Wireless LAN phones with the highest possible Quality of Service

(QoS) definition. This type of SSID might also forward traffic to specific VLANs on the wired network. Q. How do I set up SSIDs?

A. Use the following procedure as a guideline. For more detailed information, go to SSIDs on page 242. 1. From the Web Management Interface, go to the SSID Management page. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Yes to make the SSID visible to all clients on the network. Although the Wireless Array will not broadcast SSIDs that are hidden, clients can still associate to a hidden SSID if they know the SSID name to connect to it. Select the minimum security that will be required by users for this SSID. If desired (optional), select a Quality of Service (QoS) setting for this SSID. The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this SSID over other SSID wireless traffic. If desired (optional), select a VLAN that you want this traffic to be forwarded to on the wired network. 453 Wireless Array 6. If desired (optional), you can select which radios this SSID will not be available on the default is to make this SSID available on all radios. 7. Click on the Save changes to flash if you wish to make your changes permanent. 8. If you need to edit any of the SSID settings, you can do so from the SSID Management page. See Also Contact Information General Hints and Tips Security SSIDs SSID Management VLAN Support Security Q. How do I know my management session is secure?

A. Follow these guidelines:

Administrator passwords Always change the default administrator password (the default is admin), and choose a strong replacement password. When appropriate, issue read only administrator accounts. SSH versus Telnet Be aware that Telnet is not secure over network connections and should be used only with a direct serial port connection. When connecting to the units Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell (SSH) utility. The most commonly used freeware providing SSH tools is PuTTY. The Array only allows SSH-2 connections, so your SSH utility must be set up to use SSH-2. 454 Wireless Array Configuration auditing Do not change approved configuration settings. The optional Xirrus Management System (XMS) offers powerful management features for small or large Wireless Array deployments, and can audit your configuration settings automatically. In addition, using the XMS eliminates the need for an FTP server. Q. Which wireless data encryption method should I use?

A. Wireless data encryption prevents eavesdropping on data being transmitted or received over the airwaves. The Wireless Array allows you to establish the following data encryption configuration options:

Open This option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) This option provides minimal protection (though much better than using an open network). An early standard for wireless data encryption and supported by all Wi-Fi certified equipment, WEP is vulnerable to hacking and is therefore not recommended for use by Enterprise networks. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is a much stronger encryption model than WEP and uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) with AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) to prevent WEP cracks. TKIP solves security issues with WEP. It also allows you to establish encryption keys on a per-user-basis, with key rotation for added security. In addition, TKIP provides Message Integrity Check (MIC) functionality and prevents active attacks on the wireless network. AES is the strongest encryption standard and is used by government agencies; however, old legacy hardware may not be capable of supporting the AES mode (it probably wont work on 455 Wireless Array older wireless clients). Because AES is the strongest encryption standard currently available, it is highly recommended for Enterprise networks. Any of the above encryption modes can be used (and can be used at the same time). TKIP encryption does not support high throughput rates, per the IEEE 802.11n. TKIP should never be used for WDS links on XN arrays. Q. Which user authentication method should I use?

A. User authentication ensures that users are who they say they are. For example, the most obvious example of authentication is logging in with a user name and password. The Wireless Array allows you to choose between the following user authentication methods:

Pre-Shared Key Users must manually enter a key (pass phrase) on the client side of the wireless network that matches the key stored by the administrator in your Wireless Arrays. RADIUS 802.1x with EAP 802.1x uses a RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) authentication methods, including EAP-TLS, EAP-

TTLS and EAP-PEAP. The RADIUS server can be internal

(provided by the Wireless Array) or external. An external RADIUS server offers more functionality and is recommended for large Enterprise deployments. When using this method, user names and passwords must be entered into the RADIUS server for user authentication. MAC Address ACLs (Access Control Lists) MAC address ACLs provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless 456 Wireless Array network. Access Control Lists work well when there are a limited number of users in this case, enter the MAC addresses of each user in the Allow list. In the event of a lost or stolen MAC adapter, enter the affected MAC address in the Deny list. Q. Why do I need to authenticate my Wireless Array units?

A. When deploying multiple Wireless Arrays, you may need to define which units are part of which wireless network (for example, if you are establishing more than one network). In this case, you need to employ the Xirrus Management System (XMS) which can authenticate your Arrays automatically and ensure that only authorized units are associated with the defined wireless network. Q. What is rogue AP (Access Point) detection?

A. The Wireless Array has integrated monitor capabilities, which can constantly scan the local wireless environment for rogue APs (non-Xirrus devices that are not part of your wireless network), unencrypted transmissions, and other security issues. Administrators can then classify each rogue AP and ensure that these devices do not interrupt or interfere with the network. See Also Contact Information General Hints and Tips Multiple SSIDs VLAN Support VLAN Support Q. What Are VLANs?

A. VLANs (Virtual Local Area Networks) are a logical grouping of network devices that share a common network broadcast domain. Members of a particular VLAN can be on any segment of the physical network but logically only members of a particular VLAN can see each other. 457 Wireless Array VLANs are defined and implemented using the wired network switches that are VLAN capable. Packets are tagged for transmission on a particular VLAN according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard, with VLAN switches processing packets according to the tag. Q. What would I use VLANs for?

A. Logically separating different types of users, systems, applications, or other logical division aids in performance and management of different network devices. Different VLANs can also be assigned with different packet priorities to prioritize packets from one VLAN over packets from another VLAN. VLANs are managed by software settings instead of physically plugging in and moving network cables and users which helps to ease network management tasks. Q. What are Wireless VLANs?

A. Wireless VLANs allow similar functionality to the wired VLAN definitions and extend the operation of wired VLANs to the wireless side of the network. Wireless VLANs can be mapped to wireless SSIDs so that traffic from wired VLANs can be sent to wireless users of a particular SSID. The reverse is also true, where wireless traffic originating from a particular SSID can be tagged for transmission on a particular wired VLAN. Sixteen SSIDs can be defined on your Wireless Array, allowing a total of sixteen VLANs to be accessed (one per SSID). As an example, to provide guest user access an SSID of guest might be created. This SSID could be mapped to a wired VLAN that segregates unknown users from the rest of the wired network and restricts them to Internet access only. Wireless users could then associate to the wireless network via the guest SSID and obtain access to the Internet through the selected VLAN, but would be unable to access other privileged network resources. See Also 458 Wireless Array Contact Information General Hints and Tips Multiple SSIDs Security 459 Wireless Array Array Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities All models of the Wireless Array have integrated monitoring capabilities to check that the Arrays radios are functioning correctly, and act as a threat sensor to detect and prevent intrusion from rogue access points. Enabling Monitoring on the Array Any radio IAP abgn2 may be set to monitor the Array or to be a normal IAP radio. In order to enable the functions required for intrusion detection and for monitoring the other Array radios, you must configure one monitor radio on the IAP Settings window as follows:

Check the Enabled checkbox. Set Mode to Monitor. Set Channel to Monitor. The settings above will automatically set to Internal-Omni., also required for monitoring. See the IAP Settings on page 274 for more details. The values above are the factory default settings for the Array. the Antenna selection How Monitoring Works When the monitor radio has been configured as just described, it performs these steps continuously (24/7) to check the other radios on the Array and detect possible intrusions:

1. The monitor radio scans all channels with a 200ms dwell time, hitting all channels about once every 10 seconds. 2. Each time it tunes to a new channel it sends out a probe request in an attempt to smoke out rogues. 3. It then listens for all probe responses and beacons to detect any rogues within earshot. 4. Array radios respond to that probe request with a probe response. Intrusion Detection is enabled or disabled separately from monitoring. See Step 1 in Advanced RF Settings on page 313. 460 Wireless Array Radio Assurance The Array is capable of performing continuous, comprehensive tests on its radios to assure that they are operating properly. Testing is enabled using the Radio Assurance Mode setting on the Advanced RF Settings window (Step 2 in Advanced RF Settings on page 313). When this mode is enabled, the monitor radio performs loopback tests on the Array. Radio Assurance Mode requires Intrusion Detection to be set to Standard (See Step 1 in Advanced RF Settings on page 313). When Radio Assurance Mode is enabled:

1. The Array keeps track of whether or not it hears beacons and probe responses from the Arrays radios. 2. After 10 minutes (roughly 60 passes on a particular channel by the monitor radio), if it has not heard beacons or probe responses from one of the Arrays radios it issues an alert in the Syslog. If repair is allowed (see Radio Assurance Options on page 462), the Array will reset and reprogram that particular radio at the Physical Layer (PHY Layer 1). This action takes under 100ms and stations are not deauthenticated, thus users should not be impacted. 3. After another 10 minutes (roughly another 60 passes), if the monitor still has not heard beacons or probe responses from the malfunctioning radio it will again issue an alert in the Syslog. If repair is allowed, the Array will reset and reprogram the MAC (the lower sublayer of the Data Link Layer) and then all of the PHYs. This is a global action that affects all radios. This action takes roughly 300ms and stations are not deauthenticated, thus users should not be impacted. 4. After another 10 minutes, if the monitor still has not heard beacons or probe responses from that radio, it will again syslog the issue. If reboot is allowed (see Radio Assurance Options on page 462), the Array will schedule a reboot. This reboot will occur at one of the following times, whichever occurs first:

When no stations are associated to the Array

Midnight 461 Wireless Array Radio Assurance Options If the monitor detects a problem with an Array radio as described above, it will take action according to the preference that you have specified in the Radio Assurance Mode setting on the Advanced RF Settings window (see Step 2 page 315):

Failure alerts only The Array will issue alerts in the Syslog, but will not initiate repairs or reboots. Failure alerts & repairs, but no reboots The Array will issue alerts and perform resets of the PHY and MAC as described above. Failure alerts & repairs & reboots if needed The Array will issue alerts, perform resets of the PHY and MAC, and schedule reboots as described above. Disabled Disable IAP loopback tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Loopback tests are disabled by default. 462 Wireless Array RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus A RADIUS VSA is defined for Xirrus Arrays to control administrator privileges settings for user accounts. The RADIUS VSA is used by Arrays to define the following attribute for administrator accounts:

Array administrators the Xirrus-Admin-Role attribute sets the privilege level for this account. Set the value to the string defined in Privilege Level Name as described in About Creating Admin Accounts on the RADIUS Server on page 218. 463 Upgrading the Array via CLI If you are experiencing difficulties communicating with the Array using the Web Management Interface, the Array provides lower-level facilities that may be used to accomplish an upgrade via the CLI and the Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL). Wireless Array 1. Download the latest software update from the Xirrus FTP site using your Enhanced Care FTP username and password. If you do not have an FTP username and password, contact Xirrus Customer Service for assistance

(support@xirrus.com). The software update is provided as a zip file. Unzip the contents to a local temp directory. Take note of the extracted file name in case you need it later on you may also need to copy this file elsewhere on the network depending on your situation. 2. Install a TFTP server software package if you don't have one running. It may be installed on any PC on your network, including your desktop or laptop. The Solar Winds version is freeware and works well. http://support.solarwinds.net/updates/New-customerFree.cfm?ProdId=52 The TFTP install process creates the TFTP-Root directory on your C:

drive, which is the default target for sending and receiving files. This may be changed if desired. This directory is where you will place the extracted Xirrus software update file(s). If you install the TFTP server on the same computer to which you extracted the file, you may change the TFTP directory to C:\xirrus if desired. You must make the following change to the default configuration of the Solar Winds TFTP server. In the File/Configure menu, select Security, then select Transmit only and click OK. 3. Determine the IP address of the computer hosting the TFTP server. (To display the IP address, open a command prompt and type ipconfig) 4. Connect your Array to the computer running TFTP using a serial cable, and open a terminal program if you haven't already. Attach a network cable to the Arrays GIG1 port, if it is not already part of your network. 464 Wireless Array Boot your Array and watch the progress messages. When Press space bar to exit to bootloader: is displayed, press the space bar. The rest of this procedure is performed using the bootloader. The following steps assume that you are running DHCP on your local network. 5. Type dhcp and hit return. This instructs the Array to obtain a DHCP address and use it during this boot in the bootloader environment. 6. Type dir and hit return to see what's currently in the compact flash. 7. Type del and hit return to delete the contents of the compact flash. 8. Type update server <TFTP-server-ip-addr> XS-5.x-xxxx.bin (the actual Xirrus file name will vary depending on Array model number and software version use the file name from your software update) and hit return. The software update will be transferred to the Array's memory and will be written to the compact flash card. (See output below.) 9. Type reset and hit return. Your Array will reboot, running your new version of software. Sample Output for the Upgrade Procedure:

The user actions are highlighted in the output below, for clarity. Username: admin Password: *****

Xirrus-WiFi-Array# configure Xirrus-WiFi-Array(config)# reboot Are you sure you want to reboot? [yes/no]: yes Array is being rebooted. Xirrus Boot Loader 1.0.0 (Oct 17 2006 - 13:11:42), Build: 2725 Processor | Motorola PowerPC, PVR=80200020 SVR=80300020 Board | Xirrus MPC8540 CPU Board Clocks | CPU : 825 MHz DDR : 330 MHz Local Bus: 41 MHz 465 Wireless Array L1 cache | Data: 32 KB Inst: 32 KB Status : Enabled Watchdog | Enabled (5 secs) I2C Bus | 400 KHz DTT | CPU:34C RF0:34C RF1:34C RF2:27C RF3:29C RTC | Wed 2007-Nov-05 6:43:14 GMT System DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC (2T) L2 cache | 256 KB, Enabled FLASH | 4 MB, CRC: OK FPGA | 2 Devices programmed Packet DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC, Enabled Network | Mot FEC Mot TSEC1 [Primary] Mot TSEC2 IDE Bus 0 | OK CFCard | 122 MB, Model: Hitachi XXM2.3.0 Environment| 4 KB, Initialized In: serial Out: serial Err: serial Press space bar to exit to bootloader:

XBL>dhcp

[DHCP ] Device : Mot TSEC1 1000BT Full Duplex

[DHCP ] IP Addr : 192.168.39.195 XBL>dir

[CFCard] Directory of /

Date Time Size File or Directory name

2007-Nov-05 6:01:56 29 lastboot 2007-Apr-05 15:47:46 28210390 xs-3.1-0433.bak 2007-Mar-01 16:39:42 storage/

2007-Apr-05 15:56:38 28210430 xs-3.1-0440.bin 2007-Mar-03 0:56:28 wpr/

3 file(s), 2 dir(s) 466 Wireless Array XBL>del *

[CFCard] Delete : 2 file(s) deleted XBL>update server 192.168.39.102 xs-3.0-0425.bin

[TFTP ] Device : Mot TSEC1 1000BT Full Duplex

[TFTP ] Client : 192.168.39.195

[TFTP ] Server : 192.168.39.102

[TFTP ] File : xs-3.0-0425.bin

[TFTP ] Address : 0x1000000

[TFTP ] Loading : ##################################################

[TFTP ] Loading : ##################################################

[TFTP ] Loading : ###### done

[TFTP ] Complete: 12.9 sec, 2.1 MB/sec

[TFTP ] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex)

[CFCard] File : xs-3.0-0425.bin

[CFCard] Address : 0x1000000

[CFCard] Saving : ############################################### done

[CFCard] Complete: 137.4 sec, 197.2 KB/sec

[CFCard] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex) XBL>reset

[RESET ]

Xirrus Boot Loader 1.0.0 (Oct 17 2006 - 13:11:42), Build: 2725 Processor | Motorola PowerPC, PVR=80200020 SVR=80300020 Board | Xirrus MPC8540 CPU Board Clocks | CPU : 825 MHz DDR : 330 MHz Local Bus: 41 MHz L1 cache | Data: 32 KB Inst: 32 KB Status : Enabled Watchdog | Enabled (5 secs) I2C Bus | 400 KHz DTT | CPU:33C RF0:32C RF1:31C RF2:26C RF3:27C RTC | Wed 2007-Nov-05 6:48:44 GMT System DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC (2T) 467 Wireless Array L2 cache | 256 KB, Enabled FLASH | 4 MB, CRC: OK FPGA | 2 Devices programmed Packet DDR | 256 MB, Unbuffered Non-ECC, Enabled Network | Mot FEC Mot TSEC1 [Primary] Mot TSEC2 IDE Bus 0 | OK CFCard | 122 MB, Model: Hitachi XXM2.3.0 Environment| 4 KB, Initialized In: serial Out: serial Err: serial Press space bar to exit to bootloader:

[CFCard] File : xs*.bin

[CFCard] Address : 0x1000000

[CFCard] Loading : ############################################### done

[CFCard] Complete: 26.9 sec, 1.0 MB/sec

[CFCard] Bytes : 27752465 (1a77811 hex)

[Boot ] Address : 0x01000000

[Boot ] Image : Verifying checksum .... OK

[Boot ] Unzip : Multi-File Image .... OK

[Boot ] Initrd : Loading RAMDisk Image

[Boot ] Initrd : Verifying checksum .... OK

[Boot ] Execute : Transferring control to OS Initializing hardware ........................................ OK Xirrus Wi-Fi Array ArrayOS Version 3.0-425 Copyright (c) 2005-2007 Xirrus, Inc. http://www.xirrus.com Username:

468 Wireless Array Contact Information Xirrus, Inc. is located in Thousand Oaks, California, just 55 minutes northwest of downtown Los Angeles and 40 minutes southeast of Santa Barbara. Xirrus, Inc. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 USA Tel:

1.805.262.1600 1.800.947.7871 Toll Free in the US 1.866.462.3980 Fax:

www.xirrus.com support.xirrus.com 469 Wireless Array 470 Wireless Array Appendix C: Notices This appendix contains the following information:

Notices on page 471 EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information on page 475 Compliance Information (Non-EU) on page 482 Safety Warnings on page 483 Translated Safety Warnings on page 484 Software License and Product Warranty Agreement on page 485 Hardware Warranty Agreement on page 491 Notices Wi-Fi Alliance Certification www.wi-fi.org FCC Notice This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, with operation subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause unwanted operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate RF energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be 471 Wireless Array determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following safety measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced wireless technician for help. Use of a shielded twisted pair (STP) cable must be used for all Ethernet connections in order to comply with EMC requirements.

FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. High Power Radars High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) in the 5250MHz to 5350MHz and 5650MHz to 5850MHz bands. These radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Non-Modification Statement Unauthorized changes or modifications to the device are not permitted. Use only the supplied internal antenna, or external antennas supplied by the manufacturer. Modifications to the device will void the warranty and may violate FCC regulations. Please go to the Xirrus Web site for a list of all approved antennas. Cable Runs for Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) If using PoGE, the Array must be connected to PoGE networks without routing cabling to the outside plant this ensures that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible cross over from high voltage. 472 Wireless Array Battery Warning

Caution! The Array contains a battery which is not to be replaced by the customer. Danger of Explosion exists if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. UL Statement Use only with listed ITE product. RF Radiation Hazard Warning To ensure compliance with FCC and Industry Canada RF exposure requirements, this device must be installed in a location where the antennas of the device will have a minimum distance of at least 30 cm (12 inches) from all persons. Using higher gain antennas and types of antennas not certified for use with this product is not allowed. The device shall not be co-located with another transmitter. Installez l'appareil en veillant conserver une distance d'au moins 30 cm entre les lments rayonnants et les personnes. Cet avertissement de scurit est conforme aux limites d'exposition dfinies par la norme CNR-102 at relative aux frquences radio. Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. 473 Wireless Array Caution :

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation l'intrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., qu'ils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. High Power Radars High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) in the 5250MHz to 5350MHz and 5650MHz to 5850MHz bands. These radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN devices used in Canada. Les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz et 5 650 - 5 850 MHz. Ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. 474 Wireless Array EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information This section contains compliance information for the Xirrus Wireless Array family of products. The compliance information contained in this section is relevant to the European Union and other countries that have implemented the EU Directive 1999/5/EC. Declaration of Conformity Cesky [Czech] Toto zahzeni je v souladu se zkladnimi poadavky a ostatnimi odpovidajcimi ustano veni mi Smrnice 1999/5/EC. Dansk [Danish] Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch [German] Dieses Gerat entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtinie 1999/5/EU. Eesti [Estonian] See seande vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EU olulistele nuetele ja teistele as jakohastele stetele. English This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Espaol [Spain] Este equipo cump le con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/

CE.

[Greek]

1999/5/EC. Franais [French] Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. 475 Wireless Array slenska [Icelandic] etta tki er samkvmt grunnkrfum og rum vieigandi kvum Tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Italiano [Italian] Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski [Latvian] iekrta atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskaj prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lietuvi [Lithuanian] is renginys tenkina 1995/5/EB Direktyvos ir kitas ios direktyvos esminius reikalavimus nuostatas. Nederlands [Dutch] Dit apparant voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1995/5/EC. Malti [Maltese] Dan l-apparant huwa konformi mal-htigiet essenzjali u l-provedimenti l-ohra rilevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/

5/EC. Margyar [Hungarian] Ez a kszlk teljesiti az alapvet kvetelmnyeket irnyelvben meghatrozott s ms 1999/5/EK vonatkoz rendelkezseket. Norsk [Norwegian] Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF. Polski [Polish] Urzdzenie jest zgodne z oglnymi wymaganiami oraz sczeglnymi mi warunkami okrelony mi Dyrektyw. UE:1999/5/EC. Portugus [Portuguese] Este equipamento est em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras provises relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Slovensko [Slovenian] Ta naprava je skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi popoji Direktive 1999/5/EC. 476 Wireless Array Slovensky [Slovak] Toto zariadenie so zkladnmi poadavkami a inmi prislunmi nariadeniami direktiv: 1999/5/EC. je v zhode Suomi [Finnish] Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5//EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien mrysten mukainen. Svenska [Swedish] Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. Assessment Criteria The following standards were applied during the assessment of the product against the requirements of the Directive 1999/5/EC:

Radio: EN 301 893 and EN 300 328 (if applicable) EMC: EN 301 489-1 and EN 301 489-17 Safety: EN 50371 to EN 50385 and EN 60601 CE Marking For the Xirrus Wireless Array, the CE mark and Class-2 identifier opposite are affixed to the equipment and its packaging:

477 WEEE Compliance Natural resources were used in the production of this equipment. Wireless Array This equipment may contain hazardous substances that could impact the health of the environment. In order to avoid harm to the environment and consumption of natural resources, we encourage you to use appropriate take-back systems when disposing of this equipment. The appropriate take-back systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of this equipment in a way that will not harm the environment. The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol

(in accordance with European Standard EN 50419) invites you to use those take-back systems and advises you not to combine the material with refuse destined for a land fill. If you need more information on collection, re-

use and recycling systems, please contact your local or regional waste administration. Please contact Xirrus for specific information on the environmental performance of our products. 478 Wireless Array National Restrictions In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands have been made available for the use of Wireless LANs. The following table provides an overview of the regulatory requirements in general that are applicable for the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. Frequency Band (MHz) Max Power Level

(EIRP) (mW) Indoor Outdoor 24002483.5 52505350*

54705725*

100 200 1000 X X X X**

N/A X

*Dynamic frequency selection and Transmit Power Control is required in these frequency bands.

**France is indoor use only in the upper end of the band. The requirements for any country may change at any time. Xirrus recommends that you check with local authorities for the current status of their national regulations for both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have additional requirements or restrictions than those listed in the above table:

Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Xirrus recommends checking at www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. 479 Wireless Array Les liasons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mters doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez www.bipt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Greece A license from EETT is required for the outdoor operation in the 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz band. Xirrus recommends checking www.eett.gr for more details. 54705725 z

, . www.eett.gr Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owners property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check with www.communicazioni.it/it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato allinterno del proprio fondo, lutilizzo di prodotti wireless LAN richiede una autorizzazione Generale. Consultare www.communicazioni.it/it/ per maggiori dettagli. Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. Calculating the Maximum Output Power The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP (radiated power). The EIRP level of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector

(specified in dBm). 480 Wireless Array Antennas The Xirrus Wireless Array employs integrated antennas that cannot be removed and which are not user accessible. Nevertheless, as regulatory limits are not the same throughout the EU, users may need to adjust the conducted power setting for the radio to meet the EIRP limits applicable in their country or region. Adjustments can be made from the products management interface either Web Management Interface (WMI) or Command Line Interface (CLI). Operating Frequency The operating frequency in a wireless LAN is determined by the access point. As such, it is important that the access point is correctly configured to meet the local regulations. See National Restrictions in this section for more information. If you still have questions regarding the compliance of Xirrus products or you cannot find the information you are looking for, please contact us at:

Xirrus, Inc. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 USA Tel:

1.805.262.1600 1.800.947.7871 Toll Free in the US 1.866.462.3980 Fax:

www.xirrus.com 481 Wireless Array Compliance Information (Non-EU) This section contains compliance information for the Xirrus Wireless Array family of products. The compliance information contained in this section is relevant to the listed countries (outside of the European Union and other countries that have implemented the EU Directive 1999/5/EC). Declaration of Conformity Mexico XN16: Cofetel Cert #: RCPXIXN10-1052 XN12: Cofetel Cert #: RCPXIXN10-1052-A1 XN8: Cofetel Cert #: RCPXIXN10-1052-A2 XN4: Cofetel Cert #: RCPXIXN10-1052-A3 Thailand This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement. 482 Wireless Array Safety Warnings

Safety Warnings Read all user documentation before powering this device. All Xirrus interconnected equipment should be contained indoors. This product is not suitable for outdoor operation. Please verify the integrity of the system ground prior to installing Xirrus equipment. Additionally, verify that the ambient operating temperature does not exceed 40C. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Do not operate the XR Series Wireless Array near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Lightning Activity Warning Do not work on the XR Series Wireless Array or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity. Circuit Breaker Warning The XR Series Wireless Array relies on the buildings installation for over current protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC, 15A (U.S.) or 240 VAC, 10A (International) is used on all current-carrying conductors. Translated safety warnings appear on the following page. 483 Translated Safety Warnings Avertissements de Scurit Wireless Array

Scurit Lisez l'ensemble de la documentation utilisateur avant de mettre cet appareil sous tension. Tous les quipements Xirrus interconnects doivent tre installs en intrieur. Ce produit n'est pas conu pour tre utilis en extrieur. Veuillez vrifier l'intgrit de la terre du systme avant d'installer des quipements Xirrus. Vrifiez galement que la temprature de fonctionnement ambiante n'excde pas 40C. Proximit d'appareils explosifs N'utilisez pas l'unit XR Wireless Array proximit d'amorces non blindes ou dans un environnement explosif, moins que l'appareil n'ait t spcifiquement modifi pour un tel usage. Foudre N'utilisez pas l'unit XR Wireless Array et ne branchez pas ou ne dbranchez pas de cbles en cas de foudre. Disjoncteur L'unit XR Wireless Array dpend de l'installation du btiment pour ce qui est de la protection contre les surintensits. Assurez-vous qu'un fusible ou qu'un disjoncteur de 120 Vca, 15 A (tats-Unis) ou de 240 Vca, 10 A (International) maximum est utilis sur tous les conducteurs de courant. 484 Wireless Array Software License and Product Warranty Agreement THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THE AGREEMENT) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (CUSTOMER) AND LICENSOR (AS DEFINED BELOW) AND GOVERNS THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PRODUCT (AS DEFINED BELOW). IF YOU ARE AN EMPLOYEE OR AGENT OF CUSTOMER, YOU HEREBY REPRESENT AND WARRANT TO LICENSOR THAT YOU HAVE THE POWER AND AUTHORITY TO ACCEPT AND TO BIND CUSTOMER TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT

(INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTY TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETURN THE PRODUCT AND ALL ACCOMPANYING MATERIALS (INCLUDING ALL DOCUMENTATION) TO THE RELEVANT VENDOR FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE THEREFORE. CUSTOMER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT AND SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED AN AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING SUCH SOFTWARE AND THAT CUSTOMER IS BOUND BY AND BECOMES A PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT. 1.0 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Documentation means the user manuals and all other all documentation, instructions or other similar materials accompanying the Software covering the installation, application, and use thereof. 1.2 Licensor means XIRRUS and its suppliers. 1.3 Product means a multi-radio access point containing four or more distinct radios capable of simultaneous operation on four or more non-overlapping channels. 1.4 Software means, collectively, each of the application and embedded software programs delivered to Customer in connection with this Agreement. For purposes of this Agreement, the term Software shall be deemed to include any and all Documentation and Updates provided with or for the Software. 1.5 Updates means any bug-fix, maintenance or version release to the Software that may be provided to Customer from Licensor pursuant to this Agreement or pursuant to any separate maintenance and support agreement entered into by and between Licensor and Customer. 2.0 GRANT OF RIGHTS 2.1 Software. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Licensor hereby grants to Customer a perpetual, non-exclusive, non-sublicenseable, non-transferable right and license to use the Software solely as installed on 485 Wireless Array the Product in accordance with the accompanying Documentation and for no other purpose. 2.2 Ownership. The license granted under Sections 2.1 above with respect to the Software does not constitute a transfer or sale of Licensor's or its suppliers'

ownership interest in or to the Software, which is solely licensed to Customer. The Software is protected by both national and international intellectual property laws and treaties. Except for the express licenses granted to the Software, Licensor and its suppliers retain all rights, title and interest in and to the Software, including (i) any and all trade secrets, copyrights, patents and other proprietary rights therein or thereto or (ii) any Marks (as defined in Section 2.3 below) used in connection therewith. In no event shall Customer remove, efface or otherwise obscure any Marks contained on or in the Software. All rights not expressly granted herein are reserved by Licensor. 2.3 Copies. Customer shall not make any copies of the Software but shall be permitted to make a reasonable number of copies of the related Documentation. Whenever Customer copies or reproduces all or any part of the Documentation, Customer shall reproduce all and not efface any titles, trademark symbols, copyright symbols and legends, and other proprietary markings or similar indicia of origin (Marks) on or in the Documentation. 2.4 Restrictions. Customer shall not itself, or through any parent, subsidiary, affiliate, agent or other third party (i) sell, rent, lease, license or sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the Software, or any of Customer's rights and obligations under this Agreement except as expressly permitted herein; (ii) decompile, disassemble, or reverse engineer the Software, in whole or in part, provided that in those jurisdictions in which a total prohibition on any reverse engineering is prohibited as a matter of law and such prohibition is not cured by the fact that this Agreement is subject to the laws of the State of California, Licensor agrees to grant Customer, upon Customer's written request to Licensor, a limited reverse engineering license to permit interoperability of the Software with other software or code used by Customer; (iii) allow access to the Software by any user other than by Customer's employees and contractors who are bound in writing to confidentiality and non-use restrictions at least as protective as those set forth herein; (iv) except as expressly set forth herein, write or develop any derivative software or any other software program based upon the Software;

(v) use any computer software or hardware which is designated to defeat any copy protection or other use limiting device, including any device intended to limit the number of users or devices accessing the Product; (vi) disclose information about the performance or operation of the Product or Software to any third party without the prior written consent of Licensor; or (vii) engage a third party to perform benchmark or functionality testing of the Product or Software. 486 Wireless Array 3.0 LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 3.1 Limited Warranty & Exclusions. Licensor warrants that the Software will perform in substantial accordance with the specifications therefore set forth in the Documentation for a period of ninety [90] days after Customer's acceptance of the terms of this Agreement with respect to the Software

(Warranty Period). If during the Warranty Period the Software or Product does not perform as warranted, Licensor shall, at its option, correct the relevant Product and/or Software giving rise to such breach of performance or replace such Product and/or Software free of charge. THE FOREGOING ARE CUSTOMER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF THE FOREGOING WARRANTY. THE WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE IS MADE TO AND FOR THE BENEFIT OF CUSTOMER ONLY. The warranty will apply only if (i) the Software has been used at all times and in accordance with the instructions for use set forth in the Documentation and this Agreement; (ii) no modification, alteration or addition has been made to the Software by persons other than Licensor or Licensor's authorized representative; and (iii) the Software or Product on which the Software is installed has not been subject to any unusual electrical charge. IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, 3.2 DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS SECTION 3, ALL ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES, WHETHER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS. THIS DISCLAIMER SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY AND LIMITED REMEDY OFFERED BY LICENSOR FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. ALL WARRANTIES PROVIDED BY LICENSOR ARE SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT. 3.3 HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT DESIGNED OR INTENDED FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF A NUCLEAR FACILITY, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROLS OR OTHER DEVICES OR SYSTEMS IN WHICH A MALFUNCTION OF THE SOFTWARE WOULD RESULT IN FORSEEABLE RISK OF INJURY OR DEATH TO THE OPERATOR OF THE DEVICE OR SYSTEM OR TO OTHERS (HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS). CUSTOMER ASSUMES ANY AND ALL RISKS, INJURIES, LOSSES, CLAIMS AND ANY OTHER LIABILITIES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN ANY HAZARDOUS APPLICATIONS. 487 Wireless Array 3.4 Limitation of Liability.

(a) TOTAL LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE HEREIN, ALL LIABILITY OF LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY CUSTOMER FOR THE RELEVANT SOFTWARE, OR PORTION THEREOF, THAT GAVE RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY OR ONE HUNDRED UNITED STATES DOLLARS (US$100), WHICHEVER IS GREATER. THE LIABILITY OF LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER THIS SECTION SHALL BE CUMULATIVE AND NOT PER INCIDENT. SPECIAL,

(b) DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL LICENSOR, ITS SUPPLIERS OR THEIR RELEVANT SUBCONTRACTORS BE LIABLE FOR (A) ANY INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS OR LOST OR DAMAGED DATA, OR ANY INDIRECT DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT, TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT LIABILITY) OR

(B) ANY COSTS OR EXPENSES FOR THE OTHERWISE OR PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES IN EACH CASE, EVEN IF LICENSOR OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 3.5 Exclusions. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY AND LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN THE EVENT YOU ARE LOCATED IN ANY SUCH JURISDICTION, THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY ONLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED IN SUCH JURISDICTIONS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOREGOING EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS ON DAMAGES BE DEEMED TO APPLY TO ANY LIABILITY BASED ON FRAUD, WILLFUL MISCONDUCT, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. 4.0 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION 4.1 Generally. The Software (and its accompanying Documentation) constitutes Licensor's and its suppliers' proprietary and confidential information and contains valuable trade secrets of Licensor and its suppliers (Confidential Information). Customer shall protect the secrecy of the Confidential Information to the same extent it protects its other valuable, proprietary and confidential information of a similar nature but in no event shall Customer use less than reasonable care to maintain the secrecy of the Confidential Information. Customer shall not use the Confidential Information except to exercise its rights or perform its obligations as set forth under this Agreement. Customer shall not disclose such Confidential Information to any third party other than subject to non-use and non-disclosure obligations at least as 488 Wireless Array protective of a party's right in such Confidential Information as those set forth herein. 4.2 Return of Materials. Customer agrees to (i) destroy all Confidential Information (including deleting any and all copies contained on any of Customer's Designated Hardware or the Product) within fifteen (15) days of the date of termination of this Agreement or (ii) if requested by Licensor, return, any Confidential Information to Licensor within thirty (30) days of Licensor's written request. 5.0 TERM AND TERMINATION 5.1 Term. Subject to Section 5.2 below, this Agreement will take effect on the Effective Date and will remain in force until terminated in accordance with this Agreement. 5.2 Termination Events. This Agreement may be terminated immediately upon written notice by either party under any of the following conditions:

(a) If the other party has failed to cure a breach of any material term or condition under the Agreement within thirty (30) days after receipt of notice from the other party; or

(b) Either party ceases to carry on business as a going concern, either party becomes the object of the institution of voluntary or involuntary proceedings in bankruptcy or liquidation, which proceeding is not dismissed within ninety (90) days, or a receiver is appointed with respect to a substantial part of its assets. 5.3 Effect of Termination.

(a) Upon termination of this Agreement, in whole or in part, Customer shall pay Licensor for all amounts owed up to the effective date of termination. Termination of this Agreement shall not constitute a waiver for any amounts due.

(b) The following Sections shall survive the termination of this Agreement for any reason: Sections 1, 2.2, 2.4, 3, 4, 5.3, and 6.

(c) No later than thirty (30) days after the date of termination of this Agreement by Licensor, Customer shall upon Licensor's instructions either return the Software and all copies thereof; all Documentation relating thereto in its possession that is in tangible form or destroy the same (including any copies thereof contained on Customer's Designated Hardware). Customer shall furnish Licensor with a certificate signed by an executive officer of Customer verifying that the same has been done. 489 Wireless Array 6. MISCELLANEOUS If Customer is a corporation, partnership or similar entity, then the license to the Software and Documentation that is granted under this Agreement is expressly conditioned upon and Customer represents and warrants to Licensor that the person accepting the terms of this Agreement is authorized to bind such entity to the terms and conditions herein. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, it will be enforced to the extent permissible and the remainder of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. During the course of use of the Software, Licensor may collect information on your use thereof; you hereby authorize Licensor to use such information to improve its products and services, and to disclose the same to third parties provided it does not contain any personally identifiable information. The express waiver by either party of any provision, condition or requirement of this Agreement does not constitute a waiver of any future obligation to comply with such provision, condition or requirement. Customer and Licensor are independent parties. Customer may not export or re-export the Software or Documentation (or other materials) without appropriate United States, European Union and foreign government licenses or in violation of the United State's Export Administration Act or foreign equivalents and Customer shall comply with all national and international laws governing the Software. This Agreement will be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of California and the United States as applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California, without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof and the parties expressly exclude the application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sales of Goods and the Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act (as promulgated by any State) to this Agreement. Suits or enforcement actions must be brought within, and each party irrevocably commits to the exclusive jurisdiction of, the state and federal courts located in Ventura County, California. Customer may not assign this Agreement by operation of law or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Licensor and any attempted assignment in violation of the foregoing shall be null and void. This Agreement cancels and supersedes all prior agreements between the parties. This Agreement may not be varied except through a document agreed to and signed by both parties. Any printed terms and conditions contained in any Customer purchase order or in any Licensor acknowledgment, invoice or other documentation relating to the Software shall be deemed deleted and of no force or effect and any additional typed and/or written terms and conditions contained shall be for administrative purposes only, i.e. to identify the types and quantities of Software to be supplied, line item prices and total price, delivery schedule, and other similar ordering data, all in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 490 Wireless Array Hardware Warranty Agreement PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, RETURN THE UNUSED PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND. LIMITED WARRANTY. Xirrus warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase by the original purchaser (Customer): (i) the Xirrus Equipment

(Equipment) will be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use; and (ii) the Equipment substantially conforms to its published specifications. Except for the foregoing, the Equipment is provided AS IS. This limited warranty extends only to Customer as the original purchaser. Customer's exclusive remedy and the entire liability of Xirrus and its suppliers under this limited warranty will be, at Xirrus' option, repair, replacement, or refund of the Equipment if reported (or, upon request, returned) to the party supplying the Equipment to Customer. In no event does Xirrus warrant that the Equipment is error free or that Customer will be able to operate the Equipment without problems or interruptions. This warranty does not apply if the Equipment (a) has been altered, except by Xirrus, (b) has not been installed, operated, repaired, or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Xirrus, (c) has been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress, misuse, negligence, or accident, or (d) is used in ultra-

hazardous activities. DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THIS WARRANTY, ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS, AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW. IN NO EVENT WILL XIRRUS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT, OR DATA, OR INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT EVEN IF XIRRUS OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Xirrus' or its suppliers' liability to Customer, PARTICULAR SPECIAL, FOR A FITNESS FOR 491 Wireless Array whether in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, exceed the price paid by Customer. The foregoing limitations shall apply even if the above-stated warranty fails of its essential purpose. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES. The above warranty DOES NOT apply to any evaluation Equipment made available for testing or demonstration purposes. All such Equipment is provided AS IS without any warranty whatsoever. Customer agrees the Equipment and related documentation shall not be used in life support systems, human implantation, nuclear facilities or systems or any other application where failure could lead to a loss of life or catastrophic property damage, or cause or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. All information or feedback provided by Customer to Xirrus with respect to the Product shall be Xirrus' property and deemed confidential information of Xirrus. Equipment including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Equipment. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, United States of America, as if performed wholly within the state and without giving effect to the principles of conflict of law. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this Warranty shall remain in full force and effect. This Warranty constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Equipment. Manufacturer is Xirrus, Inc. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 492 Wireless Array Glossary of Terms 802.11a A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 5 GHz and data rates of up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 2.4 GHz and data rates of up to 11 Mbps. 802.11d A supplement to the Media Access Control (MAC) layer in 802.11 to promote worldwide use of 802.11 WLANs. It allows Access Points to communicate information on the permissible radio channels with acceptable power levels for user devices. Because the 802.11 standards cannot legally operate in some countries, 802.11d adds features and restrictions to allow WLANs to operate within the rules of these countries. 802.11g A supplement to the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification that describes radio transmissions at a frequency of 2.4 GHz and data rates of up to 54 Mbps. 802.11n A supplement enhancements to 802.11a/b/g to greatly enhance reach, speed, and capacity. the IEEE 802.11 WLAN specification to that describes 802.1Q An IEEE standard for MAC layer frame tagging (also known as encapsulation). Frame tagging uniquely assigns a user-defined ID to each frame. It also enables a switch to communicate VLAN membership information across multiple (and multi-vendor) devices by frame tagging. AES

(Advanced Encryption Standard) A data encryption scheme that uses three different key sizes (128-bit, 192-bit, and 256-bit). AES was adopted by the U.S. government in 2002 as the encryption standard for protecting sensitive but unclassified electronic data. Glossary of Terms 493 Wireless Array authentication The process that a station, device, or user employs to announce its identify to the network which validates it. IEEE 802.11 specifies two forms of authentication, open system and shared key. bandwidth Specifies the amount of the frequency spectrum that is usable for data transfer. In other words, it identifies the maximum data rate a signal can attain on the medium without encountering significant attenuation (loss of power). beacon interval When a device in a wireless network sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval, which specifies the period of time before it will send the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. Network administrators can adjust the beacon interval usually measured in milliseconds (ms) or its equivalent, kilo-microseconds (Kmsec). bit rate The transmission rate of binary symbols ('0' and '1'), equal to the total number of bits transmitted in one second. BSS

(Basic Service Set) When a WLAN is operating in infrastructure mode, each access point and its connected devices are called the Basic Service Set. BSSID The unique identifier for an access point in a BSS network. See also, SSID. CDP

(Cisco Discovery Protocol) CDP is a layer 2 network protocol which runs on most Cisco equipment and some other network equipment. It is used to share information with other directly connected network devices. Information such as the model, network capabilities, and IP address is shared. Wireless Arrays can both advertise their presence by sending CDP announcements, and gather and display information sent by neighbors. 494 Glossary of Terms Wireless Array cell The basic geographical unit of a cellular communications system. Service coverage of a given area is based on an interlocking network of cells, each with a radio base station (transmitter/receiver) at its center. The size of each cell is determined by the terrain and forecasted number of users. channel A specific portion of the radio spectrum the channels allotted to one of the wireless networking protocols. For example, 802.11b and 802.11g use 14 channels in the 2.4 GHz band, only 3 of which don't overlap (1, 6, and 11). CoS

(Class of Service) A category based on the type of user, type of application, or some other criteria that QoS systems can use to provide differentiated classes of service. default gateway The gateway in a network that a computer will use to access another network if a gateway is not specified for use. In a network using subnets, a default gateway is the router that forwards traffic to a destination outside of the subnet of the transmitting device. DHCP

(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) A method for dynamically assigning IP addresses to devices on a network. DHCP issues IP addresses automatically within a specified range to client devices when they are first powered up. DHCP lease The DHCP lease is the amount of time that the DHCP server grants to the DHCP client for permission to use a particular IP address. A typical DHCP server allows its administrator to set the lease time. DNS

(Domain Name System) A system that maps meaningful domain names with complex numeric IP addresses. DNS is actually a separate network if one DNS server cannot translate a domain name, it will ask a second or third until a server is found with the correct IP address. Glossary of Terms 495 Wireless Array domain The main name/Internet address of a user's Internet site as registered with the InterNIC organization, which handles domain registration on the Internet. For example, the domain address for Xirrus is: http://www.xirrus.com, broken down as follows:

http:// represents the Hyper Text Teleprocessing Protocol used by all Web pages. www is a reference to the World Wide Web. xirrus refers to the company. com specifies that the domain belongs to a commercial enterprise. DTIM

(Delivery Traffic Indication Message) A DTIM is a signal sent as part of a beacon by an access point to a client device in sleep mode, alerting the device to a packet awaiting delivery. EAP

(Extensible Authentication Protocol) When you log on to the Internet, you're most likely establishing a PPP connection via a remote access server. The password, key, or other device you use to prove that you are authorized to do so is controlled via PPPs Link Control Protocol (LCP). However, LCP is somewhat inflexible because it has to specify an authentication device early in the process. EAP allows the system to gather more information from the user before deciding which authenticator to use. It is called extensible because it allows more authenticator types than LCP (for example, passwords and public keys). EDCF

(Enhanced Distributed Coordinator Function) A QoS extension which uses the same contention-based access mechanism as current devices but adds offset contention windows that separate high priority packets from low priority packets (by assigning a larger random backoff window to lower priorities than to higher priorities). The result is statistical priority, where high-priority packets usually are transmitted before low-priority packets. encapsulation A way of wrapping protocols such as TCP/IP, AppleTalk, and NetBEUI in Ethernet frames so they can traverse an Ethernet network and be unwrapped when they reach the destination computer. 496 Glossary of Terms Wireless Array encryption Any procedure used in cryptography to translate data into a form that can be decrypted and read only by its intended receiver. Fast Ethernet A version of standard Ethernet that runs at 100 Mbps rather than 10 Mbps. FCC

(Federal Communications Commission) US wireless regulatory authority. The FCC was established by the Communications Act of 1934 and is charged with regulating Interstate and International communications by radio, television, wire, satellite and cable. FIPS The Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140-2 establishes a computer security standard used to accredit cryptographic modules. The standard is a joint effort by the U.S. and Canadian governments. frame A packet encapsulated to travel on a physical medium, like Ethernet or Wi-Fi. If a packet is like a shipping container, a frame is the boat on which the shipping container is loaded. Gigabit 1 through 4 The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on XR Series Arrays. XR-4000 Series Arrays have two gigabit interfaces, while XR-6000 Series and higher models have four gigabit interfaces. See also, Gigabit Ethernet. Gigabit Ethernet A version of Ethernet with data transfer rates of 1 Gigabit (1,000 Mbps). Group A user group, created to define a set of attributes (such as VLAN, traffic limits, and Web Page Redirect) and privileges (such as fast roaming) that apply to all users that are members of the group. This allows a uniform configuration to be easily applied to multiple user accounts. The attributes that can be configured for user groups are almost identical to those that can be configured for SSIDs. Glossary of Terms 497 Wireless Array host name The unique name that identifies a computer on a network. On the Internet, the host name is in the form comp.xyz.net. If there is only one Internet site the host name is the same as the domain name. One computer can have more than one host name if it hosts more than one Internet site (for example, home.xyz.net and comp.xyz.net). In this case, comp and home are the host names and xyz.net is the domain name. IPsec A Layer 3 authentication and encryption protocol. Used to secure VPNs. MAC address

(Media Access Control Address) A 6-byte hexadecimal address assigned by a manufacturer to a device. Mbps

(Megabits per second) A standard measure for data transmission speeds (for example, the rate at which information travels over the Internet). 1 Mbps denotes one million bits per second. MTU

(Maximum Transmission Unit) The largest physical packet size measured in bytes that a network can transmit. Any messages larger than the MTU are divided into smaller packets before being sent. Every network has a different MTU, which is set by the network administrator. Ideally, you want the MTU to be the same as the smallest MTU of all the networks between your machine and a message's final destination. Otherwise, if your messages are larger than one of the intervening MTUs, they will get broken up (fragmented), which slows down transmission speeds. NTP

(Network Time Protocol) An Internet standard protocol (built on top of TCP/IP) that ensures the accurate synchronization (to the millisecond) of computer clock times in a network of computers. Running as a continuous background client program on a computer, NTP sends periodic time requests to servers, obtaining server time stamps and using them to adjust the client's clock. 498 Glossary of Terms Wireless Array packet Data sent over a network is broken down into many small pieces packets by the Transmission Control Protocol layer of TCP/IP. Each packet contains the address of its destination as well the data. Packets may be sent on any number of routes to their destination, where they are reassembled into the original data. This system is optimal for connectionless networks, such as the Internet, where there are no fixed connections between two locations. PLCP

(Physical Layer Convergence Protocol) Defined by IEEE 802.6, a protocol specified within the Transmission Convergence layer that defines exactly how cells are formatted within a data stream for a particular type of transmission facility. PoGE This refers to the optional Xirrus-supplied Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules that provide DC power to Arrays. Power is supplied over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable that supplies the data connection to your gigabit Ethernet switch, thus eliminating the need to run a power cable. preamble Preamble (sometimes called a header) is a section of data at the head of a packet that contains information that the access point and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. PLCP Has two structures, a long and a short preamble. All compliant 802.11b systems have to support the long preamble. The short preamble option is provided in the standard to improve the efficiency of a network's throughput when transmitting special data, such as voice, VoIP

(Voice-over IP) and streaming video. private key In cryptography, one of a pair of keys (one public and one private) that are created with the same algorithm for encrypting and decrypting messages and digital signatures. The private key is provided only to the requestor and never shared. The requestor uses the private key to decrypt text that has been encrypted with the public key by someone else. PSK

(Pre-Shared Key) A TKIP passphrase used to protect your network traffic in WPA. Glossary of Terms 499 Wireless Array public key In cryptography, one of a pair of keys (one public and one private) that are created with the same algorithm for encrypting and decrypting messages and digital signatures. The public key is made publicly available for encryption and decryption. QoS

(Quality of Service) QoS can be used to describe any number of ways in which a network provider prioritizes or guarantees a service's performance. RADIUS

(Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) A client-server security protocol, developed to authenticate, authorize, and account for dial-up users. The RADIUS server stores user profiles, which include passwords and authorization attributes. RSSI

(Received Signal Strength Indicator) A measure of the energy observed by an antenna when receiving a signal. SDMA

(Spatial Division Multiple Access) A wireless communications mode that optimizes the use of the radio spectrum and minimizes cost by taking advantage of the directional properties of antennas. The antennas are highly directional, allowing duplicate frequencies to be used for multiple zones. SNMP

(Simple Network Management Protocol) A standard protocol that regulates network management over the Internet. SNTP

(Simple Network Time Protocol) A simplified version of NTP. SNTP can be used when the ultimate performance of the full NTP implementation described in RFC 1305 is not needed or justified. 500 Glossary of Terms Wireless Array SSH

(Secure SHell) Developed by SSH Communications Security, Secure Shell is a program to log into another computer over a network, to execute commands in a remote machine, and to move files from one machine to another. The Array only allows SSH-2 connections. SSH-2 provides strong authentication and secure communications over insecure channels. SSH-2 protects a network from attacks, such as IP spoofing, IP source routing, and DNS spoofing. Attackers who has managed to take over a network can only force SSH to disconnect they cannot play back the traffic or hijack the connection when encryption is enabled. When using SSH-2's slogin (instead of rlogin) the entire login session, including transmission of password, is encrypted making it almost impossible for an outsider to collect passwords. Be aware that your SSH utility must be set up to use SSH-2. SSID

(Service Set IDentifier) Every wireless network or network subset (such as a BSS) has a unique identifier called an SSID. Every device connected to that part of the network uses the same SSID to identify itself as part of the family when it wants to gain access to the network or verify the origin of a data packet it is sending over the network. In short, it is the unique name shared among all devices in a WLAN. subnet mask A mask used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to. An IP address has two components: (1) the network address and (2) the host address. For example, consider the IP address 150.215.017.009. Assuming this is part of a Class B network, the first two numbers (150.215) represent the Class B network address, and the second two numbers (017.009) identify a particular host on this network. TKIP

(Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) Provides improved data encryption by scrambling the keys using a hashing algorithm and, by adding an integrity-

checking feature, ensures that the encryption keys havent been tampered with. transmit power The amount of power used by a radio transceiver to send the signal out. Transmit power is generally measured in milliwatts, which you can convert to dBm. User group See Group. Glossary of Terms 501 Wireless Array VLAN

(Virtual LAN) A group of devices that communicate as a single network, even though they are physically located on different LAN segments. Because VLANs are based on logical rather than physical connections, they are extremely flexible. A device that is moved to another location can remain on the same VLAN without any hardware reconfiguration. VLAN tagging

(Virtual LAN tagging) Static port-based VLANs were originally the only way to segment a network without using routing, but these port-based VLANs could only be implemented on a single switch (or switches) cabled together. Routing was required to transfer traffic between unconnected switches. As an alternative to routing, some vendors created proprietary schemes for sharing VLAN information across switches. These methods would only operate on that vendor's equipment and were not an acceptable way to implement VLANs. With the adoption of the 802.11n standard, traffic can be confined to VLANs that exist on multiple switches from different vendors. This interoperability and traffic containment across different switches is the result of a switch's ability to use and recognize 802.1Q tag headers called VLAN tagging. Switches that implement 802.1Q tagging add this tag header to the frame directly after the destination and source MAC addresses. The tag header indicates:

1. That the packet has a tag. 2. Whether the packet should have priority over other packets. 3. Which VLAN it belongs to, so that the switch can forward or filter it correctly. WDS (Wireless Distribution System) WDS creates wireless backhauls between arrays. These links between arrays may be used rather than having to install data cabling to each array. WEP

(Wired Equivalent Privacy) An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. The Wired Equivalent Privacy generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers. 502 Glossary of Terms Wireless Array Wi-Fi Alliance A nonprofit international association formed in 1999 to certify interoperability of wireless Local Area Network products based on IEEE 802.11 specification. The goal of the Wi-Fi Alliance's members is to enhance the user experience through product interoperability. Wireless Array A high capacity wireless networking device consisting of multiple radios arranged in a circular array. WPA

(Wi-Fi Protected Access) A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication. WPA2

(Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode. Xirrus Management System (XMS) A Xirrus product used for managing large Wireless Array deployments from a centralized Web-based interface. XP1 and XP8 Power over Gigabit Ethernet modules See PoGE. XPS Xirrus Power System A family of optional Xirrus-supplied products that provides power over Gigabit Ethernet. See PoGE. Glossary of Terms 503 Wireless Array 504 Glossary of Terms Wireless Array Index Numerics 11n see IEEE 802.11n 35 802.11a 3, 5, 274, 293 802.11a/b/g 26 802.11a/b/g/n 15 802.11a/n 15, 63, 249 802.11b 3, 5, 298 802.11b/g 274, 298 802.11b/g/n 15, 63, 249 802.11e 16 802.11g 3, 5, 298 802.11i 5, 71, 161 802.11n 5 see IEEE 802.11n 35 WMI page 304 802.11p 16 802.11q 16 802.1x 5, 46, 56, 71, 161, 454 A abg(n) abg(n)2 nomenclature 2 intrusion detection 331 self-monitoring radio assurance

(loopback mode) 314, 315 Access Control List 208 Access Control Lists 454 access control lists (ACLs) 227, 262 ACLs 46, 208, 454 active IAPs Address Resolution Protocol per SSID 261 window 109 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 290 Admin 454 Admin ID 214 admin ID authentication via RADIUS 218 Admin Management 214 admin privileges setting in admin RADIUS account 218 admin RADIUS account if using Console port 218 admin RADIUS authentication 218 administration 71, 161, 208 Administrator Account 448 Advanced Encryption Standard 46, 454 see RAM 18 see RPM 16 see RSM 17 Advanced RF Analysis Manager Advanced RF Performance Manager Advanced RF Security Manager AeroScout see WiFi tag 188 AES 5, 16, 46, 56, 71, 161, 446, 454 allow traffic see filters 344 Analysis Manager see RAM 18 appearance WMI options 373 WMI, changing 373 approved setting rogues 120 APs 56, 119, 240, 454 rogues, blocking 331 APs, rogue see rogue APs 313, 331 ARP filtering 290 Index 505 ARP table window 109 Array 28, 62, 63, 84, 161, 171 connecting 62 dismounting 62 management 359 mounting 62 powering up 63 securing 62 Web Management Interface 84 ArrayOS upgrade 362 Arrays managing in clusters 352 associated users 28 assurance network server connectivity 112, 225 assurance (radio loopback testing) 313 assurance, station see station assurance 320 attack (DoS) see DoS attack 332 attack (impersonation) see impersonation attack 333 authentication 16 of admin via RADIUS 218 authority certificate 212, 225 auto block rogue APs, settings 331 auto negotiate 171 auto-blocking rogue APs 331 auto-configuration 71, 280, 293, 298 channel and cell size 313 automatic refresh setting interval 374 automatic update from remote server configuration files, boot image 363 Wireless Array B backhaul see WDS 53 backup unit see standby mode 314 band association 249 beacon interval 280 Beacon World Mode 280 beam distribution 15 benefits 14 block rogue APs, settings 328 block (rogue APs) see auto block 331 blocking rogue APs 331 blocking rogue APs 313 boot 362 broadcast 291 fast roaming 291 browser certificate error 212, 225 BSS 452 BSSID 119, 452 buttons 91 C capacity of 802.11n 42 cascading style sheet sample for web page redirect 369 cdp 392 CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) settings 183 cdp CLI command 392 CDP neighbors 111 cell sharp cell 313 cell size 28, 274 auto-configuration 313 506 Index Wireless Array cell size configuration 313 certificate about 212, 225 authority 212, 225 error 212, 225 install Xirrus authority 225 X.509 212, 225 channel auto-configuration 313 configuration 313 list selection 313 channels 28, 119, 274, 280, 293, 298 non-overlapping 15 CHAP

(Challenge-Handshake Au-

thentication Protocol) Admin RADIUS settings 219 web page redirect 258 CHAP Challenge Handshake Authen-

tication Protocol) RADIUS ping 370 character restrictions 93 Chrome 24 Cisco Discovery Protocol see cdp 392 Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) 183 CLI 5, 56, 59, 66, 377 executing from WMI 371 using to upgrade software image 464 CLI commands see commands 392 client cluster web page redirect 368 CLI command 394 clusters 352 defining 353 management 354 operating in cluster mode 355 command wifi-tag 425 Command Line Interface 5, 52, 59, 63, 66, 377, 454 configuration commands 390 getting help 379 getting started 379 inputting commands 379 sample configuration tasks 426 SSH 377 top level commands 381 command, utilities ping, traceroute, RADIUS ping 369 commands acl 390 admin 391 cdp 392 clear 393 cluster 394 configure 382 contact-info 395 date-time 396 dhcp-server 397 dns 398 file 399 filter 402 group 394, 406 hostname 406 interface 407 load 408 location 408 management 409 more 410 netflow 411 no 412 quit 414 radius-server 414 reboot 415, 423 reset 415 restore 416 run-tests 417 Index 507 security 419 show 385 snmp 420 ssid 421 statistics 388 syslog 422 vlan 424 Community String 445 configuration 159, 454 express setup 161 reset to factory defaults 366 configuration changes applying 92 configuration files automatic update from remote server 363 download 364 update from local file 364 update from remote file 364 servers, see network assurance connection tracking window 110 connectivity 112, 225 Console port login via 218 Contact Information 469 contact information 469 coverage 28, 59 extended 15 coverage patterns 5 critical messages 89 CTS/RTS 293, 298 D data rate 293, 298 data rates increased by 802.11n 41 date/time restrictions and interactions 268 Wireless Array default gateway 71, 171 default settings 443 Default Value 446 DHCP 445 defaults reset configuration to factory de-

faults 366 Delivery Traffic Indication Message 280 denial of service see DoS attack 332 deny traffic see filters 344 deployment 26, 52, 56, 59, 454 ease of 15 detection intrusion 331 see DoS attack 332 see impersonation attack 333 see impersonation detection 332 see intrusion detection 332, 333 DHCP 28, 66, 71, 161, 171, 444 default settings 445 leases window 110 DHCP Server 184 diagnostics log, create file 366 display WMI options 373 DNS 71, 161, 181 DNS domain 181 DNS server 181 Domain Name System 181 DoS attack detection settings 332 DTIM 280 DTIM period 280 duplex 171 dynamic VLAN overridden by group 267 508 Index Wireless Array E EAP 446, 454 EAP-MDS 16 EAP-PEAP 454 EAP-TLS 16, 46, 454 EAP-TTLS 16, 46, 454 EDCF 280 Encryption 446, 454 encryption 16 encryption method recommended (WPA2 with AES) 210 setting 211 support of multiple methods 210 encryption method (encryption mode) Open, WEP, WPA, WPA2, WPA-

Both 209 encryption standard AES, TKIP, both 210 setting 211 Enterprise 1, 3, 454 WLAN 3 Enterprise Class Management 5 Enterprise Class Security 5 ESS 452 ESSID 452 Ethernet 59, 62, 63, 66, 71, 161 event log IDS (intrusion detection) 157 see system log 150, 156 event messages 89 Express Setup 62, 71, 161 express setup 71, 161 Extended Service Set 452 Extensible Authentication Protocol 454 external RADIUS server 802.1x 25 F factory default settings 443 factory defaults 444, 445, 446, 448 Index DHCP 445 reset configuration to 364 factory.conf 364 fail-over standby mode 314 failover 42, 56 FAQs 452 Fast Ethernet 59, 66, 161, 171, 443 fast roaming 15, 106, 291 about 273 and VLANs 273 features 14, 52, 171, 187, 190, 280, 454 and license key 363 feedback 91 filter list 345 filter name 347 filtering IPv6 291 filters 344, 345, 347 stateful filtering, disabling 346 statistics 147 Firefox 24 firewall 344 and port usage 48 stateful filtering, disabling 346 fragmentation threshold 293, 298 frequently asked questions 452 FTP 454 FTP server 25 G General Hints 451 getting started express setup 161 Gigabit 59, 66, 71, 161, 171, 443 global settings 280, 293, 298 glossary of terms 493 Google Chrome 24 Group management 266 509 group 264 viewing window 157 CLI command 394, 406 VLAN overrides dynamic VLAN IEEE 3, 71, 161 IEEE 802.11n Wireless Array 267 group limits and interactions 268 Group Rekey 446 guard interval short, for IEEE 802.11n 40 see WMI 373 GUI H help button, bottom of page 91 button, left frame 88 Help button 84 help button 91 host name 71, 84, 161, 181 hs.css 369 HTTPS certificate, see certificate 225 HTTPS port web page redirect 255, 259, 260 HyperTerminal 24, 59 I IAP 28, 63, 71, 161, 274, 293, 298, 334 active SSIDs 261 fast roaming 273 Intrusion Detection (IDS/IPS) 328 naming 2 settings 274 IAP LED 63, 334 IAP LED settings 334 IAPs auto block rogues 331 intrusion detection 331 IDS see Intrusion Detection 328 IDS event log capacity, increased 42 deployment considerations 35 guard interval, short 40 improved MAC throughput 40 increased data rates 41 MIMO 36 multiple data streams 38 spatial multiplexing 38 WMI page 304 IEEE 802.1Q 457 image upgrade software image 362 impersonation attack detection implementing Voice over Wi-Fi 26, settings 333 199, 244 installation 23, 57, 62, 441 installing the MCAP-3616 59 mounting the unit 62 requirements 23 workflow 57 installation workflow 57 interfaces 161 Web 83 internal login page web page redirect 256 web page redirect, customize 258 internal splash page web page redirect 257 web page redirect, customize 258 Internet Explorer 24 interval automatic WMI refresh 374 intrusion detection 119, 331 and auto block settings 331 configuration 313 setting as approved or known 120 510 Index Wireless Array intrusion detection (IDS) viewing event log 157 Intrusion Detection (IDS/IPS) 328 IP Address 28, 71, 84, 92, 119, 161, 171, 181, 190, 194, 359, 444 IP Subnet Mask 71 IPS IPv6 filtering 291 see Intrusion Detection 328 K key upgrade 363 key features 14 Keyboard Shortcuts 449 keyboard shortcuts 449 known setting rogues 120 L lastboot.conf 364 Layer 3 fast roaming 273 lease 444 Lease Time 444 leases, DHCP viewing 110 LEDs 63 sequence 63 settings 334 license Key limits upgrading 363 group 268 interactions 268 station 268 traffic 268 list, access control see access control list 227, 262 list, MAC access see access control list 227 list, SSID access see access control list 262 location information 71, 84, 161 log diagnostics, create file 366 log messages counters 89 log, IDS(intrusion detection) viewing window 157 log, system (event) viewing window 150, 156 logging in 66, 92 Login 92 login via Console port 218 login page web page redirect 256, 368 web page redirect, customize 258 logout 376 long retry limit 280 loopback see radio assurance 438 loopback testing radio assurance mode 313 M MAC 46, 66, 452, 454 MAC Access Control Lists 46 MAC Access List 227 MAC address 227, 452, 454 MAC throughput improved by IEEE 802.11n 40 Management 448, 454 management 95, 159, 359 Array clusters 352 of Arrays 359 Web Management Interface (WMI) 83 Index 511 maximum lease 444 Maximum Lease Time 444 Megabit 71 menu behavior WMI 375 Message Integrity Check 454 messages syslog counters 89 MIC 16, 454 MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) 36 mode cluster operating mode 355 monitoring intrusion detection 119 see intrusion detection 331 mounting 62 mounting plate 62 mounting the unit 62 MTU 171 size 171 multiple data streams 38 table - see connection tracking 110 N NAT neighbors, CDP 111 Netflow 187 netflow CLI command 411 network interfaces 169 settings 171 network assurance 112, 225 network connections 59, 92, 454 network installation 23, 441 network interface ports 66 network interfaces 171, 443 network status ARP table window 109 connection Wireless Array tracking window 110 routing table window 109 viewing leases 110 Network Time Protocol 71, 161, 185 network tools ping, traceroute, RADIUS ping 369 nomenclature 2 non-overlapping channels 15 NTP 71, 161, 185, 444 NTP Server 185 O Open (encryption method) 210 optimization, VLAN 291 options WMI 373 overview 5 P page loading WMI 375 PAP (Password Authentication Proto-

col) Admin RADIUS settings 219 RADIUS ping 370 web page redirect 258 passphrase 46, 71, 161 Password 448, 454 password 92 PEAP 16, 340 performance 14 Performance Manager see RPM 16 Ping 359 ping 369 planning 42, 45, 46, 52 failover 42 network management 52 port failover 42 power 45 512 Index Wireless Array security 46 switch failover 42 WDS 53 PoGE 23 see Power over Gigabit Ethernet 12 PoGE Power Injectors 1 port failover 42 port requirements 48 power outlet 23 Power over Gigabit Ethernet 2, 23, 45, 59 Power over Gigabit Ethernet (PoGE) 12 power planning 45 pre-shared key 46, 56, 454 Print button 84 print button 91 probe see Netflow 187 product installation 23, 441 product overview 5 product specifications 22 PSK 56, 446 PuTTY 23, 52, 71, 161, 454 PuTTy 24 Q QoS 16, 249, 446, 452, 500 conflicting values 247 levels defined 250, 267 priority 249 SSID 244, 250 about setting QoS 453 default QoS 446 user group 267 quality of user experience 320 Quality of Service 16 see QoS 250, 267 quick reference guide 443 quick start express setup 161 R radio assurance (self-test) 314, 315 radio assurance (loopback testing) 313 radio assurance (loopback) mode 314, 315 radio distribution 14 radios naming 2 RADIUS 5, 23, 46, 56, 208, 227, 262, 444, 454 admin authentication 218 setting admin privileges 218 setting user VSAs 234 Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs) 463 RADIUS ping CHAP Challenge Handshake Au-

thentication Protocol) 370

(Password Authentication Protocol) 370 PAP RADIUS Ping command 369 RADIUS Server 444 RADIUS server 25 RADIUS settings web page redirect 258 RAM (RF Analysis Manager) 18 reauthentication 280 reboot 362 redirect (WPR) 368 refresh interval WMI 374 remote boot image automatic update from remote TFTP server 363 remote configuration automatic update from remote server 363 Index 513 remote TFTP server automatic update of boot image, configuration 363 Reset 359, 444 reset configuration to factory defaults 366 restore command 416 restrictions date/time 268 stations 268 traffic 268 RF intrusion detection 313 spectrum management 313 RF Analysis Manager see RAM 18 RF configuration 313 RF management see channel 313 RF Performance Manager see RPM 16 RF resilience 313 RF Security Manager see RSM 17 roaming 15, 106, 291 see fast roaming 273 Rogue AP 5, 52, 119, 240, 454 rogue AP blocking 331 settings for blocking 328 Rogue AP List 119 rogue APs auto block settings 331 blocking 313 Rogue Control List 240 rogue detection 15 rogues setting as known or approved 120 root command prompt 381 route Wireless Array trace route utility 369 routing table window 109 RPM (RF Performance Manager) 16 RSM (RF Security Manager) 17 RSSI 119 RTS 293, 298 RTS threshold 293, 298 S Safari 24 sample Perl and CSS files for 368 save with reboot 362 Save button 84 saved.conf 364 scalability 3 schedule auto channel configuration 313 Secondary Port 444 Secondary Server 444 secret 444 Secure Shell 24 secure Shell 23 security 5, 16, 208, 452, 454 certificate, see certificate 225 Security Manager see RSM 17 see group 264 self-monitoring 331 radio assurance 438 radio assurance options 314, 315 self-test radio assurance mode 314, 315 serial port 24, 66, 454 server, VTun see VTun 203 servers connectivity, see network assur-

ance 112, 225 Service Set Identifier 71 514 Index Wireless Array Services 184, 452 servicing the unit 441 settings 161 setup, express 161 sharp cell 313 setting in WMI 317 short retry limit 280 signal processing MIMO 36 skin changing WMI appearance 373 SNMP 5, 13, 71, 161, 171, 184, 194, 445 required for XMS 194, 195 software upgrade license key 363 software image upgrading via CLI 464 Software Upgrade 359 software upgrade 362 spatial multiplexing 38 specifications 22 spectrum (RF) management 313 speed 3, 66, 171 11 Mbps 3 54 Mbps 3 splash page web page redirect 257, 368 web page redirect, customize 258 SSH 23, 24, 52, 71, 161, 171, 209, 448, 454 SSH-2 209 SSID 5, 71, 84, 119, 161, 240, 249, 446, 452, 457 about usage 452 active IAPs 261 QoS 244, 250 about using 453 QoS, about usage 452 web page redirect settings 253 web page redirect settings, about 255, 259, 260 SSID Access List 262 SSID address 262 SSID Management 249, 446, 452 standby mode 314 stateful filtering disabling 346 static IP 71, 161, 171 station assurance 320 station assurance 320 station timeout period 280 Stations 452 stations limits and interactions 268 rogues 120 statistics 148 statistics per station 149 statistics 161 filters 147 netflow 187 per-station 149 stations 148 WDS 145 status bar 84, 91 style WMI appearance 373 submitting comments 91 subnet 23, 42, 71, 171 switch failover 42 synchronize 71, 161, 185 Syslog 71, 84, 161, 184, 190, 444 time-stamping 71 syslog messages counters 89 Syslog reporting 190 Syslog Server 190 system commands ping, trace route, RADIUS ping 369 Index 515 Wireless Array System Configuration Reset 359 System Log 190 system log viewing window 150, 156 System Reboot 359 System Tools 359 system tools 360 Trap Host 445 trap port 194, 445 tunneled fast roaming 291 Tunnels 204 tunnels see VTun 199, 203 T tag, WiFi 188 T-bar 62 T-bar clips 62 TCP port requirements 48 technical support contact information 469 frequently asked questions 452 Telnet 209, 448, 454 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol 454 TFTP server automatic update of boot image, configuration 363 Time Out 444 time zone 71, 161, 185 timeout 280, 359 Tips 451 TKIP 16, 46, 56, 71, 161, 446, 454 TKIP encryption and XN Arrays 231 tool 369 Tools 359, 454 tools, network 369 tools, system 360 trace route utility 369 traffic filtering 344 limits and interactions 268 transmit power 28 U UDP Unit 62 port requirements 48 attaching 62 mounting 62 unknown setting rogues 120 upgrade license key 363 software image 362 upgrading software image via CLI 464 user accounts user group 264 QoS 267 setting RADIUS VSAs 234 user group limits and interactions 268 user interface 83 utilities ping, trace route, RADIUS ping V Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs) RADIUS, for Xirrus 463 virtual tunnels see VTun 203 VLAN 5, 56, 249, 446, 452, 457 broadcast optimization 291 dynamic ping, trace route, RADIUS ping 369 utility buttons 91 516 Index Wireless Array overridden by group 267 group (vs. dynamic VLAN) 267 vlan CLI command 424 VLAN ID 249 VLANs 199 and fast roaming 273 voice fast roaming 273 implementing on Array 26, 199, 244 Voice-over IP 298 VoIP 298 VoWLAN 16 VPN 71, 161, 454 VTS VTun Virtual Tunnel Server 199, 203 specifying tunnel server 199, 203 understanding 199 W wall thickness considerations 26 warning messages 89 WDS 338, 340 about 53 long distance 278, 339 planning 53 statistics 145 timeouts 278, 339 WDS Client Links 340 Web interface structure and navigation 88 web interface 83 Web Management Interface 52, 62, 63, 66, 92, 452 Web Management Interface (WMI) 83 web page redirect 368 also called WPR 368 CHAP (Challenge-Handshake Au-

thentication Protocol) 258 login/splash internal customize page 258 HTTPS port 255, 259, 260 install files for 368 internal login page 256 internal splash page 257 PAP, CHAP 258 RADIUS settings 258 remove files for 369 sample WPR files 369 SSID settings 253 SSID settings, about 255, 259, 260 WEP 16, 46, 71, 161, 208, 249, 446, 454 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption method 210 WEP encryption and XN Arrays 232 Wi-Fi Protected Access 5, 46, 71, 161, 454 WiFi tag 188 wifi-tag CLI command 425 window loading WMI 375 Wired Equivalent Privacy 71, 454 Wireless Distribution System 338 wireless LAN 3 wireless security 161 WLAN 161 WMI 5, 52, 56, 66, 83, 274 appearance options 373 appearance, changing 373 certificate error 212, 225 executing CLI commands 371 menu behavior 375 options 373 page loading 375 refresh interval 374 workflow 57 Index 517 WPA 5, 56, 71, 161, 208, 249, 446, 454 WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and WPA2 encryption method 210 XN4 1, 5 XN8 1, 5 XP PoGE Power Injectors 1 XP1, XP8 Wireless Array see Power over Gigabit Ethernet 12 XPS 23 XRP 15, 106, 291 xs_current.conf 364 xs_diagnostic.log 367 see web page redirect 368 wpr.pl 368, 369 WPA2 5 WPR X X.509 Xirrus certificate 212, 225 certificate authority 225 Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manag-

er see RAM 18 Manager see RPM 16 see RSM 17 Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager Xirrus Management System 5, 13, 15, 23, 25, 52, 454 SNMP required 194, 195 Xirrus Management System (XMS) 1 Xirrus PoGE Power Injectors 1 Xirrus Power over Gigabit Ethernet 23 Xirrus Roaming Protocol 15, 106, 291 XMS 5, 13, 15, 25 port requirements 48 setting IP address of 194 SNMP required 194, 195 management 159, 359 see also IEEE 802.11n 35 XN Array XN Arrays XN12 1, 5 XN16 1, 5 management 359 518 Index High Performance Wireless Networks 1.800.947.7871 Toll Free in the US

+1.805.262.1600 Sales

+1.805.262.1601 Fax 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320, USA 201 Xirrus, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The Xirrus logo is a registered trademark of Xirrus, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Content subject to change without notice. To learn more visit:

xirrus.com or email info@xirrus.com 800-0022-001F

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Peter Krebill, peter.krebill@xirrus.com Stan Lyles Stanley.Lyles@fcc.gov To:

From:

Re: FCC ID:

Applicant:

Correspondence Reference Number:

Form 731 Confirmation Number:

Date of Original E-mail:

SK6-XR520 Xirrus, Inc. 44364 EA987011 09/12/2013 1) Explain how the bridge mode works. Does this have an effect on DFS operations (ie: channel move time). Answer:

There is no bridge mode for this product. Bridge mode requires 2 gig-e ports which this product does not have. There is no bridging between radios. Therefore this is an N/A.

 

 

Description of Permissive Change The application is prepared for FCC class II permissive change by adding DFS band through software enabling to its original parent application. Both devices, original and updated versions, are electrically identical in all aspects except enabling frequency bands of 5260 ~ 5320 MHz and 5500 ~ 5700 MHz. FCC ID: SK6-XR520 signature Robert Huang Senior Engineer Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch Tel: 886-3-3183232 ext. 1608 Fax: 886-3-3270892 Email: robert.huang@tw.bureauveritas.com Data: December 7, 2012 Reference no.: RF130328C25

 

 

Declaration letter Date: 2013-07-04 FCC ID: SK6-XR520 To Whom It May Concern:

We declare that all US models do not have country code selection function and is limited to US channels only. Further, we declare that no third party will have software, or configuration control, to program the device out of compliance of the technical rules under which it has been certified. Thank you for your attention. Sincerely yours, Steve Smith / VP Hardware Engineering Xirrus, Inc. Tel: 805-262-1668 Fax: 806-262-1601 E-mail: steve.smith@xirrus.com

 

 

Date: 2013-06-06 FCC ID: SK6-XR520 Declaration for DFS master devices We, Xirrus, INC. hereby declare that the (1) band from 5600-5650MHz will be disabled by the software during the manufacturing and which cannot be changed by the end-

user (2)this device meets all the other requirements specified in Part 15E Section 15.407. If you should have any question(s) regarding this declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you!

Xirrus, Inc. Tel: 805-262-1667 Fax: 805-262-1601 E-mail: steve.smith@xirrus.com Page 1 of 1 2101 Corporate Center Drive 805.262.1660 Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 866.262.1661 Fax www. xirrus.com

 

 

Xirrus, INC. 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, California 91320 Agency Authorization Letter Date : 2013-01-30 FCC ID: SK6-XR520 To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services

(ELK) Ltd, Taoyuan Branch (BV CPS Taoyuan) of Taiwan to act on our behalf, as our agent, in the following matters related to the FCC approval of our products: report submittal, related correspondence, the signing of all documents relating to these matters, and any other lawful activity necessary to obtain such certification. Any act carried out by BV CPS Taoyua within the scope of this authorization shall have the same effects as our own. Sincerely yours, Steve Smith / VP Hardware Engineering Xirrus, Inc. TEL : 805-262-1667 FAX : 805-262-1601 E-mail: steve.smith@xirrus.com

 

 

Hi Andy, Hope all is well with you. We wanted to respond to your question regarding bridge mode. We think of bridge mode as a wired Ethernet feature and the XR520 does not support this. We are sorry for the confusion regarding our response. Upon our return, Benny and I explained to our colleagues what your concern was regarding extending the range by having one array talk to another. This is what we refer to as a WDS link. It allows one array to be configured as a host and one array as a client and then the two can communicate with each other over these dedicated radios. When the XR520 sees radar, whether it be on the host array or the client array, we change channels. This keeps us from transmitting on a channel that has radar. Please let us know if you need further explanation of this feature. Thank you and best regards, Lynn 2101 Corporate Center Drive Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 805.262.1600 805.262.1601 Fax www.xirrus.com